emacs.guide

                   MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
                    ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LABORATORY





     AI Memo 554                                        2 October 1981






                        EMACS MANUAL FOR ITS USERSî                        EMACS MANUAL FOR ITS USERSî                        EMACS MANUAL FOR ITS USERS


                                    BYî                                    BYî                                    BY


                            RICHARD M. STALLMANî                            RICHARD M. STALLMANî                            RICHARD M. STALLMAN


                            A REFERENCE MANUALî                            A REFERENCE MANUALî                            A REFERENCE MANUAL


            FOR THE EXTENSIBLE, CUSTOMIZABLE, SELF-DOCUMENTINGî            FOR THE EXTENSIBLE, CUSTOMIZABLE, SELF-DOCUMENTINGî            FOR THE EXTENSIBLE, CUSTOMIZABLE, SELF-DOCUMENTING


                         REAL-TIME DISPLAY EDITORî                         REAL-TIME DISPLAY EDITORî                         REAL-TIME DISPLAY EDITOR


               This manual corresponds to EMACS version 161









     This  report  describes  work done at the Artificial Intelligence
     Laboratory of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.  Support
     for the laboratory's research is provided in part by the Advanced
     Research Projects Agency  of  the  Department  of  Defense  under
     Office of Naval Research contract N00014-80-C-0505.î     1                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                  PREFACEî                                  PREFACEî                                  PREFACE



       This  manual  documents the use and simple customization of the
     display editor EMACS with the ITS operating system.   The  reader
         ___î     is  not  expected to be a programmer.  Even simple customizations
     do not require  programming  skill,  but  the  user  who  is  not
     interested  in customizing can ignore the scattered customization
     hints.

       This is primarily a reference manual, but can also be used as a
     primer.  However, I recommend that the  newcomer  first  use  the
     on-line,    learn-by-doing   tutorial   TEACHEMACS,   by   typing
     :TEACHEMACS<cr> while in HACTRN.  With it,  you  learn  EMACS  by
     using   EMACS  on  a  specially  designed  file  which  describes
     commands, tells you when to  try  them,  and  then  explains  the
     results  you  see.    This gives a more vivid introduction than a
     printed manual.

       On first reading, you need not make  any  attempt  to  memorize
     chapters  1  and  2, which describe the notational conventions of
     the manual and  the  general  appearance  of  the  EMACS  display
     screen.   It is enough to be aware of what questions are answered
     in these chapters, so you can refer back when  you  later  become
     interested  in  the  answers.    After  reading the Basic Editing
     chapter you should practice the commands there.    The  next  few
     chapters  describe  fundamental  techniques and concepts that are
     referred to again and again.   It  is  best  to  understand  them
     thoroughly, experimenting with them if necessary.

       To  find the documentation on a particular command, look in the
     index if you know what the command is.  Both  command  characters
     and  function  names  are  indexed.  If you know vaguely what the
     command does, look in the command summary.  The  command  summary
     contains  a line or two about each command, and a cross reference
     to the section of the manual that describes the command  in  more
     detail;  related  commands are grouped together.  There is also a
     glossary, with a cross reference for each term.

       Many user-contributed libraries accompany EMACS, and often then
     have no documentation except  their  on-line  self-documentation.
     Browsing  through  the catalogue of libraries in this manual is a
     good way to find out what is available.

       This manual has in two versions,  one  for  ITS,  and  one  for
     Twenex,  DEC's  "TOPS-20"  system.    Each version comes in three
     forms: the published form, the LPT form, and the INFO form.   You
     can  order the published form from the Publications Department ofî     2                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     the  Artificial  Intelligence  lab for $3.25 per copy; be sure to
     specify the ITS version or the Twenex version.  The LPT  form  is
     available   on   line   as  EMACS;EMACS  GUIDE  for  printing  on
     unsophisticated hard copy devices  such  as  terminals  and  line
     printers.    The  INFO  form is for on-line perusal with the INFO
     program.  All three forms are substantially the same.

       EMACS is available for distribution for use on Tenex and Twenex
     systems (It does not run on Bottoms-10, and the conversion  would
     not  be  easy).  Mail us a 2400 foot mag tape if you want it.  It
     does  not  cost  anything;  instead,  you  must  join  the  EMACS
     software-sharing  commune.  The conditions of membership are that
     you must send back any improvements you make to EMACS,  including
     any  libraries  you write, and that you must not redistribute the
     system except exactly as you got it, complete.    (You  can  also
     distribute your customizations, separately.)

       Please  do  not attempt to get a copy of EMACS, for yourself or
     any one else, by dumping it off of your  local  system.    It  is
     almost  certain to be incomplete or inconsistent.  It is pathetic
     to hear from sites that received incomplete  copies  lacking  the
     sources, asking me years later whether sources are available.  If
     you  wish  to give away a copy of EMACS, copy a distribution tape
     from MIT, or mail me a tape and get a new one.

       For information on the underlying philosophy of EMACS  and  the
     lessons  learned  from its development, write to me for a copy of
     AI   memo   519a,   "EMACS,    the    Extensible,    Customizable
     Self-Documenting   Display  Editor",  or  send  Arpanet  mail  to
     RMS@MIT-AI.


                                      Yours in hacking,



                                           /  2 \ 1/2
                                          <  X   >
                                           \    /


                                          Richard M. Stallman
                                          Artificial Intelligence Lab
                                          545 Tech Square, Rm 913
                                          Cambridge, MA 02139
                                          (617) 253-6765î     3                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               INTRODUCTIONî                               INTRODUCTIONî                               INTRODUCTION



       You   are   about   to   read   about   EMACS,   an   advanced,
     self-documenting,  customizable,  extensible  real-time   display
     editor.

       We say that EMACS is a display editor because normally the text
     being   edited   is   visible   on  the  screen  and  is  updated
     automatically  as  you  type  your  commands.    See  section   1
     [Display], page 5.

       We  call  it  a real-time editor because the display is updated
     very  frequently,  usually  after  each  character  or  pair   of
     characters  you  type.   This minimizes the amount of information
     you must keep in your head as you edit.  See section  3  [Basic],
     page 15.

       We  call  EMACS advanced because it provides facilities that go
     beyond simple insertion and deletion: filling of text;  automatic
     indentation  of  programs; viewing two files at once; and dealing
     in terms of characters, words, lines, sentences, paragraphs,  and
     pages,  as  well as expressions and comments in several different
     programming languages.  It is much easier  to  type  one  command
     meaning "go to the end of the paragraph" than to find the desired
     spot with repetition of simpler commands.

       Self-documenting  means that at any time you can type a special
     character, the "Help" key, to find out  what  your  options  are.
     You can also use it to find out what any command does, or to find
     all  the commands that pertain to a topic.  See section 7 [Help],
     page 33.

       Customizable means that you can change the definitions of EMACS
     commands in little ways.  For example, if you use  a  programming
     language  in  which comments start with <** and end with **>, you
     can tell the EMACS comment manipulation  commands  to  use  those
     strings.    Another sort of customization is rearrangement of the
     command set.  For example, if you prefer the  four  basic  cursor
     motion  commands  (up, down, left and right) on keys in a diamond
     pattern on the keyboard, you can  have  it.    See  section  21.8
     [Customization], page 132.

       Extensible  means  that  you can go beyond simple customization
     and write entirely new commands, programs in the  language  TECO.
     EMACS  is  an "on-line extensible" system, which means that it is
     divided into many functions that call each other,  any  of  which
     can  be  redefined in the middle of an editing session.  Any partî     4                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     of EMACS can be replaced without making a separate copy of all of
     EMACS.    Many  already  written  extensions are distributed with
     EMACS, and some (including DIRED, PAGE, PICTURE, SORT, TAGS,  and
     WORDAB)   are  documented  in  this  manual.    Although  only  a
     programmer can write an extension, anybody can use it afterward.

       Extension  requires  programming  in  TECO,  a  rather  obscure
     language.    If  you are clever and bold, you might wish to learn
     how.  See the file INFO;CONV, for advice on learning TECO.   This
     manual  does  not even try to explain how to write TECO programs,
     but it does contain some notes that are useful primarily  to  the
     extension writer.î     5                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                CHAPTER ONEî                                CHAPTER ONEî                                CHAPTER ONE
                      THE ORGANIZATION OF THE SCREENî                      THE ORGANIZATION OF THE SCREENî                      THE ORGANIZATION OF THE SCREEN



       EMACS  divides  the  screen  into  several areas, each of which
     contains its own sorts of information.    The  biggest  area,  of
     course,  is  the  one  in  which you usually see the text you are
     editing.  The terminal's cursor usually appears in the middle  of
                                          _____î     the  text,  showing  the position of point, the location at which
                                                                 __î     editing takes place.  While the cursor  appears  to  point  at  a
                                               _______î     character,  point should be thought of as between two characters;
               ______î     it points before the character that the cursor appears on top of.
     Terminals have only one cursor, and when output is in progress it
     must appear where the typing is being done.  This does  not  mean
     that  point  is moving.  It is only that EMACS has no way to show
     you the location of point except when the terminal is idle.

       The top lines of the screen are usually available for text  but
                                        _____ _______î     are  sometimes  pre-empted  by  an error message, which says that
     some command you gave was  illegal  or  used  improperly,  or  by
     _______î     typeout  from a command (such as, a listing of a file directory).
     Error messages are typically one line, end with a question  mark,
     and  are  accompanied by ringing the bell.  Typeout generally has
     none of those characteristics.

       The  error  message  or  typeout   appears   there   for   your
     information,  but it is not part of the file you are editing, and
     it goes away if you type any command.  If you want to make it  go
     away  immediately but not do anything else, you can type a Space.
     (Usually a Space inserts itself,  but  when  there  is  an  error
     message  or  typeout on the screen it does nothing but get rid of
     that.)  The terminal's cursor always appears at the  end  of  the
     error  message  or typeout, but this does not mean that point has
     moved.  The cursor moves back to the location of point after  the
     error message or typeout goes away.

       If  you  type  a  question mark when an error message is on the
     screen, you enter the EMACS error handler.   You  probably  don't
     want  to  do this unless you know how to write TECO programs.  If
     you do it by accident, C-] (the standard  abort  character)  will
     get you out.  Enough said.

       A  few lines at the bottom of the screen compose what is called
         ____ ____î     the echo area.  The variable Echo Area Height controls  how  many
                          _______î     lines  long  it is.  Echoing means printing out the commands that
     you type.  EMACS commands are usually not echoed at all,  but  if
     you   pause   for   more  than  a  second  in  the  middle  of  a
     multi-character command then all the characters typed so far  areî     6                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                        ______î     echoed.    This  is  intended  to  prompt you for the rest of the
     command.  The rest of the command is echoed, too, as you type it.
     This  behavior  is  designed  to  give  confident  users  optimum
     response, while giving hesitant users maximum feedback.

       EMACS  also  uses  the echo area for reading and displaying the
     arguments for some commands, such as searches, and  for  printing
     brief information in response to certain commands.



     1.1 The Mode Lineî     1.1 The Mode Lineî     1.1 The Mode Line


                                                     ____ ____î       The  line above the echo area is known as the mode line.  It is
     the line that usually  starts  with  "EMACS  (something)".    Its
     purpose  is  to  tell you anything that may affect the meaning of
     your commands aside from the text itself.

       Some EMACS commands read and process more commands.   They  are
                __________      _________  _______ ______î     known  as  subsystems  or  recursive  editing levels.  If you are
     inside a subsystem or a recursive editing level,  the  mode  line
     tells  you  its  name.    Square  brackets  around  the mode line
     indicate a recursive editing level; See  section  6.3  [Recursive
                                                       __________î     Editing Levels], page 30.  Parentheses indicate a minibuffer; See
     section   23  [Minibuffer],  page  156.    Neither  brackets  nor
     parentheses indicates a subsystem; See section 6.1  [Subsystems],
     page 28.

       Subsystems  and recursive editing levels are advanced features,
     and you will not initially be using  them.    When  you  are  not
     inside  a  subsystem  or recursive editing level, we say that you
            ___ _____î     are at top level; this implies that the characters you  type  are
     interpreted  as  ordinary  EMACS  commands.   When you are at top
     level, the mode line tells you what file you are  editing,  where
     you  are  in  it,  and  what  editing modes are enabled which may
     affect the meaning of your commands.  The top level mode line has
     this format:


         EMACS type  (major minor)  bfr:  file (vrs) --pos-- *


       ____î       type is usually not there.  When it is there, it indicates that
     the EMACS job you are using is not an ordinary one, in that it is
     acting as the servant of some other  job.    A  type  of  "LEDIT"
     indicates  an  EMACS  serving  one or more Lisps, while a type of
     "MAILT" indicates an EMACS that you got by asking  for  an  "edit
     escape" while composing mail to send.  The type can also indicateî     7                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     a  subsystem  that is running, such as RMAIL.  The type is stored
     internally as a string in the variable Editor Type.  The variable
     is normally zero.

       _____                           _____ ____î       major is always the name of the major mode you are in.  At  any
     time,  EMACS  is in one and only one of its possible major modes.
     The major modes available include Fundamental mode  (which  EMACS
     starts  out  in),  Text mode, Lisp mode, PASCAL mode, and others.
     See section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 102, for details of how  the
     modes  differ  and  how to select one.  Sometimes the name of the
     major mode is  followed  immediately  with  another  name  inside
                                                         _______î     square-brackets ("[ - ]").  This name is called the submode.  The
     submode  indicates that you are "inside" of a command that causes
     your editing commands to be changed  temporarily,  but  does  not
             ____î     change  what  text  you  are  editing.    A  submode is a kind of
     recursive editing level.  See section 6.3 [Submodes], page 30.

       _____                          _____ _____î       minor is a list of some of the minor modes that are  turned  on
     at  the  moment.  "Fill" means that Auto Fill mode is on.  "Save"
     means that Auto-saving is on.  "Save(off)" means that Auto-saving
     is on by default but turned off at the  moment  in  this  buffer.
     "Atom" means that Atom Word mode is on.  "Abbrev" means that Word
     Abbrev mode is on.  "Ovwrt" means that Overwrite mode is on.  See
     section  22.1  [Minor  Modes],  page  133,  for more information.
     "Def" means that a keyboard macro is being defined; although this
     is not exactly a minor mode, it is still useful  to  be  reminded
     about.    See section 22.8 [Keyboard Macros], page 152.  "Narrow"
     means that editing is currently restricted to only a part of  the
     buffer.  See section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

       ___                                        ______î       bfr  is the name of the currently selected buffer.  Each buffer
     has its own name and holds a file being edited; this is how EMACS
     can hold several files at once.  But at any time you are  editing
                               ________î     only  one  of  them,  the selected buffer.  When we speak of what
     some command does to "the  buffer",  we  are  talking  about  the
     currently  selected  buffer.    Multiple  buffers make it easy to
     switch around between several files, and then it is  very  useful
     that  the  mode  line  tells you which one you are editing at any
     time.  However, before you learn how to use multiple buffers, you
     will always be in the buffer called "Main", which is the only one
     that exists when EMACS starts up.  If the name of the  buffer  is
     the same as the first name of the file you are visiting, then the
     buffer  name  is  left  out  of  the  mode  line.  See section 14
     [Buffers], page 83, for how to use more than one  buffer  in  one
     EMACS.

       ____î       file  is  the name of the file that you are editing.  It is the
     last file that was visited in the buffer  you  are  in.    It  is
                                                 _______  ______î     followed,  in  parentheses,  by  the  file  version  number  mostî     8                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     recently visited or saved provided the second filename visited is
     ">",  so  that  version  numbers  are allowed.  "(R-O)" after the
                                                   _________î     filename means that the file  or  buffer  is  read-only;  a  file
     visited  read-only  will  not be saved unless you insist, while a
     read-only buffer does not allow you to alter its contents at all.
     See section 13.1 [Visiting], page 69, for more information.

       The star at the end of the  mode  line  means  that  there  are
     changes  in  the buffer that have not been saved in the file.  If
     the file has not been changed since it  was  read  in  or  saved,
     there is no star.

       ___î       pos tells you whether there is additional text above the top of
     the screen, or below the bottom.  If your file is small and it is
     all  on  the  screen,  --pos--  is  omitted.    Otherwise,  it is
     --TOP-- if  you  are  looking  at  the  beginning  of  the  file,
     --BOT--   if  you  are  looking  at  the  end  of  the  file,  or
     --nn%-- where nn is the percentage of the file above the  top  of
     the screen.

       Sometimes  you  will  see  --MORE--  instead  of --nn%--.  This
     happens when typeout from a command is too long  to  fit  on  the
     screen.   It means that if you type a Space the next screenful of
     information will be printed.  If you are not  interested,  typing
     anything  but  a  Space  will  cause the rest of the output to be
     discarded.  Typing a  Rubout  will  discard  the  output  and  do
     nothing  else.  Typing any other command will discard the rest of
     the output  and  also  do  the  command.    When  the  output  is
     discarded, "FLUSHED" is printed after the --MORE--.

       If  you  are  accustomed  to  other display editors, you may be
     surprised that EMACS does not always display the page number  and
     line  number of point in the mode line.  This is because the text
     is stored in a way  that  makes  it  difficult  to  compute  this
     information.    Displaying them all the time would be too slow to
     be borne.  When you want to know the  page  and  line  number  of
     point,  you  must  ask for the information with the M-X What Page
     command.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.  However, once you are
     adjusted to  EMACS,  you  will  rarely  have  any  reason  to  be
     concerned with page numbers or line numbers.

       If you set the variable Display Mode Line Inverse nonzero, then
     the  mode  line is displayed in inverse video if the terminal you
     are using supports it.  See section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.

       The libraries MODLIN and  MODE2  allow  you  to  customize  the
     information  that is displayed in the mode line.  MODLIN replaces
     the standard EMACS mode line generation routines.  MODE2 makes  a
     second  mode line, above the first, whose contents are under yourî     9                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     control.  Refer to the self-documentation of these libraries; See
     section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.î     10                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                CHAPTER TWOî                                CHAPTER TWOî                                CHAPTER TWO
               CHARACTER SETS AND COMMAND INPUT CONVENTIONSî               CHARACTER SETS AND COMMAND INPUT CONVENTIONSî               CHARACTER SETS AND COMMAND INPUT CONVENTIONS



       In  this chapter we introduce the terminology and concepts used
     to talk about EMACS commands.  EMACS is designed to be used  with
     a kind of keyboard with two special shift keys which can type 512
     different  characters,  instead  of  the 128 different characters
     which ordinary ASCII keyboards can  send.    The  terminology  of
     EMACS  commands  is  formulated in terms of these shift keys.  So
     that  EMACS  can  be  used  on  ASCII   terminals,   we   provide
     two-character  ASCII  circumlocutions  for the command characters
     which are not ASCII.



     2.1 The 9-bit Command Character Setî     2.1 The 9-bit Command Character Setî     2.1 The 9-bit Command Character Set


       EMACS is designed ideally  to  be  used  with  terminals  whose
     keyboards  have  a  pair  of  shift  keys,  labeled "Control" and
     "Meta", either  or  both  of  which  can  be  combined  with  any
                                                               _______î     character  that  you  can type.  These shift keys produce Control
                    ____î     characters and Meta characters, which are the editing commands of
     EMACS.  We name each of these characters by prefixing  "Control-"
     (or  "C-"),  "Meta-"  (or  "M-")  or both to the basic character:
     thus, Meta-F or M-F is the character which is F  typed  with  the
     Meta  key  held down.  C-M-; is the Semicolon character with both
     the Control  and  Meta  keys.    Control  in  the  EMACS  command
     character  set  is not precisely the same as Control in the ASCII
     character set, but the general purpose is the same.

       There are  128  basic  characters.    Multiplied  by  the  four
     possibilities  of  the  Control  and  Meta  keys,  this makes 512
     characters in the EMACS command character set.  So it  is  called
     the  512-character  set,  to distinguish it from ASCII, which has
                                                 _____î     only 128 characters.  It is also called the 9-bit  character  set
     because  9  bits  are required to express a number from 0 to 511.
     Note that  the  512-character  set  is  used  only  for  keyboard
     commands.   Characters in files being edited with EMACS are ASCII
     characters.

       Sadly, most terminals do not have ideal EMACS  keyboards.    In
     fact,  the  only  ideal  keyboards  are  at  MIT.    On  nonideal
     keyboards, the Control key is somewhat limited (it  can  only  be
     combined  with  some  characters, not with all), and the Meta key
     may not exist at all.  We make it possible  to  use  EMACS  on  a
     nonideal  terminal  by  providing  two-character circumlocutions,î     11                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     made up of ASCII characters that you can type, for the characters
                                                                   ___î     that  you  can't  type.    These circumlocutions start with a bit
     ______î     prefix character; see below.  For  example,  to  use  the  Meta-A
     command,  you  could type Altmode A.  Also see the appendices for
     more detailed information on what to do on your type of terminal.

       Both the EMACS 9-bit  character  set  and  ASCII  have  Control
     characters,  but the 9-bit character set has more different ones.
     In ASCII, only letters and a few punctuation marks  can  be  made
     into  Control  characters;  in  the  9-bit  character  set  every
     character  has  a  Control  version.    For  example,   we   have
     Control-Space,  Control-1,  and  Control-=.    We  also  have two
     different characters Control-A and Control-a!  But they always do
     the same thing in  EMACS,  so  you  can  ignore  the  distinction
     between  them,  unless you are doing customization.  In practice,
     you can forget all about the distinction  between  ASCII  Control
     and  EMACS  Control,  except  to  realize  that  EMACS  uses some
     "Control" characters which ASCII keyboards cannot type.

       In addition to the 9-bit command character set,  there  is  one
     additional  EMACS  command  character  called Help.  It cannot be
     combined  with  Control  or  Meta.    Its  use  is  to  ask   for
     documentation,  at  any time.  The Help character has its own key
     on an ideal keyboard, but must be represented by  something  else
     on  other  keyboards.    The circumlocution we use is Control-_ H
     (two characters).  The code used  internally  for  Help  is  4110
     (octal).

       We  have  given  some command characters special names which we
     always capitalize.  "Return" or "<cr>" stands  for  the  carriage
     return  character,  code  015 (all character codes are in octal).
     Note that  C-R  means  the  character  Control-R,  never  Return.
     "Rubout" is the character with code 177, labeled "Delete" on some
     keyboards.    "Altmode" is the character with code 033, sometimes
     labeled "Escape".  Other command characters  with  special  names
     are  Tab  (code  011), Backspace (code 010), Linefeed (code 012),
     Space (code 040), Excl ("!", code 041),  Comma  (code  054),  and
     Period  (code  056).   Control is represented in the numeric code
     for a character by 200, and Meta by  400;  thus,  Meta-Period  is
     code 456 in the 9-bit character set.



     2.2 Prefix Charactersî     2.2 Prefix Charactersî     2.2 Prefix Characters


       A  non-ideal keyboard can only send certain Control characters,
     and may completely lack the ability to send Meta characters.   To
     use   these   commands   on  such  keyboards,  you  need  to  useî     12                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                                           ___  ______î     two-character   circumlocutions   starting   with  a  bit  prefix
     character which turns on the Control or Meta bit  in  the  second
     character.    The  Altmode  character  turns  on the Meta bit, so
     Altmode X can be used to type a Meta-X, and Altmode Control-O can
                                                       _______î     be used to type a C-M-O.  Altmode is known as the Metizer.  Other
     bit prefix characters are C-^ for Control, and  C-C  for  Control
     and  Meta  together.  Thus, C-^ < is a way of typing a Control-<,
     and C-C < can be used to type C-M-<.  Because C-^ is  awkward  to
     type  on  most keyboards, we have tried to minimize the number of
     commands for which you will need it.

       The bit prefix characters are simply  commands  which  run  the
     functions  ^R  Prefix  Control,  ^R  Prefix  Meta,  and ^R Prefix
     Control-Meta.

       There is another prefix character, Control-X which is  used  as
     the  beginning  of a large set of two-character commands known as
     ___ ________î     C-X commands.  C-X is not a bit prefix character; C-X A is not  a
     circumlocution  for any single character, and it must be typed as
     two characters on any  terminal.    You  can  create  new  prefix
     characters  when  you  customize.    See the file INFO;CONV, node
     Prefix.



     2.3 Commands, Functions, and Variablesî     2.3 Commands, Functions, and Variablesî     2.3 Commands, Functions, and Variables


       Most of the EMACS commands documented  herein  are  members  of
     this  9-bit  character  set.  Others are pairs of characters from
     that set.   However,  EMACS  doesn't  really  implement  commands
                                                 _________î     directly.    Instead,  EMACS is composed of functions, which have
     long names such as "^R Down Real Line" and definitions which  are
                                                         ________î     programs that perform the editing operations.  Then commands such
                                                      _______ ________î     as  C-N  are  connected to functions through the command dispatch
     _____î     table.  When we say that C-N moves the cursor down a line, we are
     glossing over a distinction which  is  unimportant  for  ordinary
     use,  but essential for customization: it is the function ^R Down
     Real Line which knows how to move down a line, and C-N moves down
     a line because it is connected to  that  function.    We  usually
     ignore  this  subtlety  to  keep  things  simple.    To  give the
     extension-writer the information he needs, we state the  name  of
     the  function  which  really  does  the work in parentheses after
     mentioning the command name.  For example:  "C-N  (^R  Down  Real
     Line)  moves  the  cursor down a line".  In the EMACS wall chart,
     the function names are used as a form of very brief documentation
     for  the  command  characters.    See  section  5.2  [Functions],
     page 24.î     13                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  "^R  "  which appears at the front of the function name is
     simply part of the name.   By  convention,  a  certain  class  of
     functions have names which start with "^R ".

       While  we are on the subject of customization information which
     you should not be frightened of, it's a good  time  to  tell  you
           _________î     about variables.  Often the description of a command will say "to
     change  this, set the variable Mumble Foo".  A variable is a name
     used to remember a value.  EMACS contains  many  variables  which
     are  there  so that you can change them if you want to customize.
     The variable's value is examined by some  command,  and  changing
     the  value  makes  the command behave differently.  Until you are
     interested in customizing, you can ignore this information.  When
     you are ready to be interested, read  the  basic  information  on
     variables,  and then the information on individual variables will
     make sense.  See section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.



     2.4 Notational Conventions for ASCII Charactersî     2.4 Notational Conventions for ASCII Charactersî     2.4 Notational Conventions for ASCII Characters


       Control  characters  in  files,  your  EMACS  buffer,  or  TECO
     programs,  are  ordinary  ASCII  characters.    The special 9-bit
     character set applies only  to  typing  EMACS  commands.    ASCII
     contains  the  printing  characters,  rubout,  and  some  control
     characters.  Most ASCII control  characters  are  represented  in
     this  manual  as  uparrow  or caret followed by the corresponding
                                                        ^î     non-control character: control-E is represented as |E.

       Some ASCII characters have special names.   These  include  tab
     (011),  backspace  (010),  linefeed  (012), return (015), altmode
     (033), space (040), and rubout (177).  To make it  clear  whether
     we  are talking about a 9-bit character or an ASCII character, we
     capitalize names of 9-bit characters and  leave  names  of  ASCII
     characters in lower case.  Note that the 9-bit characters Tab and
     Control-I  are  different,  but  the  ASCII  characters  tab  and
     control-I are the same.

       Lines in files are separated by a sequence of two ASCII control
     characters, carriage return followed by linefeed.  This  sequence
                 ____î     is  called  CRLF.    Normally,  EMACS  treats  this two-character
                                                  ____ _________î     sequence as if it were a single character, a line separator.    A
                                                                _____î     return or a linefeed which is not part of a CRLF is called stray.
     EMACS  usually  treats  them  as  part  of the text of a line and
     displays them as ^M and ^J.  If the variable Display Overprinting
     is zero, they display as actual carriage return or linefeed.

       Most control characters when present in the  EMACS  buffer  areî     14                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                                        ^î     displayed  with  a  caret;  thus,  ^A  for  ASCII  |A.  Rubout is
     displayed as ^?, because by stretching the meaning  of  "control"
     it can be interpreted as ASCII control-?.  A backspace is usually
     displayed  as  ^H  since  it  is  ASCII  control-H,  because most
     displays cannot do overprinting.  If you want backspace and stray
     return to display  as  overprinting,  set  the  variable  Display
     Overprinting nonzero.

       Altmode  is  the  ASCII code 033, sometimes labeled "Escape" or
     "Alt".  Altmode is often represented by itself in  this  document
     (remember,  it  is an ASCII character and can therefore appear in
     files).  It looks like this: $.  On most terminals, altmode looks
     just like the dollar sign character.  If that's so on yours,  you
     should  assume that anything you see in the on-line documentation
     which looks like a dollar sign is really an  altmode  unless  you
     are  specifically  told  it's  a  dollar  sign.   The dollar sign
     character is not particularly important  in  EMACS  and  we  will
     rarely have reason to mention it.î     15                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER THREEî                               CHAPTER THREEî                               CHAPTER THREE
                          BASIC EDITING COMMANDSî                          BASIC EDITING COMMANDSî                          BASIC EDITING COMMANDS



       We  now give the basics of how to enter text, make corrections,
     and save the text in a file.  If this material is new to you, you
     might learn it more easily by running the :TEACHEMACS program.



     3.1 Inserting Textî     3.1 Inserting Textî     3.1 Inserting Text


       To insert printing characters into the text  you  are  editing,
     just  type  them.    When  EMACS  is  at  top level, all printing
     characters you type are inserted into  the  text  at  the  cursor
                     _____î     (that  is,  at  point),  and  the  cursor  moves  forward.    Any
     characters after the cursor move forward too.  If the text in the
     buffer is FOOBAR, with the cursor before the B, then if you  type
     XX, you get FOOXXBAR, with the cursor still before the B. 

       To  correct  text  you  have just inserted, you can use Rubout.
                                  ______î     Rubout deletes the character before the cursor (not the one  that
                                                             _____î     the cursor is on top of or under; that is the character after the
     cursor).   The cursor and all characters after it move backwards.
     Therefore, if you type a printing character and then type Rubout,
     they cancel out.

       To end  a  line  and  start  typing  a  new  one,  type  Return
     (Customizers,  note:  this  runs  the  function ^R CRLF).  Return
     operates by inserting a line separator, so if you type Return  in
     the  middle  of a line, you break the line in two.  Return really
     inserts two characters, a  carriage  return  and  a  linefeed  (a
     CRLF),  but  almost everything in EMACS makes them look like just
     one character,  which  you  can  think  of  as  a  line-separator
     character.   For example, typing Rubout when the cursor is at the
     beginning of a line rubs out the line separator before the  line,
     joining that line with the preceding line.

       If you add too many characters to one line, without breaking it
     with  a  Return, the line will grow to occupy two (or more) lines
     on the screen, with a "!" at the extreme right margin of all  but
     the last of them.  The "!" says that the following screen line is
                                                          ____________î     not really a distinct line in the file, but just the continuation
     of a line too long to fit the screen.

       Direct  insertion  works for printing characters and space, but
     other characters act  as  editing  commands  and  do  not  insertî     16                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     themselves.   If you need to insert a control character, Altmode,
                                 _____î     Tab or  Rubout,  you  must  quote  it  by  typing  the  Control-Q
     (^R  Quoted  Insert)  command first.  See section 2 [Characters],
                           ^î     page 10.  Inserting a |Z is  harder  because  EMACS  cannot  even
     receive  the character; you must use the minibuffer as in Altmode
     Altmode 26i  Altmode  Altmode.    See  section  23  [Minibuffer],
     page 156.



     3.2 Moving The Cursorî     3.2 Moving The Cursorî     3.2 Moving The Cursor


       To do more than insert characters, you have to know how to move
     the cursor.  Here are a few of the commands for doing that.


             C-A     Move to the beginning of the line.
             C-E     Move to the end of the line.
             C-F     Move forward over one character.
             C-B     Move backward over one character.
             C-N     Move  down one line, vertically.  If you start in
                     the middle of one line, you end in the middle  of
                     the next.  From the last line of text, it creates
                     a new line.
             C-P     Move up one line, vertically.
             C-L     Clear   the   screen   and  reprints  everything.
                     C-U C-L reprints just the line that the cursor is
                     on.
             C-T     Transpose two characters  (the  ones  before  and
                     after the cursor).
             M-<     Move to the top of your text.
             M->     Move to the end of your text.  



     3.3 Erasing Textî     3.3 Erasing Textî     3.3 Erasing Text


             Rubout  Delete the character before the cursor.
             C-D     Delete the character after the cursor.
             C-K     Kill to the end of the line.  


       You  already  know  about  the Rubout command which deletes the
     character before the cursor.  Another command, Control-D, deletes
     the character after the cursor, causing the rest of the  text  on
     the  line  to  shift left.  If Control-D is typed at the end of a
     line, that line and the next line are joined together.î     17                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       To  erase  a  larger amount of text, use the Control-K command,
     which kills a line at a time.    If  Control-K  is  done  at  the
     beginning  or  middle  of a line, it kills all the text up to the
     end of the line.  If Control-K is done at the end of a  line,  it
     joins that line and the next line.

       See  section  9.1 [Killing], page 39, for more flexible ways of
     killing text.



     3.4 Filesî     3.4 Filesî     3.4 Files


       The commands above are sufficient  for  creating  text  in  the
     EMACS  buffer.  The more advanced EMACS commands just make things
     easier.  But to keep any text permanently you must put  it  in  a
     ____î     file.   Files are the objects which ITS uses for storing data for
     communication between different programs or to hold  onto  for  a
     length  of  time.  To tell EMACS to edit text in a file, choose a
     ________                                               ______î     filename, such as FOO, and type C-X C-V FOO<cr>.  This visits the
     file FOO (actually, FOO > on your working directory) so that  its
     contents appear on the screen for editing.  You can make changes,
              ____î     and then save the file by typing C-X C-S.  This makes the changes
     permanent  and  actually  changes  the file FOO.  Until then, the
     changes are only inside your EMACS,  and  the  file  FOO  is  not
     really  changed.   If the file FOO doesn't exist, and you want to
     create it, visit it as if it did exist.  When you save your  text
     with C-X C-S the file will be created.

       Of course, there is a lot more to learn about using files.  See
     section 13 [Files], page 69.



     3.5 Helpî     3.5 Helpî     3.5 Help


       If  you  forget  what a command does, you can find out with the
     Help character.  The Help character is Top-H if you  have  a  Top
     key,  or  Control-_  H  (two  characters!)  otherwise.  Type Help
     followed by C and the command you want to know about.   Help  can
     help you in other ways as well.  See section 7 [Help], page 33.î     18                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     3.6 Using Blank Lines Can Make Editing Fasterî     3.6 Using Blank Lines Can Make Editing Fasterî     3.6 Using Blank Lines Can Make Editing Faster


             C-O         Insert  one  or  more  blank  lines after the
                         cursor.
             C-X C-O     Delete all but one of many consecutive  blank
                         lines.  


       It  is  much more efficient to insert text at the end of a line
     than in the middle.  So if you want to stick a new line before an
     existing one, the best way is to make a blank  line  there  first
     and  then  type  the  text into it, rather than inserting the new
     text at the beginning of the existing line and finally  inserting
     a  line  separator.    Making the blank line first also makes the
     meaning of the text clearer while you are typing it in.

       To make a blank line, you can type Return and then  C-B.    But
     there  is  a single character for this: C-O (Customizers: this is
     the  built-in  function  ^R  Open  Line).    So,  FOO  Return  is
     equivalent to C-O FOO.

       If  you  want  to insert many lines, you can type many C-O's at
     the beginning (or you can give C-O an argument  to  tell  it  how
     many  blank  lines  to make.  See section 4 [Arguments], page 19,
     for how).  As you then insert lines of text, you will notice that
     Return behaves strangely: it "uses up" the blank lines instead of
     pushing them down.

       If you don't use up all the blank lines, you can type  C-X  C-O
     (the  function  ^R Delete Blank Lines) to get rid of all but one.
     When point is on a blank line, C-X C-O  replaces  all  the  blank
     lines around that one with a single blank line.  When point is on
     a  nonblank  line, C-X C-O deletes any blank lines following that
     nonblank line.î     19                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER FOURî                               CHAPTER FOURî                               CHAPTER FOUR
                GIVING NUMERIC ARGUMENTS TO EMACS COMMANDSî                GIVING NUMERIC ARGUMENTS TO EMACS COMMANDSî                GIVING NUMERIC ARGUMENTS TO EMACS COMMANDS



                                               _______ ________î       Any  EMACS  command  can  be  given  a  numeric argument.  Some
     commands interpret the argument  as  a  repetition  count.    For
     example,  giving  an  argument  of  ten  to the C-F command (move
     forward one character) moves forward ten characters.  With  these
     commands, no argument is equivalent to an argument of 1.

       Some commands care only about whether there is an argument, and
     not  about  its  value;  for  example,  the  command M-Q (^R Fill
     Paragraph) with no arguments fills text,  but  with  an  argument
     justifies the text as well.

       Some  commands  use the value of the argument, but do something
     peculiar when there  is  no  argument.    For  example,  the  C-K
     (^R  Kill  Line) command with an argument <n> kills <n> lines and
     the line separators that follow them.  But C-K with  no  argument
     is  special; it kills the text up to the next line separator, or,
     if point is right at the end of  the  line,  it  kills  the  line
     separator  itself.   Thus, two C-K commands with no arguments can
     kill a nonblank line, just like C-K with an argument of one.

       The fundamental way of specifying an argument is to use the C-U
     (^R Universal Argument) command followed by  the  digits  of  the
     argument.    Negative  arguments  are allowed.  Often they tell a
     command to move or act backwards.  A negative argument is entered
     with C-U followed by a minus sign and the digits of the value  of
     the argument.

       C-U  followed  by  a  character  which is neither a digit nor a
     minus sign has the special meaning of "multiply  by  four".    It
     multiplies  the  argument for the next command by four.  Two such
     C-U's multiply it by sixteen.  Thus, C-U C-U  C-F  moves  forward
     sixteen  characters.   This is a good way to move forward "fast",
     since it moves about 1/4 of a line  on  most  terminals.    Other
     useful  combinations  are  C-U C-N, C-U C-U C-N (move down a good
     fraction of a screen), C-U C-U C-O (make "a lot" of blank lines),
     and C-U C-K (kill four lines).  With commands like M-Q that  care
     whether  there is an argument but not what the value is, C-U is a
     good way of saying "I want an argument".

       A few commands treat a plain C-U differently from  an  ordinary
     argument.    A  few  others may treat an argument of just a minus
     sign differently from an argument of -1.    These  unusual  cases
     will  be described when they come up; they are always for reasons
     of convenience of use.î     20                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       There   are   other,   terminal-dependent  ways  of  specifying
     arguments.  They have the same effect but may be easier to  type.
     See  the  appendix.   If your terminal has a numeric keypad which
     sends something recognizably different from the ordinary  digits,
     it  is  possible  to  program  EMACS  to allow use of the numeric
     keypad for specifying arguments.  The libraries  VT52  and  VT100
     provide  such  a  feature  for those two types of terminals.  See
     section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.



     4.1 Autoarg Modeî     4.1 Autoarg Modeî     4.1 Autoarg Mode


       Users of ASCII  keyboards  may  prefer  to  use  Autoarg  mode.
     Autoarg  mode  means that you don't need to type C-U to specify a
     numeric argument.  Instead, you type just  the  digits.    Digits
     followed  by  an  ordinary  inserting  character  are  themselves
     inserted, but digits followed by an Altmode or Control  character
     serve  as  an  argument to it and are not inserted.  A minus sign
     can also be part of an argument, but only at the beginning.    If
     you  type a minus sign following some digits, both the digits and
     the minus sign are inserted.

       To use Autoarg mode, set the  variable  Autoarg  Mode  nonzero.
     See section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.

       Autoargument digits echo at the bottom of the screen; the first
     nondigit  causes them to be inserted or uses them as an argument.
     To insert some digits and nothing else, you must follow them with
     a Space and then rub it out.    C-G  cancels  the  digits,  while
     Rubout inserts them all and then rubs out the last.î     21                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER FIVEî                               CHAPTER FIVEî                               CHAPTER FIVE
                 EXTENDED (META-X) COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONSî                 EXTENDED (META-X) COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONSî                 EXTENDED (META-X) COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS



       Not  all EMACS commands are of the one or two character variety
     you have seen so far.  Most commands have long names composed  of
     English  words.    This  is  for  two reasons: the long names are
     easier to remember and more suggestive, and there are not  enough
     two-character combinations for every command to have one.

                                                     ________ ________î       The  commands  with  long  names are known as extended commands
     because they extend the set of two-character commands.



     5.1 Issuing Extended Commandsî     5.1 Issuing Extended Commandsî     5.1 Issuing Extended Commands


             M-X             Begin an extended  command.    Follow  by
                             command name and arguments.
             C-M-X           Begin an extended command.  Follow by the
                             command  name  only; the command will ask
                             for any arguments.
             C-X Altmode     Re-execute recent extended command.  


                                         ___  ________î       Extended commands are also called M-X  commands,  because  they
     all  start  with the character Meta-X (^R Extended Command).  The
     M-X is followed by the command's long, suggestive name,  actually
     the  name  of a function to be called.  Terminate the name of the
     function  with  a  Return  (unless  you  are   supplying   string
     arguments;  see  below).   For example, Meta-X Auto Fill Mode<cr>
     invokes the function Auto Fill Mode.  This function when executed
     turns Auto Fill mode on or off.

       We say that  M-X  Foo<cr>  "calls  the  function  Foo".    When
     documenting  the  individual extended commands, we will call them
     _________î     functions to avoid confusion between them  and  the  one  or  two
               ________î     character commands.  We will also use "M-X" as a title like "Mr."
     for  functions,  as  in "use M-X Foo".  The "extended command" is
     what you type, starting with M-X, and what the  command  does  is
     call  a  function.  The name that goes in the command is the name
     of the command and is also the name of  the  function,  and  both
     terms will be used.

       Note:  Extended  commands  and  functions  were once called "MM
     commands", but this term is obsolete.  If you see it used  either
     in INFO documentation of in Help documentation, please report it.î     22                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Ordinary  one  or two character commands used to be known as "^R"
     commands; please report any occurrences  of  this  obsolete  term
     also.

       There  are  a  great  many  functions in EMACS for you to call.
     They will be described elsewhere in the manual, according to what
     they do.  Here we are concerned only with  extended  commands  in
     general.


     5.1.1 Typing The Command Nameî     5.1.1 Typing The Command Nameî     5.1.1 Typing The Command Name


       When  you  type  M-X, the cursor moves down to the echo area at
     the bottom of the screen.  "M-X" is printed there, and  when  you
                                                               _______î     type  the command name it echoes there.  This is known as reading
     _ ____ __ ___ ____ ____î     a line in the echo area.   You  can  use  Rubout  to  cancel  one
     character of the command name, or C-U or C-D to cancel the entire
     command  name.  A C-G cancels the whole M-X, and so does a Rubout
     when the command name is empty.  These editing  characters  apply
     any  time  EMACS  reads  a line in the echo area, not just within
     M-X.

       The string "M-X" which appears in the echo  area  is  called  a
     ______î     prompt.    The  prompt  always tells you what sort of argument is
     required and what it is going to be used for;  "M-X"  means  that
     you  are inside of the command M-X, and should type the name of a
     function to be called.  You can replace  the  prompt  "M-X"  with
     some other string by defining the variable Read Command Prompt.


     5.1.2 Completionî     5.1.2 Completionî     5.1.2 Completion


       You  can  abbreviate  the  name of the command, typing only the
     beginning of the name, as much  as  is  needed  to  identify  the
     command  unambiguously.    You  can  also  use  completion on the
     function name.  This means that you  type  part  of  the  command
     name,  and  EMACS visibly fills in the rest, or as much as can be
     determined from the part you have typed.

       You request completion by typing an Altmode ($).  For  example,
     if  you  type  M-X  Au$,  the "Au" expands to "Auto " because all
     command names which start with "Au" continue with "to ".  If  you
     ask  for  completion  when there are several alternatives for the
     next character, the bell rings and nothing else happens.  Altmode
     is also the way to terminate  the  command  name  and  begin  the
     string  arguments,  but  it  only  does  this if the command name
     completes in full.  In that case, an Altmode  appears  after  theî     23                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     command  name  in the echo area.  In practice, these two meanings
     of Altmode do not conflict, because if the command name does  not
     complete  in full, it is ambiguous and would not be accepted.  So
     it would be useless to type the arguments yet.

       Space is another way to request completion,  but  it  completes
     only  one  word.  Successive Spaces complete one word each, until
     either there are multiple possibilities or the end of the name is
     reached.  If the first word of a command  is  Edit,  List,  Kill,
     View  or What, it is sufficient to type just the first letter and
     complete it with a Space.  (This does not follow from  the  usual
     definition  of  completion, since the single letter is ambiguous;
     it is a special feature added because these words are so common).

       Typing "?" in the middle of the command name prints a  list  of
     all  the  command  names  which begin with what you have typed so
     far.  You can then go on typing the name.


     5.1.3 Numeric Arguments and String Argumentsî     5.1.3 Numeric Arguments and String Argumentsî     5.1.3 Numeric Arguments and String Arguments


       Some functions can use numeric prefix arguments.   Simply  give
     the  Meta-X  command an argument and Meta-X will pass it along to
     the function which it calls.  The  argument  appears  before  the
     "M-X"  in  the  prompt,  as  in  "69 M-X", to remind you that the
     function you call will receive a numeric argument.

                                 ______  _________î       Some  functions  require  string  arguments  (sometimes  called
     ______  _________î     suffix  arguments).    To specify string arguments, terminate the
     function name with a single Altmode,  then  type  the  arguments,
     separated by Altmodes.  After the last argument, type a Return to
     cause  the  function  to  be executed.  For example, the function
     Describe prints the  full  documentation  of  a  function  (or  a
     variable)  whose  name  must  be  given as a string argument.  An
     example of using it is 


         Meta-X Describe$Apropos<cr>


     which prints the full description of the function named Apropos.

       An alternate way of  calling  extended  commands  is  with  the
     command  C-M-X  (^R  Instant  Extended Command).  It differs from
     plain M-X in that the function itself reads any string arguments.
     The function prompts for  each  argument  individually.    If  an
     argument  is  supposed  to  be  a  filename  or  a  command name,
     completion  is  available.    However,  there  are   compensatingî     24                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     disadvantages.    For  one  thing, since the function has already
     been invoked, you can't rub  out  from  the  arguments  into  the
     function name.  For another, it is not possible to save the whole
     thing,  function  name  and arguments, for you to recall with C-X
     Altmode (see below).  So C-M-X saves  nothing  for  C-X  Altmode.
     The  prompt  for  C-M-X is "C-M-X".  You can override it with the
     variable Instant Command Prompt.


     5.1.4 Repeating an Extended Commandî     5.1.4 Repeating an Extended Commandî     5.1.4 Repeating an Extended Command


       The last few extended commands you have executed are saved  and
     you  can repeat them.  We say that the extended command is saved,
     rather than  that  the  function  is  saved,  because  the  whole
     command, including arguments, is saved.

       To  re-execute  a  saved  command,  use the command C-X Altmode
     (^R Re-execute Minibuffer).  It retypes the last extended command
     and asks for confirmation.   With  an  argument,  it  repeats  an
     earlier  extended  command:  2  means repeat the next to the last
     command, etc.  You can also use the minibuffer to edit a previous
     extended command and re-execute it with changes (See  section  23
     [Minibuffer], page 156.).



     5.2 Arcane Information about M-X Commandsî     5.2 Arcane Information about M-X Commandsî     5.2 Arcane Information about M-X Commands


       You  can  skip  this  section  if  you  are  not  interested in
     customization, unless you want to know what is  going  on  behind
     the scenes.


     5.2.1 MMî     5.2.1 MMî     5.2.1 MM


       Extended  commands were once called "MM" commands, because "MM"
     is a TECO expression which looks up a command name  to  find  the
     associated  program,  and  runs  that  program.    Thus, the TECO
     expression 


         MM Apropos$Word$


     means to run the Apropos command with the argument "word".    You
     could  type  this  expression  into a minibuffer and get the sameî     25                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     results  as you would get from Meta-X Apropos$Word<cr>.  In fact,
     for the first year or so, EMACS had no Meta-X command, and that's
     what people did.  See section  23  [Minibuffer],  page  156,  for
     information on the minibuffer.

       "MM"  actually  tells TECO to call the subroutine in q-register
     "M".  The first "M" means "call", and the second "M" says what to
     call.  This subroutine takes a string argument which is the  name
     of  a function and looks it up.  Calling a function is built into
     TECO, but looking up the name is not; it is  implemented  by  the
     program  in  q-register M. That's why "MM" is called that and not
                ^î     "Run" or "F|Q".


     5.2.2 Arguments in TECO Codeî     5.2.2 Arguments in TECO Codeî     5.2.2 Arguments in TECO Code


                                        ______  _________      _______î       Functions can use  one  or  two  prefix  arguments  or  numeric
     _________î     arguments.   These are numbers (actually, TECO expressions) which
     go before the "MM".  Meta-X can only  give  the  MM  command  one
     argument.   If you want to give it two, you must type it in using
     the minibuffer.  When TECO code  passes  prefix  arguments,  they
     don't  have  to be numbers; they can also be string objects, TECO
     buffer objects, etc.  However, no more about that here.

                               ______ _________     ______  _________î       TECO code can also pass string arguments or  suffix  arguments.
     When  TECO  code passes a string argument, it appears, terminated
     by an Altmode, after the Altmode which ends  the  function  name.
     There  can  be  any  number  of  string  arguments.  In fact, the
     function can decide at run time  how  many  string  arguments  to
     read.  This makes it impossible to compile TECO code!

       Since  Altmode terminates a string argument, TECO has a quoting
     convention to allow Altmodes to be part  of  a  string  argument.
                                                   ^î     This  convention is to use the two characters |] Altmode to cause
                                                    ^î     just an Altmode to be part of the argument.    |]  also  must  be
                ^  ^î     quoted, as |] |].  The M-X command hides all of this: there is no
     way to quote an Altmode; every Altmode always terminates a string
                ^î     argument;  |]  is not special, because M-X automatically replaces
          ^                                                    ^î     each |] with two.  If you understand the TECO meaning of  |]  you
     can  enable  its  use  in  M-X  command  arguments by setting the
     variable Quote Execute Command nonzero.  Then M-X does no special
                   ^î     processing to |] characters.  You can use them to quote Altmodes,
                                            ^î     and you must also take care of quoting |] characters themselves.î     26                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     5.2.3 Commands and Functionsî     5.2.3 Commands and Functionsî     5.2.3 Commands and Functions


       Actually,  every  command in EMACS simply runs a function.  For
     example, when you type the command  C-N,  it  runs  the  function
     "^R Down Real Line".  You could just as well do C-U 1 M-X ^R Down
     Real  Line<cr> and get the same effect.  C-N can be thought of as
     a sort of abbreviation.  We say that the  command  C-N  has  been
     _________î     connected  to the function ^R Down Real Line.  The name is looked
     up once when the command and function are connected, so  that  it
     does  not  have  to  be  looked up again each time the command is
     used.  For historical reasons, the default argument passed  to  a
     function  which is connected to a command you typed is 1, but the
     default for MM and for M-X is 0.  This  is  why  the  C-U  1  was
     necessary in the example above.  The documentation for individual
     EMACS  commands  usually  gives  the  name  of the function which
     really implements the command in parentheses  after  the  command
     itself.

       Just as any function can be called directly with M-X, so almost
     any  function  can  be  connected  to a command.  You can use the
     function Set Key to do this.  Set  Key  takes  the  name  of  the
     function  as  a string argument, then reads the character command
     (including metizers or other prefix characters) directly from the
     terminal.  To define C-N, you could type 


         M-X Set Key$^R Down Real Line<cr>


     and then type C-N.  If you use the function View File often,  you
     could  connect  it  to  the command C-X V (not normally defined).
     You could even connect it to the command  C-M-V,  replacing  that
     command's  normal  definition.    Set  Key is good for redefining
     commands in the middle of editing.  An init file  or  EVARS  file
     can  do  it  each  time  you run EMACS.  See section 22.6 [Init],
     page 143.


     5.2.4 Subroutinesî     5.2.4 Subroutinesî     5.2.4 Subroutines


       EMACS is composed of a large number of functions, each  with  a
     name.    Some  of these functions are connected to commands; some
     are there for you to call with M-X;  some  are  called  by  other
     functions.   The last group are called subroutines.  They usually
     have names starting with "&", as in "& Read Line", the subroutine
     which reads a line in the echo area.  Although  most  subroutines
     have  such  names,  any  function  can be called as a subroutine.î     27                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Functions  like  ^R  Down  Real  Line have names starting with ^R
     because you are not expected to call them directly, either.   The
     purpose  of the "&" or "^R" is to get those function names out of
     the way of command completion in M-X.   M-X  allows  the  command
     name  to  be  abbreviated  if the abbreviation is unique, and the
     commands that you are not interested in  might  have  names  that
     would  interfere  and  make  some useful abbreviation cease to be
     unique.  The funny characters at the front of  the  name  prevent
     this from happening.


     5.2.5 Built-in Functionsî     5.2.5 Built-in Functionsî     5.2.5 Built-in Functions


       Not  all  of the functions in EMACS are written in TECO.  A few
     of  the  most  frequently  used  single-character  commands  have
     definitions   written   in   machine  language.    These  include
     self-inserting  characters,  Rubout,  C-F,  and  others.     Such
     functions  defined in machine language as part of TECO are called
     ________î     built-in functions.  Whereas the actual definition of an ordinary
     function is a string, the definition of a  built-in  function  is
     just  a  number,  the  address  of  a routine in TECO.  The EMACS
     "definitions" of these commands exist only to give  the  commands
     names  and  documentation,  and  live in a special library called
     BARE which is  loaded  when  necessary  to  make  the  names  and
     documentation  available.    For example, ^R Forward Character is
     the name of the function which implements the C-F command.î     28                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                CHAPTER SIXî                                CHAPTER SIXî                                CHAPTER SIX
                         MOVING UP AND DOWN LEVELSî                         MOVING UP AND DOWN LEVELSî                         MOVING UP AND DOWN LEVELS



       Subsystems and recursive editing levels are two states in which
     you  are  temporarily  doing  something  other  than  editing the
     visited file as usual.  For  example,  you  might  be  editing  a
     message that you wish to send, or looking at a documentation file
     with INFO.



     6.1 Subsystemsî     6.1 Subsystemsî     6.1 Subsystems


          _________î       A  subsystem  is  an  EMACS  function  which  is an interactive
     program in its own right: it reads commands in a language of  its
     own,  and  displays the results.  You enter a subsystem by typing
     an EMACS command which invokes it.  Once entered,  the  subsystem
     runs until a specific command to exit the subsystem is typed.  An
     example  of an EMACS subsystem is INFO, the documentation reading
     program.  Others are Backtrace and  TDEBUG,  used  for  debugging
     TECO  programs, and RMAIL and BABYL, used for reading and editing
     mail files.

       The commands understood by a subsystem  are  usually  not  like
     EMACS  commands,  because  their  purpose is something other than
     editing text.  For example, INFO commands are designed for moving
     around in a tree-structured documentation file.  In  EMACS,  most
     commands   are   Control  or  Meta  characters  because  printing
     characters insert themselves.  In most subsystems,  there  is  no
     insertion  of text, so non-Control non-Meta characters can be the
     commands.

       While you are inside a subsystem, the mode line  usually  gives
     the  name of the subsystem (as well as other information supplied
     by the subsystem, such as the filename and node  name  in  INFO).
     You  can  tell  that  you are inside a subsystem because the mode
     line does not start with "EMACS", or with an open  bracket  ("[")
     which  would indicate a recursive editing level.  See section 1.1
     [Mode Line], page 6.

       Because each subsystem implements its own commands,  we  cannot
     guarantee  anything  about  them.  However, there are conventions
     for what certain commands ought to do:  


             C-]             Aborts (exits without finishing up).î     29                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



             Backspace       Scrolls backward, like M-V in EMACS.
             Space           Scrolls forward, like C-V in EMACS.
             Q               Exits normally.
             X               Begins  an  extended command, like M-X in
                             EMACS.
             Help or ?       Prints documentation on  the  subsystem's
                             commands.  


     Not all of these necessarily exist in every subsystem, however.



     6.2 Reading Mailî     6.2 Reading Mailî     6.2 Reading Mail


       The  easiest  way  to  look at your new mail is to use M-X View
     Mail.   This  displays  the  mail  file  with  View  File.    See
     section  13.7 [View File], page 79.  To view someone else's mail,
     give his user name as an argument to M-X View Mail.

       When you want to edit your mail instead of just looking at  it,
     use  C-X  R (Read Mail).  This invokes the mail reading subsystem
     RMAIL.  See the file INFO;RMAIL, node Top.  If  you  prefer  some
     other  mail  reader, you can set the variable Mail Reader Library
     to the name of the library to use.

       You can send mail from within RMAIL as well as edit your  mail.
     But  if  you  want  to  send just one message, the easiest way is
     Control-X M (Send Mail).  You edit the message, exit with  C-M-C,
     and the message is sent; or else you abort with C-].  C-X M works
     by  invoking  RMAIL or whatever library you use to read mail at a
     special entry point named & Mail Message.  The same library  used
     for  reading  mail  is  used,  normally,  but  you  can specify a
     different one by setting the variable Mail Sender Library.

       The function Type Mailing List in the TMACS library  is  useful
     for finding out where a mailing list forwards to.  Invoke it with
     


         M-X Run Library$TMACS$Type Mailing List$<mail address>


     and  the  equivalences of the mail address will be printed.  Type
     Mailing List prints the immediate  equivalences  of  the  mailing
     list  you  specify,  then  traces  their  equivalences,  down  to
     terminal addresses or addresses on  non-ITS  machines.    Mailing
     lists  on  other  ITS  machines can be traced; simply include theî     30                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     site name in the argument.  However, no lists on DM can be traced
     because   DM's   forwarding  data  base  is  incompatible.    See
     section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.



     6.3 Recursive Editing Levelsî     6.3 Recursive Editing Levelsî     6.3 Recursive Editing Levels


         _________ _______ _____î       A recursive editing level is a  state  in  which  part  of  the
     execution of one command involves doing some editing.  You may be
     editing  the  file  you  are  working  on,  or you may be editing
     completely something totally different from what you were working
     on at top level.  Recursive editing levels are indicated  in  the
     mode line by square brackets ("[" and "]").

       For  example, the command M-X Edit Options allows you to change
     the settings of EMACS options.   During  the  execution  of  this
     command,  you enter a recursive editing level in which you edit a
     list of options names and values using the  usual  EMACS  editing
     commands.    While  this  is  going on, the mode line says "[Edit
     Options]" to inform you that you are in a recursive editing level
                        ____î     and why.  When you exit the recursive  editing  level,  the  Edit
     Options  command continues its work by looking at the changes you
     have made in the list of options and changing the  actual  option
     values  accordingly.    Only  then  is  the original Edit Options
     command finished.

                              _____î       Alternatively, you can abort the recursive editing level, which
     gets you out of the Edit Options command and back to  top  level,
     without allowing the command to finish.

       A  recursive editing level differs from a subsystem in that the
     commands are ordinary EMACS commands (though a handful  may  have
     been  changed  slightly),  whereas  a  subsystem  defines its own
     command language.

       The text you edit inside a recursive editing level  depends  on
     the  command which invoked the recursive editing level.  It could
     be a list of options and values, or a list of tab stop  settings,
     syntax table settings, a message to be sent, or any text that you
     might wish to compose.

       Sometimes  in  a  recursive  editing level you edit text of the
     file you are visiting, just as at top level.  Why would this  be?
     Usually  because  a  few  commands  are temporarily changed.  For
     example, Edit Picture in the  PICTURE  library  defines  commands
     good  for editing a picture made out of characters, then enters a
     recursive  editing  level.     When   you   exit,   the   specialî     31                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     picture-editing  commands  go  away.  Until then, the brackets in
     the mode line serve to remind you that, although the text you are
     editing is your  file,  all  is  not  normal.    See  section  26
     [PICTURE], page 183.

       In  any  case,  if  the mode line says "[...]" you are inside a
     recursive editing level, and the way to exit (send  the  message,
     redefine  the  options,  get rid of the picture-editing commands,
     etc.) is with the command C-M-C  (^R  Exit).    See  section  6.4
     [Exiting],  page  31.   If you change your mind about the command
     (you don't want to send the  message,  or  change  your  options,
     etc.)  then you should use the command C-] (Abort Recursive Edit)
     to get out.  See section 24.1 [Aborting], page 159.

       Inside recursive editing levels, the  help  option  Help  R  is
     defined  to  print  the  full  documentation of the command which
     invoked the recursive editing  level.    The  other  normal  Help
     options are still available for asking about commands you want to
     use while inside the recursive edit.

       When the text in the mode line is surrounded by parentheses, it
                                       __________î     means  that  you  are  inside  a  Minibuffer.   A minibuffer is a
     special case of the recursive editing level.  Like any other,  it
     can  be  aborted  safely  with C-].  See section 23 [Minibuffer],
     page 156.



     6.4 Exiting Levels; Exiting EMACSî     6.4 Exiting Levels; Exiting EMACSî     6.4 Exiting Levels; Exiting EMACS


             C-X C-C     Exit from EMACS to the superior job.
             C-M-C       Exit from EMACS or from a  recursive  editing
                         level.


       The  general  EMACS  command  to exit is C-M-C (^R Exit).  This
     command is used to exit from a recursive editing  level  back  to
     the  top level of EMACS, and to exit from EMACS at top level back
     to HACTRN.  If your keyboard does not have a Meta key,  you  must
     type  this command by means of a bit prefix character, as C-C C-C
     or as Altmode C-C.  Note carefully the difference between exiting
     a recursive editing level and aborting  it:  exiting  allows  the
     command  which  invoked the recursive editing level to finish its
     job with the text as you have edited it, whereas aborting cancels
     whatever  the  command  was  going  to  do.    See  section  24.1
     [Aborting], page 159.

       We  cannot  say  in general how to exit a subsystem, since eachî     32                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     subsystem defines its own command language, but the convention is
     to use the character "Q".

       You  can  exit  from  EMACS  back  to the superior job, usually
     HACTRN, at any time, even within a recursive editing level,  with
     the  command  C-X  C-C  (^R Return to Superior).  If this is used
     while you are inside a recursive editing level, then  when  EMACS
     is  re-entered  you  will  still  be inside the recursive editing
     level.

       Exiting EMACS does not normally save the visited file,  because
     it  is  not  the  case  that  users exit EMACS only when they are
     "finished editing".  If you want the file saved, you must use C-X
     C-S.  Exiting does cause an auto save if Auto  Save  mode  is  in
     use.

       Exiting  from  EMACS  runs  the  function  &  Exit EMACS.  This
     function executes the value of the variable Exit Hook, if  it  is
     nonzero;  otherwise,  it  does auto-save if Auto Save mode is on.
     & Exit  EMACS also executes the value of  the  variable  Exit  to
     Superior  Hook,  if  it  is  defined.  If EMACS is continued, the
     value of Return from Superior Hook is executed.î     33                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER SEVENî                               CHAPTER SEVENî                               CHAPTER SEVEN
                        SELF-DOCUMENTATION COMMANDSî                        SELF-DOCUMENTATION COMMANDSî                        SELF-DOCUMENTATION COMMANDS



       EMACS  provides  extensive  self-documentation  features  which
     revolve around a single character, called the Help character.  At
     any time while using EMACS, you can type the  Help  character  to
     ask  for  help.    How  to type the Help character depends on the
     terminal you are using, but aside from that  the  same  character
     always  does  the trick.  If your keyboard has a key labeled Help
     (above the H),  type  that  key  (together  with  the  Top  key).
     Otherwise  the  way  you  type the Help character is actually C-_
     (Control-Underscore) followed by an H (this is two characters  to
     type,  but  let's not worry about that).  Whatever it is you have
     to type, to EMACS it  is  just  the  Help  character.    On  some
     terminals  just  figuring out how to type a Control-Underscore is
     hard!  Typing Underscore and  adding  the  Control  key  is  what
     logically  ought  to  work,  but  on  some terminals it does not.
     Sometimes Control-Shift-O works.   On  VT-100  terminals,  typing
     Control-/ or Control-? sends a Control-_ character.

       If  you type Help while you are using a subsystem such as INFO,
     it prints a list of the commands of that subsystem.

       If you type Help in the middle of a multi-character command, it
     often tells you about what sort of thing you  should  type  next.
     For  example,  if  you type M-X and then Help, it tells you about
     M-X and how to type the name of the command.  If you  finish  the
     function  name  and  the Altmode and then type Help, it tells you
     about the function you  have  specified  so  you  can  know  what
     arguments it needs.  If you type C-X and then type Help, it tells
     you about the C-X commands.

       But  normally,  when  it's  time  for you to start typing a new
     command, Help offers you several options for  asking  about  what
     commands there are and what they do.  It prompts with "Doc (? for
     help):"  at  the  bottom  of  the  screen,  and you should type a
     character to say what kind of help you want.  You could type Help
     or "?" at this point to find out what options are available.  The
     ones you are most likely to need are described here.

       The most basic Help options are Help C and Help D. You can  use
     them  to  ask  what  a  particular  command  does.  Help C is for
     character commands; type the command you want to know about after
     the Help and the "C" ("C" stands for Character).   Thus,  Help  C
     M-F  or Help C Altmode F tells you about the M-F command.  Help D
     is for asking about functions (extended commands); type the  name
     of  the  function and a Return.  Thus, Help D Lisp Mode<cr> tellsî     34                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     you  about  M-X  Lisp  Mode.    Help  D  can  also  tell  you the
     documentation of a variable, if you give  it  a  variable's  name
     instead  of  a function's name.  "D" stands for "Describe", since
     Help D actually uses the function Describe to do the work.

       A more complicated sort of question to ask is,  "what  are  the
     commands for working with files?"  For this, you can type Help A,
     followed  by the string "file" and a Return.  It prints a list of
     all the functions that  have  "file"  anywhere  in  their  names,
     including  Save All Files, ^R Save File, Append to File, etc.  If
     some of the functions are connected to  commands,  it  tells  you
     that  too.  For example, it would say that you can invoke ^R Save
     File by typing C-X C-S.  "A" stands for "Apropos", since  Help  A
     actually  uses the function Apropos to do the substring matching.
     Help  A  does  not  list  internal  functions,  only  those   the
     nonprogrammer  is  likely  to use.  If you want subroutines to be
     listed as well, you must call Apropos yourself.

       Because Apropos looks only for functions  whose  names  contain
     the  string which you specify, you must use ingenuity in choosing
     substrings.    If  you  are  looking  for  commands  for  killing
     backwards  and  Help  A  Kill Backwards doesn't reveal any, don't
     give up.  Try just Kill, or just Backwards, or  just  Back.    Be
     persistent.  Pretend you are playing Adventure.

       Here  is  a  set of Apropos strings that covers many classes of
     EMACS commands, since there are strong conventions for naming the
     standard EMACS commands.  By giving you a  feel  for  the  naming
     conventions,  this set should also serve to aid you in developing
     a technique for picking Apropos strings.


         character, line, word, sentence, paragraph, region, page,
         buffer, screen, window,  bounds,  file,  dir,  beginning,
         end,  case,  mode, forward, backward, next, previous, up,
         down, search, kill, delete, mark, fill, indent, change.


     There is also a  convention  for  how  command  names  start  for
     certain  common kinds of operations: many commands start with one
     of the words "Edit", "View", "Insert", "List", or "What".

       If you are inside a recursive editing level, Help R prints  out
     the  complete documentation of that recursive editing level.  See
     section 6.3 [Recursive], page 30.  Help ? also tells you  briefly
     what  sort  of recursive editing level you are in, in addition to
     describing the available Help options.  If you are not  inside  a
     recursive editing level, Help R says that you are at top level.î     35                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       If  something  surprising  happens,  and  you are not sure what
     commands you typed, use Help L.    Help  L  prints  the  last  60
     command  characters  you  typed  in.  This is also helpful if you
     suffer from line noise.  If you see commands that you don't know,
     you can use Help C to find out what they do.

       If a command doesn't do what you thought you knew it should do,
     you can ask to see whether it  has  changed  recently.    Help  N
     prints  out  the file called EMACS;EMACS NEWS which is an archive
     of announcements of changes to EMACS.

       To find out about the other Help options, type Help Help.  That
     is, when the first Help asks for an option, type Help to ask what
     is available.

       Finally, you should know  about  the  documentation  files  for
     EMACS,   which  are  EMACS;EMACS  GUIDE  and  EMACS;EMACS  CHART.
     EMACS GUIDE is a version of the manual formatted  to  be  printed
     out  on  a  terminal  or  line  printer.  EMACS CHART has a brief
     description of all the commands, known as the wall chart, because
     it is good to post on the wall near your terminal.î     36                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER EIGHTî                               CHAPTER EIGHTî                               CHAPTER EIGHT
                          THE MARK AND THE REGIONî                          THE MARK AND THE REGIONî                          THE MARK AND THE REGION



       In  general, a command which processes an arbitrary part of the
     buffer must know where to start and where to  stop.    In  EMACS,
                                                                   ___î     such  commands  usually operate on the text between point and the
     ____                                ___ ______î     mark.  This range of text is called the region.    To  specify  a
     region, you set point to one end of it and mark at the other.  It
     doesn't  matter  which one is set first chronologically, or which
     one comes earlier in the  text.    Here  are  some  commands  for
     setting the mark:


             C-@         Set the mark where point is.
             C-Space     The same.
             C-X C-X     Interchange mark and point.
             M-@         Set  mark  after  end  of  next  word.   This
                         command and the following three do  not  move
                         point.
             C-M-@       Set mark after end of next Lisp s-expression.
             C-<         Set mark at beginning of buffer.
             C->         Set mark at end of buffer.
             M-H         Put region around current paragraph.
             C-M-H       Put region around current Lisp defun.
             C-X H       Put region around entire buffer.
             C-X C-P     Put region around current page.  


       For  example,  if you wish to convert part of the buffer to all
     upper-case, you can use the C-X C-U command,  which  operates  on
     the text in the region.  You can first go to the beginning of the
     text  to be capitalized, put the mark there, move to the end, and
     then type C-X C-U.  Or, you can set the mark at the  end  of  the
     text, move to the beginning, and then type C-X C-U.  C-X C-U runs
     the  function  ^R Uppercase Region, whose name signifies that the
     region, or everything between  point  and  the  mark,  is  to  be
     capitalized.

       The  most common way to set the mark is with the C-@ command or
     the C-Space command (^R Set/Pop Mark).  They set the  mark  where
     point is.  Then you can move point away, leaving the mark behind.

       It   isn't  actually  possible  to  type  C-Space  on  non-Meta
     keyboards.  Yet on many terminals the  command  appears  to  work
     anyway!   This is because trying to type a Control-Space on those
     terminals actually sends the character C-@, which means the  same
     thing  as  C-Space.    A few keyboards just send a Space.  If you
     have one of them, you type C-@, or customize your EMACS.î     37                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Since terminals have only one cursor, there is no way for EMACS
     to  show  you  where  the mark is located.  You have to remember.
     The usual solution to this problem is to set the  mark  and  then
     use  it  soon,  before  you  forget where it is.  But you can see
     where the mark is with the command C-X C-X (^R Exchange Point and
     Mark) which puts the mark where point was  and  point  where  the
     mark  was.  The extent of the region is unchanged, but the cursor
     and point are now at the previous location of the mark.

       C-X C-X is also useful when you are satisfied with the location
     of point but want to move the mark; do C-X C-X to put point there
     and then you can move it.  A second use of C-X C-X, if necessary,
     puts the mark at the new location with point back at its original
     location.

       If you insert or delete before the mark,  the  mark  may  drift
     through  the text.  If the buffer contains "FOO BAR" and the mark
     is before the "B", then if you delete the "F" the  mark  will  be
     before  the "A".  This is an unfortunate result of the simple way
     the mark is implemented.  It is best not to delete or  insert  at
     places  above  the mark until you are finished using it and don't
     care where it drifts to.



     8.1 Commands to Mark Textual Objectsî     8.1 Commands to Mark Textual Objectsî     8.1 Commands to Mark Textual Objects


       There are commands for placing the mark on the other side of  a
     certain  object  such as a word or a list, without having to move
     there first.  M-@ (^R Mark Word) puts the mark at the end of  the
     next  word,  while C-M-@ (^R Mark Sexp) puts it at the end of the
     next s-expression.  C-> (^R Mark End) puts the mark at the end of
     the buffer,  while  C-<  (^R  Mark  Beginning)  puts  it  at  the
     beginning.  These characters allow you to save a little typing or
     redisplay, sometimes.

       Other commands set both point and mark, to delimit an object in
     the  buffer.  M-H (^R Mark Paragraph) puts point at the beginning
     of the paragraph it was inside of (or before), and puts the  mark
     at the end.  M-H does all that's necessary if you wish to indent,
     case-convert,  or  kill a whole paragraph.  C-M-H (^R Mark Defun)
     similarly puts point before and the mark  after  the  current  or
     next defun.  C-X C-P (^R Mark Page) puts point before the current
     page  (or  the  next or previous, according to the argument), and
     mark at the end.   The  mark  goes  after  the  terminating  page
     delimiter  (to  include it), while point goes after the preceding
     page delimiter (to exclude it).  Finally, C-X H  (^R  Mark  Whole
     Buffer)  makes  the  region the entire buffer by putting point at
     the beginning and the mark at the end.î     38                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     8.2 The Ring of Marksî     8.2 The Ring of Marksî     8.2 The Ring of Marks


       Aside  from  delimiting the region, the mark is also useful for
     remembering a spot that you may want to go back to.  To make this
     feature more useful, EMACS remembers 16 previous locations of the
     mark.  Most commands that set the mark push  the  old  mark  onto
     this  stack.    To  return  to a marked location, use C-U C-@ (or
     C-U C-Space).  This moves  point  to  where  the  mark  was,  and
     restores  the  mark  from the stack of former marks.  So repeated
     use of this command moves point to all of the old  marks  on  the
     stack,  one  by  one.  Since the stack is actually a ring, enough
     uses of C-U C-@ bring point back  to  where  it  was  originally.
     Insertion  and  deletion  can cause the saved marks to drift, but
     they will still  be  good  for  this  purpose  because  they  are
     unlikely to drift very far.

       Some  commands  whose  primary purpose is to move point a great
     distance take advantage of the stack of marks to give you  a  way
     to undo the command.  The best example is M-<, which moves to the
     beginning of the buffer.  It sets the mark first, so that you can
     use  C-U  C-@  or C-X C-X to go back to where you were.  Searches
     sometimes set the mark; it depends on how far they move.  Because
     of this uncertainty, searches type out "^@" if they set the mark.
     The normal situation is that searches leave the  mark  behind  if
     they  move at least 500 characters, but you can change that value
     since it is kept in the variable Auto  Push  Point  Option.    By
     setting  it  to  0,  you  can make all searches set the mark.  By
     setting it to a very large number such as ten  million,  you  can
     prevent  all  searches  from  setting the mark.  The string to be
     typed out when this option does its thing is kept in the variable
     Auto Push Point Notification.î     39                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                               CHAPTER NINEî                               CHAPTER NINEî                               CHAPTER NINE
                          KILLING AND MOVING TEXTî                          KILLING AND MOVING TEXTî                          KILLING AND MOVING TEXT



       The  commonest  way  of moving or copying text with EMACS is to
     kill it, and get it back again in one or more places.    This  is
     very  safe because the last several pieces of killed text are all
     remembered, and it is versatile, because the  many  commands  for
     killing  syntactic units can also be used for moving those units.
     There are also other ways of moving text for special purposes.



     9.1 Deletion and Killingî     9.1 Deletion and Killingî     9.1 Deletion and Killing


       Most commands which erase text from the buffer save it so  that
     you  can  get it back if you change your mind, or move or copy it
                                                                  ____î     to other parts of the buffer.  These commands are known  as  kill
     commands.    The rest of the commands that erase text do not save
                            ______î     it; they are known as  delete  commands.    The  delete  commands
     include  C-D  and  Rubout,  which  delete only one character at a
     time,  and  those  commands  that  delete  only  spaces  or  line
     separators.    Commands  that  can destroy significant amounts of
     nontrivial  data  generally  kill.    The  commands'  names   and
     individual  descriptions use the words "kill" and "delete" to say
     which they do.  If you do a kill command by mistake, you can  use
     the Undo command to undo it (See section 24.3 [Undo], page 163.).


             C-D             Delete next character.
             Rubout          Delete previous character.
             M-\             Delete spaces and tabs around point.
             C-X C-O         Delete  blank  lines  around  the current
                             line.
             M-^             Join two lines by deleting the  CRLF  and
                             any indentation.
             C-K             Kill rest of line or one or more lines.
             C-W             Kill region (from point to the mark).
             M-D             Kill word.
             M-Rubout        Kill word backwards.
             C-X Rubout      Kill back to beginning of sentence.
             M-K             Kill to end of sentence.
             C-M-K           Kill s-expression.
             C-M-Rubout      Kill s-expression backwards.  î     40                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     9.1.1 Deletionî     9.1.1 Deletionî     9.1.1 Deletion


       The most basic delete commands are C-D and Rubout.  C-D deletes
     the character after the cursor, the one the cursor is "on top of"
     or  "underneath".    The cursor doesn't move.  Rubout deletes the
     character before the cursor, and moves the  cursor  back.    Line
     separators  act  like  single characters when deleted.  Actually,
     C-D and Rubout aren't always delete  commands;  if  you  give  an
     argument,  they  kill  instead.   This prevents you from losing a
     great deal of text by typing a large argument to a C-D or Rubout.

       The  other  delete  commands  are  those  which   delete   only
     formatting  characters:  spaces,  tabs  and line separators.  M-\
     (^R Delete Horizontal Space)  deletes  all  the  spaces  and  tab
     characters  before  and  after  point.   C-X C-O (^R Delete Blank
     Lines) deletes all blank lines after the current line, and if the
     current line is blank  deletes  all  blank  lines  preceding  the
     current  line as well (leaving one blank line, the current line).
     M-^ (^R Delete  Indentation)  joins  the  current  line  and  the
     previous  line, or the current line and the next line if given an
     argument.  See section 11.3 [Indentation], page 54.

       A function ^R Delete Region used  to  exist,  but  it  was  too
     dangerous.    When  you  want  to  delete  a large amount of text
     without saving a copy of it (perhaps because it is very big), you
     can set point and mark around the text and then type 


         M-Altmode
         MRK$$


     (This is a use of the minibuffer.  See section  23  [Minibuffer],
     page 156.).


     9.1.2 Killing by Linesî     9.1.2 Killing by Linesî     9.1.2 Killing by Lines


       The  simplest  kill  command is the C-K command (^R Kill Line).
     If given at the beginning of a line, it kills all the text on the
     line, leaving it blank.  If given on a blank line, the blank line
     disappears.  As a consequence, if  you  go  to  the  front  of  a
     non-blank   line   and   type  two  C-K's,  the  line  disappears
     completely.

       More generally, C-K kills from point up to the end of the line,
     unless it is at the end of a line.  In that  case  it  kills  theî     41                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     line  separator  following  the  line, thus merging the next line
     into the current one.  Invisible spaces and tabs at  the  end  of
     the  line  are  ignored  when  deciding which case applies, so if
     point appears to be at the end of the line, you can be  sure  the
     line separator will be killed.

       If  C-K is given a positive argument, it kills that many lines,
     and the separators that follow them (however, text on the current
     line before point is spared).  With a negative argument, it kills
     back to a number of line beginnings.  An  argument  of  -2  means
     kill  back  to  the  second  line  beginning.  If point is at the
     beginning of a  line,  that  line  beginning  doesn't  count,  so
     C-U  -  2  C-K  with  point  at the front of a line kills the two
     previous lines.

       C-K with an argument of zero kills all the text before point on
     the current line.


     9.1.3 Other Kill Commandsî     9.1.3 Other Kill Commandsî     9.1.3 Other Kill Commands


       A kill command which is very general is C-W (^R  Kill  Region),
     which  kills  everything  between  point and the mark.  With this
     command, you can kill any contiguous characters, if you first set
     the mark at one end of them and go to the other end.

       Other syntactic units can be killed: words, with  M-Rubout  and
     M-D  (See  section  11.1  [Words], page 50.); s-expressions, with
     C-M-Rubout  and  C-M-K  (See  section   20.6.1   [S-expressions],
     page  111.); sentences, with C-X Rubout and M-K (See section 11.2
     [Sentences], page 52.).



     9.2 Un-Killingî     9.2 Un-Killingî     9.2 Un-Killing


       Un-killing is getting back text which was killed.    The  usual
     way to move or copy text is to kill it and then un-kill it one or
     more times.


             C-Y     Yank (re-insert) last killed text.
             M-Y     Replace   re-inserted   killed   text   with  the
                     previously killed text.
             M-W     Save region as last killed text without killing.
             C-M-W   Append next kill to last batch of killed text.  î     42                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                      ____ ______            ____ ____î       Killed  text  is pushed onto a ring buffer called the kill ring
     that remembers the last 8 blocks of text that were killed.   (Why
     it is called a ring buffer will be explained below).  The command
     C-Y  (^R Un-kill) reinserts the text of the most recent kill.  It
     leaves the cursor at the end of the text, and puts  the  mark  at
     the  beginning.  Thus, a single C-W undoes the C-Y (M-X Undo also
     does so).  C-U C-Y leaves the cursor in front of  the  text,  and
     the  mark  after.  This is only if the argument is specified with
     just a C-U, precisely.  Any other sort of argument, including C-U
     and digits, has an effect described below.

       If you wish to copy a block of text, you might want to use  M-W
     (^R  Copy  Region),  which  copies  the region into the kill ring
     without removing it from  the  buffer.    This  is  approximately
     equivalent  to C-W followed by C-Y, except that M-W does not mark
     the buffer as "changed"  and  does  not  temporarily  change  the
     screen.

       There is only one kill ring, and switching buffers or files has
     no  effect  on  it.  After visiting a new file, whatever was last
     killed in the previous file is still on top  of  the  kill  ring.
     This is important for moving text between files.


     9.2.1 Appending Killsî     9.2.1 Appending Killsî     9.2.1 Appending Kills


       Normally,  each  kill  command pushes a new block onto the kill
     ring.  However, two or more kill commands in a row combine  their
     text  into  a  single  entry  on  the  ring, so that a single C-Y
     command gets it all back as it was before it was  killed.    This
     means  that  you  don't have to kill all the text in one command;
     you can keep killing line after line, or word after  word,  until
     you  have  killed  it  all,  and you can still get it all back at
     once.  (Thus  we  join  television  in  leading  people  to  kill
     thoughtlessly).

       Commands  that  kill forward from point add onto the end of the
     previous killed text.  Commands that kill backward from point add
     onto the beginning.  This way, any sequence of mixed forward  and
     backward  kill  commands  puts all the killed text into one entry
     without rearrangement.

       If a kill command is separated from the last  kill  command  by
     other  commands,  it  starts a new entry on the kill ring, unless
     you tell it not to by saying C-M-W (^R Append Next Kill) in front
     of it.  The C-M-W tells the following command, if it  is  a  kill
     command,  to  append  the  text it kills to the last killed text,
     instead of starting a new  entry.    With  C-M-W,  you  can  killî     43                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     several separated pieces of text and accumulate them to be yanked
     back in one place.


     9.2.2 Un-killing Earlier Killsî     9.2.2 Un-killing Earlier Killsî     9.2.2 Un-killing Earlier Kills


       To  recover killed text that is no longer the most recent kill,
     you need the Meta-Y (^R Un-kill Pop) command.   The  M-Y  command
     should be used only after a C-Y command or another M-Y.  It takes
     the  un-killed  text inserted by the C-Y and replaces it with the
     text from an earlier kill.   So,  to  recover  the  text  of  the
     next-to-the-last  kill,  you  first  use  C-Y to recover the last
     kill, and then use M-Y to move back to the previous kill.

       You can think of all the last few kills as living  in  a  ring.
     After  a  C-Y  command, the text at the front of the ring is also
     present in the buffer.  M-Y  "rotates"  the  ring,  bringing  the
     previous  string of text to the front, and this text replaces the
     other text in the buffer as well.  Enough M-Y commands can rotate
     any part of the ring to the front, so you can get at  any  killed
     text  as  long  as  it  is recent enough to be still in the ring.
     Eventually the ring rotates all  the  way  around  and  the  most
     recent  killed  text  comes  to  the  front (and into the buffer)
     again.  M-Y with a negative argument rotates the ring  backwards.
     If  the  region  doesn't match the text at the front of the ring,
     M-Y is not allowed.

       In any case, when the text you are looking for is brought  into
     the  buffer,  you  can  stop  doing M-Y's and it will stay there.
     It's really just a copy of what's at the front of  the  ring,  so
     editing  it  does  not  change what's in the ring.  And the ring,
     once rotated, stays rotated,  so  that  doing  another  C-Y  gets
     another copy of what you rotated to the front with M-Y.

       If  you  change  your  mind about un-killing, a C-W or M-X Undo
     gets rid of the un-killed text at any point, after any number  of
     M-Y's.    C-W pushes the text onto the ring again.  M-X Undo does
     not.

       If you know how many M-Y's it would take to find the  text  you
     want, then there is an alternative.  C-Y with an argument greater
     than  one  restores the text the specified number of entries down
     on the ring.  Thus, C-U 2 C-Y gets the next to the last block  of
     killed  text.  It differs from C-Y M-Y in that C-U 2 C-Y does not
     permanently rotate the ring.

       A way of viewing the contents of the kill ring is î     44                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         M-X View Q-register$..K<cr>


     You  must  add  one to the indices listed by this command, to get
     the argument to use with C-Y to yank any particular string.



     9.3 Other Ways of Copying Textî     9.3 Other Ways of Copying Textî     9.3 Other Ways of Copying Text


       Usually we copy or move text by killing it and  un-killing  it,
     but there are other ways that are useful for copying one block of
     text in many places, or for copying many scattered blocks of text
     into  one  place.    In addition to those described here, see the
     self-documentation of the MOVE library.


     9.3.1 Accumulating Textî     9.3.1 Accumulating Textî     9.3.1 Accumulating Text


       You can accumulate blocks  of  text  from  scattered  locations
     either into a buffer or into a file if you like.

       To   append   them  into  a  buffer,  use  the  command  C-X  A
     <buffername><cr> (^R Append to Buffer), which inserts a  copy  of
     the  region into the specified buffer at the location of point in
     that buffer.  If there is no buffer with the  name  you  specify,
     one  is created.  If you append text into a buffer which has been
     used for editing, the copied text goes into  the  middle  of  the
     text of the buffer, wherever point happens to be in it.

       Point  in that buffer is left at the end of the copied text, so
     successive uses of C-X A accumulate the  text  in  the  specified
     buffer  in the same order as they were copied.  If C-X A is given
     an argument, point in the other buffer is left before the  copied
     text, so successive uses of C-X A add text in reverse order.

       You can retrieve the accumulated text from that buffer with M-X
     Insert  Buffer$<buffername><cr>.  This inserts a copy of the text
     in that buffer into the selected buffer.  You can also select the
     other buffer for editing.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83, for
     background information on buffers.

       Strictly speaking, C-X A does not always  append  to  the  text
     already  in  the  buffer.    But  if it is used on a buffer which
     starts out empty, it does keep appending to the end.

       Instead of accumulating text within EMACS, in a buffer, you canî     45                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     append text directly into a disk file with the command M-X Append
     to  File$<filename><cr>.    It adds the text of the region to the
     end of the specified file.  M-X Prepend to File adds the text  to
     the  beginning  of  the  file  instead.    The  file  is  changed
     immediately on disk.  These commands are normally used with files
     that are not being visited in EMACS.  They have the advantage  of
     working  even  on  files  too large to fit into the EMACS address
     space.


     9.3.2 Copying Text Many Timesî     9.3.2 Copying Text Many Timesî     9.3.2 Copying Text Many Times


       When you want to insert a  copy  of  the  same  piece  of  text
     frequently,  the  kill  ring  becomes impractical, since the text
     moves  down  on  the  ring  as  you  edit,  and  will  be  in  an
     unpredictable place on the ring when you need it again.  For this
     case,  you can use the commands C-X X (^R Put Q-register) and C-X
     G (^R Get Q-register) to move the text.

       C-X X<q> stores a copy of the text of the  region  in  a  place
     called  q-register <q>.  With an argument, C-X X deletes the text
     as well.  <q> can be a letter or a digit.  This gives  36  places
     in  which you can store a piece of text.  C-X G<q> inserts in the
     buffer the text from q-register <q>.  Normally  it  leaves  point
     before  the  text  and  places the mark after, but with a numeric
     argument it puts point after the text and the mark before.

       The q-registers  are  important  temporary  variables  in  TECO
     programming,  but you don't have to understand them, only to know
     that what you save with C-X X A is what you will get with  C-X  G
     A. 

       Do not use q-registers M and R in this way, if you are going to
     use the TECO commands MM and MR.î     46                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                CHAPTER TENî                                CHAPTER TENî                                CHAPTER TEN
                                 SEARCHINGî                                 SEARCHINGî                                 SEARCHING



       Like  other  editors,  EMACS  has commands for searching for an
     occurrence of a string.  The search command is unusual in that it
        ___________î     is incremental; it begins to  search  before  you  have  finished
     typing  the  search  string.    As you type in the search string,
     EMACS shows you where it would be found.   When  you  have  typed
     enough  characters  to identify the place you want, you can stop.
     Depending on what you will do next, you may or may  not  need  to
     terminate the search explicitly with an Altmode first.


             C-S         Search forward.
             C-R         Search backward.
             C-S $ C-W   Word search, ignoring whitespace.  


       The  command  to  search  is  C-S (^R Incremental Search).  C-S
     reads in  characters  and  positions  the  cursor  at  the  first
     occurrence  of  the  characters that you have typed.  If you type
     C-S and then F, the cursor moves right after the first "F".  Type
     an "O", and see the cursor move to after the first "FO".    After
     another  "O", the cursor is after the first "FOO" after the place
     where you started the search.  At the same time,  the  "FOO"  has
     echoed at the bottom of the screen.

       If  you  type  a mistaken character, you can rub it out.  After
     the FOO, typing a rubout makes the "O" disappear from the  bottom
     of  the  screen, leaving only "FO".  The cursor moves back to the
     "FO".  Rubbing out the "O" and "F" moves the cursor back to where
     you started the search.

       When you are satisfied with the place you have reached, you can
     type an Altmode, which stops searching, leaving the cursor  where
     the   search  brought  it.    Also,  any  command  not  specially
     meaningful in searches stops the searching and is then  executed.
     Thus,  typing  C-A  would  exit  the  search and then move to the
     beginning of the line.  Altmode is necessary  only  if  the  next
     command  you  want  to  type  is  a  printing  character, Rubout,
     Altmode, C-Q, or another search  command,  since  those  are  the
     characters that have special meanings inside the search.

       Sometimes you search for "FOO" and find it, but not the one you
     expected  to find.  There was a second FOO that you forgot about,
     before the one you were looking for.  Then type another  C-S  and
     the  cursor  will find the next FOO.  This can be done any number
     of times.  If you overshoot, you can rub out the C-S's.î     47                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       After  you  exit  a  search, you can search for the same string
     again by typing just C-S C-S: one C-S command to start the search
     and then another C-S to mean "search again".

       If your string is not found at all, the echo area says "Failing
     I-Search".  The cursor is after the place where  EMACS  found  as
     much  of  your string as it could.  Thus, if you search for FOOT,
     and there is no FOOT, you might see the cursor after the  FOO  in
     FOOL.    At  this  point there are several things you can do.  If
     your string was mistyped, you can rub some of it out and  correct
     it.    If you like the place you have found, you can type Altmode
     or some other EMACS command to "accept what the search  offered".
     Or  you can type C-G, which throws away the characters that could
     not be found (the "T" in "FOOT"), leaving those that  were  found
     (the  "FOO"  in  "FOOT").   A second C-G at that point undoes the
     search entirely.

       The C-G "quit" command does  special  things  during  searches;
     just  what,  depends  on the status of the search.  If the search
     has found what you  specified  and  is  waiting  for  input,  C-G
     cancels  the  entire  search.  The cursor moves back to where you
     started the search.  If C-G is typed while the search is actually
     searching for something or updating the display, or after  search
     failed to find some of your input (having searched all the way to
     the  end  of  the  file), then only the characters which have not
     been found are discarded.  Having discarded them, the  search  is
     now  successful  and waiting for more input, so a second C-G will
     cancel the entire search.  Make sure you wait for the  first  C-G
     to ding the bell before typing the second one; if typed too soon,
     the  second  C-G  may  be confused with the first and effectively
     lost.

       You can also type C-R at any time to start searching backwards.
     If a search fails because the place you started was too  late  in
     the  file,  you  should do this.  Repeated C-R's keep looking for
     more occurrences backwards.  A C-S starts going  forwards  again.
     C-R's  can  be  rubbed  out just like anything else.  If you know
     that you want to search backwards, you can use C-R instead of C-S
     to start the search, because C-R is also a  command  (^R  Reverse
     Incremental Search) to search backward.  Note to all customizers:
     all   this  command  does  is  call  the  current  definition  of
     ^R Incremental Search with a negative argument.

       All sorts of searches in EMACS normally ignore the case of  the
     text  they  are  searching  through; if you specify searching for
     FOO, then Foo and foo are also considered a match.  If you do not
     want this feature, set the variable Case Search  to  zero.    See
     section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.î     48                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Recall that Altmode exits a search without doing anything else,
     while  other Control and Meta characters exit the search and then
     have their normal function.  The variable Search Exit  Char  says
     which  character  should  exit  and  do nothing else; its initial
     value is  033  octal,  for  Altmode.    This  value  is  a  9-bit
     character,  so  300  octal  means  that  Control-@  is  the  exit
     character.  Any other character whose definition indirects to the
     specified one also serves as an exit character; so if you specify
     C-B, C-b will also exit, and if you  specify  C-@,  then  C-Space
     will  also  exit.    Set the variable to -1, and there is no exit
     character.

       Bit prefix characters are not processed before the decision  as
     to  whether  and  how  to exit, so if you specify M-: as the exit
     character, you must have a meta key on your terminal in order  to
     type it.  I do not know if this can be changed easily.

       Search  Exit Option says what to do with other Control and Meta
     characters.  0 says that  they  should  be  part  of  the  search
     string.  A nonzero value says that they should exit and then have
     their  normal  function.  If this variable is nonzero, the Search
     Exit Char is distinguished only by not having its normal function
     when it exits.  If this is zero, the Search Exit Char is the only
     way to exit.

       A non-incremental search is also available.  Type  Altmode  (or
     the Search Exit Char) right after the C-S to get it.  Do 


         M-X Describe$^R String Search<cr>


     for details.  Some people who prefer non-incremental searches put
     that  function  on  Meta-S,  and  ^R  Character  Search  (do  M-X
     Describe$ for details) on C-S.  It can do one useful thing  which
     incremental  search  cannot: search for words regardless of where
     the line breaks.

       Word search searches for a sequence of words without regard  to
     how  the  words are separated.  More precisely, you type a string
     of many words, using single spaces  to  separate  them,  and  the
     string  can  be  found  even if there are multiple spaces or line
     separators between the words.  Other punctuation such  as  commas
     or  periods  must  match  exactly.  This is useful in conjunction
     with documents formatted by text justifiers.  If you  edit  while
     looking  at  the printed, formatted version, you can't tell where
     the line breaks are in the source file.  With  word  search,  you
     can search without having to know.î     49                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Word  search is a special case of non-incremental search and is
     invoked with C-S Altmode C-W.  This is  followed  by  the  search
     string,   which  must  always  be  terminated  with  an  Altmode.
     Searching does not  start  until  the  final  Altmode  is  typed.
     Search  Exit  Char  and  Search  Exit Option do not apply to word
     search.

       You do not even have to type each  word  in  full,  in  a  word
     search.    An abbreviation is good enough.  Word search finds the
     first occurrence of a sequence of words  whose  beginnings  match
     the words of the argument.î     50                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              CHAPTER ELEVENî                              CHAPTER ELEVENî                              CHAPTER ELEVEN
                         COMMANDS FOR ENGLISH TEXTî                         COMMANDS FOR ENGLISH TEXTî                         COMMANDS FOR ENGLISH TEXT



       EMACS enables you to manipulate words, sentences, or paragraphs
     of  text.    In  addition,  there  are commands to fill text, and
     convert case.  For text-justifier input files, there are commands
     that may help manipulate font change commands and underlining.

       Editing files of text in a human  language  ought  to  be  done
     using  Text  mode  rather than Fundamental mode.  Invoke M-X Text
     Mode to enter  Text  mode.    See  section  20.1  [Major  Modes],
     page 102.  M-X Text Mode causes Tab to run the function ^R Tab to
     Tab Stop, which allows you to set any tab stops with M-X Edit Tab
     Stops  (See  section  11.3  [Indentation],  page  54.).  Features
     concerned with comments in programs are turned  off  except  when
     explicitly invoked.  Automatic display of parenthesis matching is
     turned  off, which is what most people want.  Finally, the syntax
     table is changed so that periods are not  considered  part  of  a
     word, while apostrophes, backspaces and underlines are.

       If  you are editing input for the text justifier TEX, you might
     want to use TEX mode instead of Text mode.  See  the  file  INFO;
     ETEX.     For  editing  SCRIBE  input,  use  SCRIBE  mode.    See
     section 11.8 [SCRIBE], page 61.  Someday  there  may  be  special
     major modes for other text justifiers.



     11.1 Word Commandsî     11.1 Word Commandsî     11.1 Word Commands


       EMACS  has  commands for moving over or operating on words.  By
     convention, they are all Meta- characters.


             M-F         Move Forward over a word.
             M-B         Move Backward over a word.
             M-D         Kill up to the end of a word.
             M-Rubout    Kill back to the beginning of a word.
             M-@         Mark the end of the next word.
             M-T         Transpose two words; drag a word  forward  or
                         backward across other words.  


       Notice  how  these  commands  form  a  group that parallels the
     character based commands C-F, C-B, C-D, C-T and Rubout.   M-@  is
     related to C-@.î     51                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  commands  Meta-F (^R Forward Word) and Meta-B (^R Backward
     Word) move forward and  backward  over  words.    They  are  thus
     analogous  to  Control-F  and  Control-B,  which move over single
     characters.  Like their Control-  analogues,  Meta-F  and  Meta-B
     move  several words if given an argument.  Meta-F with a negative
     argument moves backward like Meta-B, and Meta-B with  a  negative
     argument  moves  forward.    Forward motion stops right after the
     last letter of the word, while backward motion stops right before
     the first letter.

       It is easy to kill a word at a time.  Meta-D (^R  Forward  Kill
     Word)  kills  the  word  after  point.    To be precise, it kills
     everything from point to the place Meta-F would move to.    Thus,
     if point is in the middle of a word, only the part after point is
     killed.    If  some  punctuation comes after point and before the
     next word, it is killed along with the word.  If you wish to kill
     only the next word but not the punctuation, simply do  Meta-F  to
     get  the  end,  and  kill  the  word  backwards with Meta-Rubout.
     Meta-D takes arguments just like Meta-F.

       Meta-Rubout (^R Backward  Kill  Word)  kills  the  word  before
     point.  It kills everything from point back to where Meta-B would
     move to.  If point is after the space in "FOO, BAR", then "FOO, "
     is  killed.  If you wish to kill just "FOO", then do a Meta-B and
     a Meta-D instead of a Meta-Rubout.

       Meta-T (^R Transpose Words) moves the  cursor  forward  over  a
     word,  dragging  the  word  preceding  or  containing  the cursor
     forward as well.  A numeric argument serves as  a  repeat  count.
     Meta-T  with a negative argument undoes the effect of Meta-T with
     a positive argument; it drags the word behind the cursor backward
     over a word.  An argument of  zero,  instead  of  doing  nothing,
     transposes the word at point (surrounding or adjacent to it) with
     the  word at mark.  In any case, the delimiter characters between
     the words do not move.  For example, "FOO, BAR"  transposes  into
     "BAR, FOO" rather than "BAR FOO,".

       To  operate on the next n words with an operation which applies
     between point and mark, you can either set the mark at point  and
     then   move   over   the  words,  or  you  can  use  the  command
     Meta-@ (^R Mark Word) which does not move  point,  but  sets  the
     mark  where Meta-F would move to.  It can be given arguments just
     like Meta-F.

       Note that if you are in Atom Word mode and in  Lisp  mode,  all
     the  word  commands  regard an entire Lisp atom as a single word.
     See section 22.1 [Minor Modes], page 133.

       The  word  commands'  understanding  of  syntax  is  completelyî     52                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     controlled  by the syntax table.  Any character can, for example,
     be declared to be a word delimiter.  See section  22.4  [Syntax],
     page 139.



     11.2 Sentence and Paragraph Commandsî     11.2 Sentence and Paragraph Commandsî     11.2 Sentence and Paragraph Commands


       The  EMACS  commands  for manipulating sentences and paragraphs
     are mostly Meta- commands, so as to  resemble  the  word-handling
     commands.


             M-A     Move back to the beginning of the sentence.
             M-E     Move forward to the end of the sentence.
             M-K     Kill forward to the end of the sentence.
             M-[     Move back to previous paragraph beginning.
             M-]     Move forward to next paragraph end.
             M-H     Put  point and mark around this paragraph (around
                     the following one, if between paragraphs).
             C-X Rubout
                     Kill back to the beginning of the sentence.  


     11.2.1 Sentencesî     11.2.1 Sentencesî     11.2.1 Sentences


       The commands  Meta-A  and  Meta-E  (^R  Backward  Sentence  and
     ^R Forward Sentence) move to the beginning and end of the current
     sentence,  respectively.   They were chosen to resemble Control-A
     and Control-E, which move to the beginning and  end  of  a  line.
     Unlike  them,  Meta-A  and  Meta-E  if  repeated or given numeric
     arguments move over successive  sentences.    EMACS  considers  a
     sentence  to  end wherever there is a ".", "?" or "!" followed by
     the end of a line or two spaces, with any number of ")"'s, "]"'s,
     "'"'s, or '"' 's allowed in between.  Neither M-A nor  M-E  moves
     past the CRLF or spaces which delimit the sentence.

       Just  as C-A and C-E have a kill command, C-K, to go with them,
     so M-A and M-E have a corresponding kill  command  M-K  (^R  Kill
     Sentence)  which  kills  from  point  to the end of the sentence.
     With minus one as an argument it kills back to the  beginning  of
     the sentence.  Larger arguments serve as a repeat count.

       There  is  a  special  command,  C-X  Rubout  (^R Backward Kill
     Sentence) for killing  back  to  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,
     because this is useful when you change your mind in the middle of
     composing text.î     53                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     11.2.2 Paragraphsî     11.2.2 Paragraphsî     11.2.2 Paragraphs


       Meta-[  (^R  Backward  Paragraph) moves to the beginning of the
     current  or  previous  paragraph,  while   Meta-]   (^R   Forward
     Paragraph)  moves  to  the  end of the current or next paragraph.
     Blank lines and text justifier command lines separate  paragraphs
     and are not part of any paragraph.  Also, an indented line starts
     a new paragraph.

       In  major  modes  for  programs  (as  opposed  to  Text  mode),
     paragraphs are determined only by blank lines.   This  makes  the
     paragraph commands continue to be useful even though there are no
     paragraphs per se.

       When  there  is a fill prefix, then paragraphs are delimited by
     all  lines  which  don't  start  with  the  fill  prefix.     See
     section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

       When  you  wish  to  operate  on  a  paragraph, you can use the
     command Meta-H (^R Mark Paragraph) to set the region  around  it.
     This  command  puts point at the beginning and mark at the end of
     the paragraph point was in.  Before setting the new mark  at  the
     end,  a mark is set at the old location of point; this allows you
     to undo a mistaken Meta-H with  two  C-U  C-@'s.    If  point  is
     between  paragraphs  (in a run of blank lines, or at a boundary),
     the paragraph following point is surrounded by  point  and  mark.
     Thus, for example, Meta-H C-W kills the paragraph around or after
     point.

       One way to make an "invisible" paragraph boundary that does not
     show  if  the  file  is  printed is to put space-backspace at the
     front of a line.  The space makes the line appear (to  the  EMACS
     paragraph  commands)  to be indented, which usually means that it
     starts a paragraph.

       The variable Paragraph Delimiter should be a TECO search string
     (See section 19.3 [TECO search strings], page 101.)  composed  of
                                                              ^î     various  characters  or character sequences separated by |O's.  A
     line whose beginning matches the  search  string  is  either  the
     beginning of a paragraph or a text justifier command line part of
     no  paragraph.  If the line begins with period, singlequote, "-",
     "\" or "@", it can be a text justifier command  line;  otherwise,
     it  can  be the beginning of a paragraph; but it cannot be either
     one unless Paragraph Delimiter is set up to recognize it.   Thus,
       ^î     ".|O  "  as  the  Paragraph  Delimiter  string  means  that lines
     starting  with  spaces  start  paragraphs,  lines  starting  with
     periods are text justifier commands, and all other nonblank lines
     are nothing special.î     54                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     11.3 Indentation Commands for Textî     11.3 Indentation Commands for Textî     11.3 Indentation Commands for Text


             Tab         Indents  "appropriately"  in a mode-dependent
                         fashion.
             M-Tab       Inserts a tab character.
             Linefeed    Is the same as Return followed by Tab.
             M-^         Undoes a Linefeed.  Merges two lines.
             M-M         Moves to the line's first nonblank character.
             M-I         Indent to tab stop.  In Text mode,  Tab  does
                         this also.
             C-M-\       Indent several lines to same column.
             C-X Tab     Shift block of lines rigidly right or left.  


       The  way  to  request indentation is with the Tab command.  Its
     precise effect depends on the major  mode.    In  Text  mode,  it
     indents  to  the  next  tab stop.  You can set the tab stops with
     Edit Tab Stops (see below).  If you just want  to  insert  a  tab
     character in the buffer, you can use M-Tab or C-Q Tab.

       For  English  text,  usually only the first line of a paragraph
     should be indented.  So, in Text mode, new lines created by  Auto
     Fill  mode  are not indented.  Text mode tells Auto Fill mode not
     to indent new lines by setting the variable Space Indent Flag  to
     zero.

       But  sometimes you want to have an indented paragraph.  In such
     cases, use M-X Edit Indented Text,  which  enters  a  submode  in
     which Tab and Auto Fill indent each line under the previous line,
     and  only blank lines delimit paragraphs.  Alternatively, you can
     specify a fill prefix (see below).

       To undo a line-break, whether done manually or  by  Auto  Fill,
     use  the  Meta-^  (^R  Delete  Indentation) command to delete the
     indentation at the front  of  the  current  line,  and  the  line
     boundary  as well.  They are replaced by a single space, or by no
     space if before a ")" or after a "(", or at the  beginning  of  a
     line.    To  delete  just  the  indentation  of a line, go to the
     beginning of the  line  and  use  Meta-\  (^R  Delete  Horizontal
     Space), which deletes all spaces and tabs around the cursor.

       To  insert  an  indented  line before the current line, do C-A,
     C-O, and then Tab.  To make an indented line  after  the  current
     line, use C-E Linefeed.

       To  move  over  the  indentation  on a line, do Meta-M or C-M-M
     (^R Back to Indentation).  These commands, given  anywhere  on  a
     line,  position the cursor at the first nonblank character on the
     line.î     55                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       There are also commands for changing the indentation of several
     lines at once.  Control-Meta-\ (^R Indent Region) gives each line
     which  begins  in  the region the "usual" indentation by invoking
     Tab at the beginning of the line.  A numeric  argument  specifies
     the  indentation,  and each line is shifted left or right so that
     it has exactly that much.  C-X Tab (^R Indent Rigidly) moves  all
     of  the  lines  in  the  region  right by its argument (left, for
     negative arguments).  The  whole  group  of  lines  move  rigidly
     sideways, which is how the command gets its name.


     11.3.1 Tab Stopsî     11.3.1 Tab Stopsî     11.3.1 Tab Stops


       For  typing  in  tables,  you can use Text mode's definition of
     Tab, ^R Tab to Tab Stop, which may be given anywhere in  a  line,
     and  indents  from there to the next tab stop.  If you are not in
     Text mode, this function can be found on M-I anyway.

       Set the tab stops using Edit Tab Stops,  which  allows  you  to
     edit  some  text  which  defines  the tab stops.  Here is what it
     would look like for ordinary tab stops every eight columns.


                 :       :       :       :       :       :

          123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 1234
         0        10        20        30        40        50


       The first line contains a colon or period  at  each  tab  stop.
     Colon  indicates  an ordinary tab, which fills with whitespace; a
     period specifies that characters be copied from the corresponding
     columns of the second line below it.  Thus,  you  can  tab  to  a
     column  automatically  inserting  dashes  or periods, etc.  It is
     your responsibility to put in the second  line  the  text  to  be
     copied.  In the example above there are no periods, so the second
     line is not used, and is left blank.

       The  third  and  fourth lines you see contain column numbers to
     help you edit.  They are only there while you are editing the tab
     stops; they are not really part of the tab settings.   The  first
     two  lines  reside in the variable Tab Stop Definitions when they
     are not being edited.  If the second line is not needed, Tab Stop
     Definitions can be just one line, with no CRLFs.  This  makes  it
     easier  to  set  the  variable  in  a  local  modes  list.    See
     section 22.7 [Locals], page 150.

       EMACS normally uses both tabs and spaces to indent  lines,  andî     56                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     displays  tab  characters  using eight-character tab stops.  (How
     the ASCII character tab is displayed has nothing to do  with  the
     definition  of  the  Tab character as a command).  If you prefer,
     all indentation can be made from spaces only.  To  request  this,
     turn  off Indent Tabs mode with the command M-X Indent Tabs Mode.
     To display tabs with different tab stops, set the  TECO  flag  FS
     TAB  WIDTH$  to  the  desired  interval.    This  is  useful  for
     displaying files  brought  from  other  operating  systems  whose
     normal  tab  stop spacing is not 8.  See section 22.5 [FS Flags],
     page 142.

       To convert all tabs in a  file  to  spaces,  you  can  use  M-X
     Untabify.    M-X  Tabify  performs  the  opposite transformation,
     replacing spaces with tabs whenever possible, but only  if  there
     are  at  least  three  of  them  so  as  not  to  obscure ends of
     sentences.  A numeric argument to Tabify  or  Untabify  specifies
     the interval between tab stops to use for computing how to change
     the  file.  By default, they use the same interval being used for
     display.  The visual appearance  of  the  text  should  never  be
     changed by Tabify or Untabify without a numeric argument.



     11.4 Text Fillingî     11.4 Text Fillingî     11.4 Text Filling


             Space   in Auto Fill mode, breaks lines when appropriate.
             M-Q     Fill paragraph.
             M-G     Fill  region  (G  is  for  Grind, by analogy with
                     Lisp).
             M-S     Center a line.
             C-X =   Show current cursor position.  


                                                    ______î       Auto Fill mode lets you type in text that is filled (broken  up
     into  lines  that  fit  in  a specified width) as you go.  If you
     alter existing text and thus cause it to  cease  to  be  properly
     filled, EMACS can fill it again if you ask.

       Entering  Auto Fill mode is done with M-X Auto Fill.  From then
     on, lines are broken automatically at spaces when they get longer
     than the desired width.  New  lines  created  by  Auto  Fill  are
     usually  indented,  but in Text mode they are not.  To leave Auto
     Fill mode, execute M-X Auto Fill again.  When Auto Fill  mode  is
     in effect, the word "Fill" appears in the mode line.

       When  you  finish  a  paragraph,  you  can  type  Space with an
     argument of zero.  This doesn't insert any spaces,  but  it  does
     move  the  last word of the paragraph to a new line if it doesn'tî     57                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     fit in the old line.  Return also moves the last word, but it may
     create another blank line.

       If  you  edit  the  middle  of a paragraph, it may no longer be
     correctly filled.  To refill a paragraph, use the command  Meta-Q
     (^R  Fill  Paragraph).    It  causes  the paragraph that point is
     inside, or the one after point if point is between paragraphs, to
     be refilled.  All the line-breaks are removed, and then new  ones
     are  inserted  where  necessary.  M-Q can be undone with M-X Undo
     (See section 24.3 [Undo], page 163.).

       If you are not happy with Meta-Q's  idea  of  where  paragraphs
     start   and  end  (the  same  as  Meta-H's.    See  section  11.2
     [Paragraphs], page 52.), you can  use  Meta-G  (^R  Fill  Region)
     which  refills  everything between point and mark.  Sometimes, it
     is ok to fill a region of several paragraphs  at  once.    Meta-G
     recognizes  a  blank  line  or  an  indented  line  as starting a
     paragraph and does not fill it in with the preceding line.    The
     sequence  space-backspace at the front of a line prevents it from
     being filled into the preceding line but is  invisible  when  the
     file  is  printed.    However,  the  full  sophistication  of the
     paragraph commands in recognizing  paragraph  boundaries  is  not
     available.    The  purpose  of  M-G  is  to allow you to override
     EMACS's usual criteria for paragraph  boundaries.    M-G  can  be
     undone with M-X Undo.

       Giving  an  argument  to  M-G  or  M-Q  causes  the  text to be
     _________î     justified as well as filled.  This means that  extra  spaces  are
     inserted  between  the  words so as to make the right margin come
     out exactly even.  I do not recommend doing  this.    If  someone
     else  has  uglified some text by justifying it, you can unjustify
     it (remove the spaces) with M-G or M-Q without an argument.

       The command Meta-S (^R Center Line) centers a line  within  the
     current  line  width.  With an argument, it centers several lines
     individually and moves past them.

       The maximum line width for filling  is  in  the  variable  Fill
     Column.    Both  M-Q and Auto Fill make sure that no line exceeds
     this width.  The easiest way to set the variable is  to  use  the
     command  C-X  F  (^R Set Fill Column), which places the margin at
     the column point is on, or at the column specified by  a  numeric
     argument.  The fill column is initially column 70.

       To  fill  a  paragraph in which each line starts with a special
     marker  (which  might  be  a  few  spaces,  giving  an   indented
                            ____ ______î     paragraph),  use  the  fill prefix feature.  Move point to a spot
     right after the special marker and give the  command  C-X  Period
     (^R  Set  Fill  Prefix).  Then, filling the paragraph will removeî     58                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     the  marker from each line beforehand, and put the marker back in
     on each line afterward.  Auto Fill when there is  a  fill  prefix
     inserts the fill prefix at the front of each new line.  Also, any
     line  which  does not start with the fill prefix is considered to
     start a paragraph.  To turn off the fill prefix,  do  C-X  Period
     with  point  at  the front of a line.  The fill prefix is kept in
     the variable Fill Prefix.

       The command C-X = (What Cursor Position) can be  used  to  find
     out  the  column  that  the cursor is in, and other miscellaneous
     information about point which is quick to compute.  It  prints  a
     line in the echo area that looks like this:  


         X=5 Y=7 CH=101 .=3874(35% of 11014) H=<3051,4640>


     In this line, the X value is the column the cursor is in (zero at
     the  left),  the Y value is the screen line that the cursor is in
     (zero at the top), the  CH  value  is  the  octal  value  of  the
     character  after  point  (101  is  "A"), the "point" value is the
     number of characters in the buffer before point, and  the  values
     in  parentheses are the percentage of the buffer before point and
     the total size of the buffer.

       The H values are the virtual buffer boundaries, indicate  which
     part of the buffer is still visible when narrowing has been done.
     If  you  have  not done narrowing, the H values are omitted.  For
     more  information  about  the  virtual  buffer  boundaries,   See
     section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.



     11.5 Case Conversion Commandsî     11.5 Case Conversion Commandsî     11.5 Case Conversion Commands


       EMACS  has  commands for converting either a single word or any
     arbitrary range of text to upper case or to lower case.


             M-L         Convert following word to lower case.
             M-U         Convert following word to upper case.
             M-C         Capitalize the following word.
             C-X C-L     Convert region to lower case.
             C-X C-U     Convert region to upper case.  


       The word conversion commands  are  the  most  useful.    Meta-L
     (^R  Lowercase Word) converts the word after point to lower case,î     59                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     moving  past  it.    Thus, successive Meta-L's convert successive
     words.  Meta-U (^R  Uppercase  Word)  converts  to  all  capitals
     instead,  while  Meta-C  (^R  Uppercase  Initial)  puts the first
     letter of the word into upper case and the rest into lower  case.
     All  these  commands  convert  several  words at once if given an
     argument.  They are especially convenient for converting a  large
     amount of text from all upper case to mixed case, because you can
     move  through  the  text  using  M-L,  M-U or M-C on each word as
     appropriate.

       When given  a  negative  argument,  the  word  case  conversion
     commands  apply  to the appropriate number of words before point,
     but do not move point.  This is convenient  when  you  have  just
     typed a word in the wrong case.  You can give the case conversion
     command and continue typing.

       If  a  word case conversion command is given in the middle of a
     word, it applies only to the part of the word which  follows  the
     cursor, treating it as a whole word.

       The  other  case  conversion commands are C-X C-U (^R Uppercase
     Region)  and  C-X  C-L  (^R  Lowercase  Region),  which   convert
     everything  between  point and mark to the specified case.  Point
     and mark do not move.  These commands ask for confirmation if the
     region contains more than Region Query Size characters; they also
     save the original contents of the region so  you  can  undo  them
     (See section 24.3 [Undo], page 163.).



     11.6 Font-Changingî     11.6 Font-Changingî     11.6 Font-Changing


       EMACS  has  commands to insert and move font change commands as
     understood by the TJ6, R and  BOLIO  text  justifiers.    A  font
                                          ^î     change  is assumed to be of the form |F<digit> meaning select the
                        ^î     specified font, or |F* meaning  select  the  previously  selected
     font.


             M-#         Change previous word's font, or next word's.
             C-X #       Change font of region.  


       M-#  (^R Change Font Word) is a command to change the font of a
     word.  Its action is rather complicated to describe, but that  is
     because it tries to be as versatile and convenient as possible in
     practice.î     60                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       If you type M-# with an argument, the previous word is put into
     the  font specified by the argument.  Point is not changed.  This
     means that, if you want to insert a word and put it in a specific
     font, you can type the word, then use M-# to change its font, and
                                                             ^î     then go on inserting.  The font is changed by putting a |F<digit>
                           ^î     before the word and a |F* after.

       If you type M-# with no argument, it takes the last font change
               ^            ^î     (either a |F<digit> or |F*, whichever is later) and moves it  one
     word  forward.  What this implies is that you can change the font
     of several consecutive words incrementally by  moving  after  the
     first word, issuing M-# with an argument to set that word's font,
     and  then  typing  M-# to extend the font change past more words.
     Each M-# advances past one more word.

       M-# with a negative argument is the opposite  of  M-#  with  no
                                                ____î     argument;  it  moves  the last font change back one word.  If you
     type too many M-#'s, you can undo them this way.  If you move one
     font change past another, one or both are eliminated, so as to do
     the right thing.  As a result, M-Minus M-# will undo a  M-#  with
     an argument.  Try it!

       You can also change the font of a whole region by putting point
     and the mark around it and issuing C-X # (^R Change Font Region),
     with the font number as argument.  C-X # with a negative argument
     removes all font changes inside or adjacent to the region.



     11.7 Underliningî     11.7 Underliningî     11.7 Underlining


       EMACS   has   two   commands  for  manipulating  text-justifier
     underlining command characters.  These commands  do  not  produce
     any  sort of overprinting in the text file itself; they insert or
     move command characters which direct text justifiers  to  produce
     underlining.    By default, commands for the text justifier R are
     used.


             M-_         Underline previous word or next word.
             C-X _       Underline region.  


       M-_ is somewhat like M-# in that it either creates an underline
     around the previous word  or  extends  it  past  the  next  word.
     However,  where  a  font  change requires that you specify a font
     number, an underline is just an underline and  has  no  parameter
     for  you  to  specify.    Also,  it  is  assumed  that  the  textî     61                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     justifier's  commands  for  starting  and  ending  underlines are
     distinguishable, whereas  you  can't  tell  from  a  font  change
     whether  it  is  "starting" something or "ending" something.  M-_
     differs slightly from M-# as a result.

       M-_ with no argument creates an underline around  the  previous
     word  if  there  is  none.  If there is an underline there, it is
     extended one word forward.  Thus, you can  insert  an  underlined
     word  by  typing  the  word and then a M-_.  Or you can underline
     several existing words by moving past  the  first  of  them,  and
     typing one M-_ for each word.

                                                                    __î       M-_  given  in  the  vicinity  of  an  underline-begin moves it
     forward.  Thus, it should  be  thought  of  as  applying  to  any
     boundary, where underlining either starts or stops, and moving it
     forward.    If  a begin underlining is moved past an end, or vice
     versa, they both disappear.

       Giving M-_ an argument merely tells  it  to  apply  to  several
     words  at once instead of one.  M-_ with a positive argument of n
     underlines the next n words, either creating an  underlined  area
     or  extending  an  existing  one.  With a negative argument, that
     many previous words are underlined.  Thus, M-_ can do more things
     with underlines than M-# can do with font changes, because of the
     facts that you don't need to use the argument to say which  font,
     and you can tell a beginning from an end.

       For  larger  scale  operations,  you  can  use  C-X  _ to place
     underlines from point to mark, or C-X _ with a negative  argument
     to remove all underlining between point and mark.

                    ^                                    ^î       By  default, |B is used to begin an underline and |E is used to
     end one.  The variables Underline Begin and Underline End may  be
     created  and  set  to  strings  to  use  instead.    For a single
     character you can use the numeric ASCII code for it.



     11.8 SCRIBE Modeî     11.8 SCRIBE Modeî     11.8 SCRIBE Mode


       SCRIBE  mode  provides  many  special  editing   commands   for
     manipulating   the   commands  for  the  text  justifier  SCRIBE.
     Instances  of  SCRIBE  commands  are  referred  to  in  EMACS  as
     ____________î     environments,  though  strictly  speaking  it is the command name
     which is the environment, and not all commands either.


             C-M-N       Move forward over SCRIBE environment.î     62                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



             C-M-P       Move backward over SCRIBE environment.
             C-M-U       Move  up  to  beginning  of containing SCRIBE
                         environment.
             C-M-D       Move forward  and  down  inside  next  SCRIBE
                         environment.
             C-M-E       Move   up   to   end   of  containing  SCRIBE
                         environment.
             C-M-H       Put point and mark around  containing  SCRIBE
                         environment.
             C-M-G       Change name of containing SCRIBE environment.
             C-M-Q       Change form of containing SCRIBE environment.


       In  SCRIBE  mode  the  standard  expression  motion and killing
     commands C-M-F, C-M-B, C-M-K and C-M-Rubout operate on  units  of
     balanced  SCRIBE  delimiters.    Additional  commands specific to
     SCRIBE mode move around the  structure  of  SCRIBE  environments.
     C-M-N  (^R  Forward  Environment)  moves  forward  over an entire
     SCRIBE expression (@,  environment  name  and  arguments),  C-M-P
     (^R  Backward  Environment)  moves  back,  C-M-U  (^R Backward Up
     Environment) moves up, and  C-M-D  (^R  Down  Environment)  moves
     down.    C-M-E (^R End of Environment) moves up to the end of the
     containing SCRIBE environment.  C-M-H (^R Mark Environment)  puts
     point and mark around the containing SCRIBE environment.

       Speaking  of  balanced  delimiters,  SCRIBE  mode does not work
     properly when the characters ' and ` are used as  delimiters  for
     arguments.   This is because the parser expects each character to
     be either a parenthesis (which matches a different character)  or
     a   string   quote   (which  matches  itself),  not  both.    See
     section 22.4 [Syntax Table], page 139.  SCRIBE mode  simply  does
     not treat these characters as possible delimiters, and it is best
     not  to  use  them.    It  is  just as well, since if SCRIBE mode
     actually tried to handle these delimiters it would be confused by
     apostrophes in the text.

       Other commands transform SCRIBE environments.  C-M-G (^R Change
     Environment Name) changes the name of the SCRIBE environment that
     point is inside.  For example, if point is  somewhere  inside  an
     @I[...]  environment,  C-M-G could be used to change the @I to an
     @U.  C-M-G reads the new environment name from the  terminal  and
     replaces the old environment name with it.

       C-M-Q   (^R   Change   Form)   changes  the  containing  SCRIBE
     environment between the brief form such as @Example[...] and  the
     longer  form @Begin(Example)...@End(Example).  If the environment
     has the brief form, it is changed to the longer  form,  and  vice
     versa.î     63                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       In  SCRIBE  mode, paragraphs are redefined to understand SCRIBE
     commands in a way that is usually right.  Any line that  consists
     entirely    of    one    SCRIBE    command    is   considered   a
     paragraph-separating line, just like a blank line.  This does the
     right thing for @Begin and @End, and for many other cases.  So is
     any line that starts with an @; or @' command.   The  @;  and  @'
     commands  are  supposed  to be no-ops at the beginning of a line,
     and can therefore be used to mark lines  that  you  think  should
     separate  paragraphs.   Which one works, and when, depends on the
     version of SCRIBE.  Eventually, @; will always work.

       Aside from the above cases, SCRIBE commands are considered part
     of the text, so an @I command which happens  to  end  up  at  the
     front  of  a  line  will  not  separate  paragraphs.  SCRIBE mode
     accomplishes this by redefining M-[ and the function ^R  Backward
     Paragraph to be the function ^R Backward SCRIBE Paragraph.  Lines
     starting  with page delimiters are paragraph delimiters as usual,
     and lines starting with space or tab start paragraphs as usual.

       The comment commands know that comments in SCRIBE  files  start
     with  "@Comment{" and end with "}".  See section 20.5 [Comments],
     page 107.

       You can use the M-X Compile command  to  invoke  SCRIBE.    See
     section  20.2  [Compile],  page  103.    It  operates on the file
     currently visited.  You can use  a  string  argument  to  specify
     switches.    After SCRIBE is finished, you must type $P to resume
     EMACS.  Then, if there were any errors, EMACS splits  the  screen
     and  displays  the  errors in the bottom window.  The command M-X
     Next Scribe Error moves to the point in the  file  at  which  the
     next  error  occurred.    Currently the only ITS machine on which
     SCRIBE is installed is MC.

       The functions listed  in  this  section  live  in  the  library
     SCRIBE, which is loaded automatically if you enter SCRIBE mode.



     11.9 Dissociated Pressî     11.9 Dissociated Pressî     11.9 Dissociated Press


       M-X  Dissociated  Press  is  a command for scrambling a file of
     text either word by word or character  by  character.    Starting
     from  a  bufferfull  of  straight  English, it produces extremely
     amusing output.  Dissociated  Press  prints  its  output  on  the
     terminal.  It does not change the contents of the buffer.

       Dissociated  Press operates by jumping at random from one point
     in the buffer to another.  In order to produce  plausible  outputî     64                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     rather  than gibberish, it insists on a certain amount of overlap
     between the end of one run of consecutive words or characters and
     the start of the next.  That is,  if  it  has  just  printed  out
     "president"  and then decides to jump to a different point in the
     file, it might spot the "ent" in  "pentagon"  and  continue  from
     there,  producing "presidentagon".  Long sample texts produce the
     best results.

       A negative argument  to  M-X  Dissociated  Press  tells  it  to
     operate  character  by  character,  and  specifies  the number of
     overlap characters.  A positive argument tells it to operate word
     by word and specifies the number of overlap words.  In this mode,
     whole words are treated as the elements to  be  permuted,  rather
     than  characters.    No  argument is equivalent to an argument of
     two.  For your againformation, the output is only printed on  the
     terminal.  The file you start with is not changed.

       Dissociated  Press produces nearly the same results as a Markov
     chain based on a frequency  table  constructed  from  the  sample
     text.    It  is,  however, an independent, ignoriginal invention.
     Dissociated  Press  techniquitously  copies  several  consecutive
     characters  from  the  sample  between  random choices, whereas a
     Markov chain would choose randomly for each  word  or  character.
     This makes for more plausible sounding results.

       It  is a mustatement that too much use of Dissociated Press can
     be a developediment to your real work.  Sometimes to the point of
     outragedy.  And keep dissociwords out of your  documentation,  if
     you want it to be well userenced and properbose.  Have fun.  Your
     buggestions are welcome.î     65                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              CHAPTER TWELVEî                              CHAPTER TWELVEî                              CHAPTER TWELVE
                         COMMANDS FOR FIXING TYPOSî                         COMMANDS FOR FIXING TYPOSî                         COMMANDS FOR FIXING TYPOS



       In  this  section  we describe the commands that are especially
     useful for the times when you catch a mistake in your  text  just
     after  you have made it, or change your mind while composing text
     on line.


             Rubout          Delete last character.
             M-Rubout        Kill last word.
             C-X Rubout      Kill to beginning of sentence.
             C-T             Transpose two characters.
             C-X C-T         Transpose two lines.
             C-X T           Transpose two arbitrary regions.
             M-Minus M-L     Convert last word to lower case.
             M-Minus M-U     Convert last word to all upper case.
             M-Minus M-C     Convert last  word  to  lower  case  with
                             capital initial.
             M-'             Fix up omitted shift key on digit.
             M-$             (Meta-Dollar   Sign)  Check  and  correct
                             spelling of word.
             Correct Spelling
                             Check  and  correct  spelling  of  entire
                             buffer.  



     12.1 Killing Your Mistakesî     12.1 Killing Your Mistakesî     12.1 Killing Your Mistakes


       The  Rubout  command  is the most important correction command.
     When used among printing (self-inserting) characters, it  can  be
     thought of as canceling the last character typed.

       When  your  mistake  is  longer than a couple of characters, it
     might be more convenient to use M-Rubout or C-X Rubout.  M-Rubout
     kills back to the start of the last word, and  C-X  Rubout  kills
     back  to  the  start  of  the  last  sentence.    C-X  Rubout  is
     particularly useful when you are thinking of what to write as you
     type it, in case you change your mind about phrasing.    M-Rubout
     and  C-X  Rubout save the killed text for C-Y and M-Y to retrieve
     (See section 9.2 [Un-killing], page 41.).

       M-Rubout is often useful even when you have typed  only  a  few
     characters wrong, if you know you are confused in your typing and
     aren't  sure  exactly what you typed.  At such a time, you cannotî     66                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     correct  with  Rubout except by looking at the screen to see what
     you did.  It requires less thought to kill  the  whole  word  and
     start over again, especially if the system is heavily loaded.



     12.2 Transpositionî     12.2 Transpositionî     12.2 Transposition


       The  common  error  of transposing two characters can be fixed,
     when they are adjacent, with the  C-T  command.    Normally,  C-T
     transposes the two characters on either side of the cursor.  When
     given  at  the  end  of  a line, rather than transposing the last
     character of the line with the line  separator,  which  would  be
     useless, C-T transposes the last two characters on the line.  So,
     if  you catch your transposition error right away, you can fix it
     with just a C-T.  If you don't catch it so fast,  you  must  move
     the cursor back to between the two transposed characters.  If you
     transposed a space with the last character of the word before it,
     the  word  motion  commands  are  a  good  way  of getting there.
     Otherwise, a reverse search (C-R) is often the  best  way.    See
     section 10 [Search], page 46.

       To  transpose  two lines, use the C-X C-T command (^R Transpose
     Lines).  M-T transposes words and C-M-T transposes s-expressions.

       A more  general  transpose  command  is  C-X  T  (^R  Transpose
     Regions).    This  transposes two arbitrary blocks of text, which
     need not even be next to each other.  To use it, set the mark  at
     one end of one block, then at the other end of the block; then go
     to  the other block and set the mark at one end, and put point at
     the other.  In other words, point and the last three marks should
     be at the four locations which are the ends of  the  two  blocks.
     It  does  not  matter which of the four locations point is at, or
     which order the others were marked.  C-X  T  transposes  the  two
     blocks of text thus identified, and relocates point and the three
     marks without changing their order.



     12.3 Case Conversionî     12.3 Case Conversionî     12.3 Case Conversion


       A  very  common  error  is  to  type  words  in the wrong case.
     Because of this, the word case-conversion commands M-L,  M-U  and
     M-C  have  a  special feature when used with a negative argument:
     they do not move the cursor.    As  soon  as  you  see  you  have
     mistyped  the last word, you can simply case-convert it and go on
     typing.  See section 11.5 [Case], page 58.î     67                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Another  common  error  is to type a special character and miss
     the shift key, producing a digit instead.   There  is  a  special
     command  for  fixing this: M-' (^R Upcase Digit), which fixes the
     last digit before point in this  way  (but  only  if  that  digit
     appears  on the current line or the previous line.  Otherwise, to
     minimize random effects of accidental  use,  M-'  does  nothing).
     Once again, the cursor does not move, so you can use M-' when you
     notice  the  error  and immediately continue typing.  Because M-'
     needs to know the arrangement of your keyboard,  the  first  time
     you  use  it you must supply the information by typing the row of
                                 _______ ____ ___  _____  ___î     digits 1, 2, ... , 9, 0 but holding down the  shift  key.    This
     tells   M-'   the   correspondence  between  digits  and  special
     characters, which is remembered for the duration of the EMACS  in
     the  variable  Digit  Shift  Table.    This command is called M-'
     because its main use is to replace "7" with a single-quote.



     12.4 Checking and Correcting Spellingî     12.4 Checking and Correcting Spellingî     12.4 Checking and Correcting Spelling


       When you write a paper, you should correct its spelling at some
     point close to finishing it (and maybe  earlier  as  well).    To
     correct the entire buffer, do M-X Correct Spelling.  This invokes
     the  SPELL spelling corrector program, which will ask you what to
     do with each misspelled word.  Refer to its documentation.   When
     it finished, you will be back in EMACS.

       To  check the spelling of the word before point, and optionally
     correct it  as  well,  use  the  command  M-$  (^R  Correct  Word
     Spelling).   This is a Dollar sign, not an Altmode!  This command
     sends the word to the SPELL program for correction.

       If SPELL  recognizes  the  word  as  a  correctly  spelled  one
     (although not necessarily the one you meant!) you will see "Found
     it"  or  "Found  it  because of" followed by the word without its
     suffix.  If the program cannot at all recognize the word, it will
     print "Couldn't find it."

       If SPELL recognizes the word as a misspelling, it  displays  on
     the  screen  the  other  words  which  are  possibilities for the
     correct spelling, and gives each one a number.    Then,  you  can
     type one of the following things:


             0 to 9      Replace  misspelled  word  with that spelling
                         (preserving case, just  like  Replace  String
                         and  Query  Replace,  unless  Case Replace is
                         zero).î     68                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



             Space       Exit and make no changes.
             %           Read a digit as above and Query Replace (M-%)
                         the  incorrect  spelling with the correct one
                         from the beginning of the buffer.


       No other responses are allowed.

       The cursor need not be immediately after the word you  want  to
     correct; it can be in the middle, or following any word-separator
     characters  after  the end of the word.  Note that the major mode
     you are using affects which characters are word-separators.   See
     section 22.4 [Syntax Table], page 139.

       The first time you use an EMACS spelling correction command, it
     creates a SPELL job for you.  From then on it uses the same SPELL
     job.   It's ok to kill the job if you don't think you'll be using
     M-$ again  during  that  session.    But  if  you  do  leave  the
     job  around  checking  words  will  much  quicker.   Giving M-$ a
     negative argument (as in M--  M-$)  kills  the  SPELL  job.    Of
     course, you can kill it from DDT also.

       If  you are a regular user of the SPELL program, you might have
     a dictionary file of words which you use but which are foreign to
     SPELL.  If there are words in this file which you might  want  to
     use M-$ to correct, you can specify that you want this dictionary
     to  be  loaded  into the spell job which EMACS uses.  To do this,
     set  the  variable  Spell  Initialization  to   the   string   of
     SPELL   program  commands  you  want  to  use.    For  loading  a
     dictionary, this string would  be  a  "Load  "  followed  by  the
     dictionary filename.  Other initialization commands for SPELL can
     appear there also.  The commands must be separated by altmodes.

       You  can  also  pass  arbitrary  commands to the SPELL job with
     command M-X Command to Spell.

       Because of the way the handling of other  jobs  from  EMACS  is
     implemented  on  ITS,  it  is not possible to use M-$ in an EMACS
     whose superior is not DDT.  This typically applies to EMACS  jobs
     running under LISP (LISPT) and under :MAIL (MAILT).î     69                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             CHAPTER THIRTEENî                             CHAPTER THIRTEENî                             CHAPTER THIRTEEN
                               FILE HANDLINGî                               FILE HANDLINGî                               FILE HANDLING



       The  basic unit of stored data is the file.  Each program, each
     paper, lives usually in its own file.    To  edit  a  program  or
     paper, the editor must be told the name of the file that contains
                           ________î     it.    This is called visiting the file.  To make your changes to
                                          ____î     the file permanent on disk, you must save the file.   EMACS  also
     has  facilities  for deleting files conveniently, and for listing
     your file directory.  Special text in  a  file  can  specify  the
     modes to be used when editing the file.



     13.1 Visiting Filesî     13.1 Visiting Filesî     13.1 Visiting Files


             C-X C-V     Visit a file.
             C-X C-Q     Change regular visiting to read only, or vice
                         versa.
             C-X C-S     Save the visited file.
             Meta-~      Tell EMACS to forget that the buffer has been
                         changed.  


       ________î       Visiting a file means copying its contents into EMACS where you
     can edit them.  EMACS remembers the name of the file you visited.
     Unless  you  use the multiple buffer or window features of EMACS,
     you can only be visiting one file at a time.   The  name  of  the
     file you are visiting in the currently selected buffer is visible
     in  the  mode  line  when  you  are at top level, followed by its
     version number if it has one in parentheses.

       The changes you make with EMACS  are  made  in  a  copy  inside
     EMACS.   The file itself is not changed.  The changed text is not
                         ____î     permanent until you save it in a file.  The first time you change
     the text, a star appears at  the  end  of  the  mode  line;  this
     indicates that the text contains fresh changes which will be lost
     unless you save them.

       To  visit  a  file,  use  the  command C-X C-V (^R Visit File).
     Follow the command with the name of the file you wish  to  visit,
     terminated  by  a  Return.  If you can see a filename in the mode
     line, then that name is the default, and  any  component  of  the
     filename  which  you  don't  specify  is taken from it.  If EMACS
     thinks you can't see the  defaults,  they  are  included  in  the
     prompt.    You  can  abort the command by typing C-G, or edit theî     70                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     filename  with  Rubout or C-U.  If you do type a Return to finish
     the command, the new file's text appears on the screen,  and  its
     name and version appear in the mode line.

       When you wish to save the file and make your changes permanent,
     type C-X C-S (^R Save File).  After the save is finished, C-X C-S
     prints  "Written:  <filenames>" in the echo area at the bottom of
     the screen.  If there are no changes to save (no star at the  end
     of  the  mode line), the file is not saved; it would be redundant
     to save a duplicate of the previous version.

       Because a system crash can cause you  to  lose  everything  you
     have  done  since the last save, we provide Auto Save mode, which
     saves  the  files  you  are   visiting   at   regular   intervals
     automatically.      See   section  13.3  [Auto  Save],  page  72.
     Alternatively, you can use  journal  files.    See  section  24.4
     [Journals], page 164.

       What  if  you  want  to  create  a file?  Just visit it.  EMACS
     prints "(New File)" but aside from that behaves  as  if  you  had
     visited an existing empty file.  If you make any changes and save
     them,  the  file  is  created.    If you visit a nonexistent file
     unintentionally (because you typed the wrong file name), go ahead
     and visit the file you meant.  If you  don't  save  the  unwanted
     file, it is not created.

       If   you   visit   a   file  which  is  a  link,  EMACS  prints
     "(Link to <filenames>)" to inform you of this.  When you  read  a
     file  which  is  a link, you get the contents of the target file,
     but if you save under the name of the link, you replace the  link
     and the target does not change.  If you would prefer to alter the
     target  file, use Set Visited Filename to change the visited name
     to the target file's name.    See  section  13.7  [Advanced  File
     Commands], page 79.

       If  you  alter  one  file  and  then  visit another in the same
     buffer, EMACS offers to save the old one.  If you answer  Y,  the
     old file is saved; if you answer N, all the changes you have made
     to  it  since  the last save are lost.  You should not type ahead
     after a file visiting  command,  because  your  type-ahead  might
     answer  an  unexpected  question  in a way that you would regret.
     The variable Visit File Save Old controls this  offer;  normally,
     it  is  one,  which means that the offer is made.  If it is minus
     one, then the old file is always saved when you visit a  new  one
     in the same buffer; no question is asked.  If it is zero, the old
     file is never saved.

                                                   _________î       A  nonzero  argument  to  C-X C-V specifies read-only visiting.
     This means that EMACS prevents you from modifying the file unlessî     71                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     you  insist.   You should use this when you visit a file that you
     do no want to change, just to avoid changing it accidentally.  If
     you give C-X C-V a positive argument, then the file is read-only.
     This means you can change the  text  in  the  buffer,  but  EMACS
     requires  extra  confirmation  if  you  ask to save the file, and
     never offers to save  it.    If  you  give  C-X  C-V  a  negative
     argument, then the buffer itself is read-only; commands to change
     the  text  are  not  allowed.    If  the  visited file is visited
     read-only, in either fashion, then the characters "(R-O)"  appear
     in the mode line after the filename.  The command C-X C-Q (^R Set
     File  Read-Only)  is  used to switch between read-only and normal
     visiting.  Its numeric argument  means  the  same  thing  as  the
     argument  to  C-X  C-V:  zero means changes are allowed, positive
     makes the file read-only, and  negative  makes  the  text  itself
     read-only.

       Sometimes  you  will  change a buffer by accident.  Even if you
     undo the change by hand, EMACS still knows that "the  buffer  has
     been  changed".    You  can tell EMACS to believe that there have
     been no changes with the Meta-~ (^R Buffer Not Modified) command.
     This command simply clears the "modified" flag  which  says  that
     the  buffer contains changes which need to be saved.  Even if the
     buffer really is changed EMACS will still act as if it were  not.
     If we take "~" to mean "not", then Meta-~ is "not" metafied.

       If EMACS is about to do an unrequested save, and discovers that
     the text is now a lot shorter than it used to be, it tells you so
     and  asks  for confirmation (Y or N).  If you aren't sure what to
     answer (because you are surprised that it has shrunk),  type  C-G
     to abort everything, and take a look around.

       If  EMACS is about to save a file and sees that the date of the
     latest version on disk does not match what  EMACS  last  read  or
     wrote,  EMACS  notifies  you  of  this fact, and asks what to do,
     because this  probably  means  that  something  is  wrong.    For
     example,  someone  else  may have been editing the same file.  If
     this is so, there is a good chance that your  work  or  his  work
     will  be  lost  if  you  don't take the proper steps.  You should
     first find out exactly what is going on.  The C-X C-D command  to
     list the directory will help.  If you determine that someone else
     has  modified  the file, save your file under different names (or
     at least making a new version) and then SRCCOM the two  files  to
     merge  the two sets of changes.  Also get in touch with the other
     person so that he doesn't continue editing.î     72                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     13.2 How to Undo Drastic Changes to a Fileî     13.2 How to Undo Drastic Changes to a Fileî     13.2 How to Undo Drastic Changes to a File


       If  you  have  made extensive changes to a file and then change
     your mind about them, you can get rid of them by reading  in  the
     previous  version  of the file.  To do this, use M-X Revert File.
     If you have been using Auto Save  mode,  it  reads  in  the  last
     version of the visited file or the last auto save file, whichever
     is more recent.

       In  Auto  Save  mode, saving under special Auto Save filenames,
     then you can ask to revert to  the  last  "real"  save,  ignoring
     subsequent  auto  saves,  with  C-U  M-X Revert File.  If you are
     using the style  of  auto  saving  which  saves  under  the  real
     filenames, this is not possible.

       M-X  Revert File does not change point, so that if the file was
     only edited slightly, you will be at approximately the same piece
     of text after the Revert as before.  If  you  have  made  drastic
     changes,  the  same  value of point in the old file may address a
     totally different piece of text.

       Because M-X Revert File can be a disaster if done  by  mistake,
     it  asks  for  confirmation  (Y  or  N) before doing its work.  A
     pre-comma argument  can  be  used  to  inhibit  the  request  for
     confirmation  when  you call the function Revert File from a TECO
     program, as in 1,M(M.M Revert File$).



     13.3 Auto Save Mode: Protection Against Disastersî     13.3 Auto Save Mode: Protection Against Disastersî     13.3 Auto Save Mode: Protection Against Disasters


       In Auto Save mode, EMACS saves your  file  from  time  to  time
     (based on counting your commands) without being asked.  Your file
     is also saved if you stop typing for more than a few minutes when
     there  are  changes in the buffer.  This prevents you from losing
     more than a limited amount of  work  in  a  disaster.    (Another
     method  of  protection  is  the  journal  file.  See section 24.4
     [Journals], page 164.).

       You can turn auto saving on or off in an individual buffer with
     M-X Auto Save.  In addition, you can have auto saving by  default
     in  all  buffers  by  setting  the option Auto Save Default.  The
     frequency of saving, and the number of saved  versions  to  keep,
     can both be specified.

       Each  time  you  visit  a  file,  no matter how, auto saving is
     turned on for that file if Auto Save Default is  nonzero.    Onceî     73                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     you  have visited a file, you can turn auto saving on or off with
     M-X Auto Save.  Like other minor mode  commands,  M-X  Auto  Save
     turns  the  mode  on with a positive argument, off with a zero or
     negative argument; with no argument, it toggles.   If  you  start
     typing  a  new file into a buffer without visiting anything, Auto
     Save mode is initially off, but you can turn it on with M-X  Auto
     Save.

       When an auto save happens, "(Auto Save)" is printed in the echo
     area  (On  a  printing  terminal,  the bell is rung instead).  An
     error in the process of auto saving prints "(Auto Save Error!)".

       Let us suppose that it is time for  an  automatic  save  to  be
     done:  where should the file be saved?

       Two  workable methods have been developed:  save the file under
     the names you have visited, or save it under some  special  "auto
     save file name".  Each solution has its good and bad points.  The
     first one is excellent some of the time, but intolerable the rest
     of  the  time.    The  second is usually acceptable.  Auto saving
     under the visited file's actual names  means  that  you  need  do
     nothing  special  to  gobble the auto save file when you need it;
     and it means that there is no need to  worry  about  interference
     between  two  users  sharing  a directory, as long as they aren't
     editing the  same  file  at  once.    However,  this  method  can
     sometimes have problems:


         If  you  visit  a  file  on a device other than DSK, auto
         saves can't go there, because it would probably be slow.

         If the file is visited read-only, then auto saves  should
         certainly not go under the names that are visited.

         If  your  file does not have a numeric version number, or
         you have visited a fixed version,  auto  saves  can't  go
         under  that name, because they would clobber the original
         file.

         If you haven't visited a file, there aren't any names  to
         use.


     If  none  of  those cases apply then it is possible to store auto
     saves under the visited name.  This is done,  provided  that  you
     enable  it  by  setting  the variable Auto Save Visited File to a
     nonzero value.  Otherwise, or if one of the  cases  listed  above
     applies,  then the filename used for auto saves is taken from the
     variable Auto Save Filenames, modified slightly so that differentî     74                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     buffers  save  under different names.  If the last two characters
     of the FN1 are "00", then they  are  replaced  by  the  last  two
     digits (or the only digit) of the buffer number, the number which
     appears  at  the beginning of each line printed by C-X C-B.  Auto
     Save Filenames is usually set up by  the  default  init  file  to
     DSK:<working directory>;_SAV00 >.

       When  you  want  to  save your file "for real", use C-X C-S, as
     always.  C-U  C-X  C-S  is  a  way  to  request  an  "auto"  save
     explicitly.     When  you  are  auto  saving  under  the  visited
     filenames, there is not much difference between an auto save  and
     a  "real"  save,  except  that  an  auto  save will eventually be
     deleted automatically by EMACS a few auto saves  later,  while  a
     "real"  save  will  be  left  around forever (at least, Auto Save
     won't delete it).

       When it is time to recover from a system crash by reloading the
     auto save file, if auto saving was using the visited  file  names
     you have nothing special to do.  If auto saving was using special
     auto save filenames, read in the last auto save file and then use
     C-X  C-W  (Write  File) to write it out in its real location.  If
     you want to go back to an auto save file to  throw  away  changes
     that you don't like, you can use M-X Revert File, which knows how
     to  find  the  most recent save, permanent or not, under whatever
     filenames.  See section 13.2 [Revert], page 72.

       For your protection, if a file has  shrunk  by  more  than  30%
     since  the  last  save,  auto  saving  does not save.  Instead it
     prints a message  that  the  file  has  shrunk.    You  can  save
     explicitly if you wish; after that, auto saving will resume.

       Although  auto saving generates large numbers of files, it does
     not clog directories, because it cleans up after  itself.    Only
     the last Auto Save Max auto save files are kept; as further saves
     are  done,  old auto saves are deleted.  However, only files made
     by auto saving (or by explicitly requested  auto-saves  with  C-U
     C-X  C-S)  are  deleted in this way.  If Auto Save Max is 1, then
     repeated auto saves rewrite the same version  of  the  file;  the
     version  number  is only incremented after a real save.  (It will
     write a new version if it is unable to rewrite the old one).

       The variable Auto Save Max is initially 2.  Changing the  value
     may  not take effect in a given buffer until you turn auto saving
     off and on in that buffer.

       The number  of  characters  of  input  between  auto  saves  is
     controlled  by  the variable Auto Save Interval.  It is initially
     500.  Changing this takes effect immediately.î     75                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       If   you   use  the  multiple-buffer  features  of  EMACS  (See
     section 14 [Buffers], page 83.) then you may want  to  have  auto
     saving  for all buffers, not just the one that is selected at the
     moment.  To get this, set the  variable  Auto  Save  All  Buffers
     nonzero.



     13.4 Listing a File Directoryî     13.4 Listing a File Directoryî     13.4 Listing a File Directory


       To  look at a part of a file directory, use the C-X C-D command
     (^R Directory Display).  With no argument, it shows you the  file
     you  are  visiting,  and  related files with the same first name.
     C-U C-X C-D reads a filename from the terminal and shows you  the
     files related to that filename.

       To  see the whole directory in a brief format, use the function
     List Files, which takes the directory name as a string  argument.
     The  function  View Directory prints a verbose listing of a whole
     directory.

       The variable Auto Directory Display can be  set  to  make  many
     file   operations  display  the  directory  automatically.    The
     variable  is  normally  0;  making  it  positive   causes   write
     operations  such  as  Write  File  to  display the directory, and
     making it negative causes read operations such as Insert File  or
     visiting  to  display  it as well.  The display is done using the
     default directory listing function which is kept in the  variable
     Directory  Lister.    Normally  this  is  the  function  & Subset
     Directory that displays only the files  related  to  the  current
     default  file.    An alternative type of directory listing can be
     obtained by setting Directory Lister to the  function  &  Rotated
     Directory  Listing.    After this function display the particular
     file you are interested in, it offers to display the  rest.    If
     you  say "yes" (with a Space), it displays through the end of the
     directory, and around to the beginning of the directory, stopping
     where it originally started.  See section 22.6 [Init], page 143.

       The function List Directories prints an  alphabetized  list  of
     all the file directories on the system.



     13.5 Cleaning a File Directoryî     13.5 Cleaning a File Directoryî     13.5 Cleaning a File Directory


       The normal course of editing constantly creates new versions of
     files.    If  you  don't  eventually delete the old versions, theî     76                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     directory  will  fill  up and further editing will be impossible.
     EMACS has commands that make it easy to delete the old versions.

       For complete flexibility to delete precisely the files you want
     to delete, you can use the  DIRED  package.    See  section  13.6
     [DIRED], page 76, for more details.

       M-X  Reap File and M-X Clean Directory are more convenient ways
     to do the usual thing: keep only the two (or other  number)  most
     recent versions.

       M-X  Reap  File$<file><cr>  counts  the  number  of versions of
     <file>.  If there are more than two, you are told  the  names  of
     the  recent ones (to be kept) and the names of the older ones (to
     be deleted), and asked whether to do the deletion  (answer  Y  or
     N).

       Reap  File  makes  a  special  offer to delete individual files
     whose FN2 indicates that they are likely to be  temporary.    The
     list  of  temporary names is contained in a TECO search string in
     the variable Temp File FN2 List.  See section 19.3  [TECO  search
     strings], page 101.

       If  you  give  M-X  Reap  File  a null filename argument, or no
     argument, then it applies to the file you are visiting.

       M-X Clean Directory$<dirname>; <cr> cleans a whole directory of
     old versions.  Each file in the directory is processed a  la  M-X
     Reap  File.    M-X  Clean  Directory  with a null argument, or no
     argument, cleans  the  directory  containing  the  file  you  are
     visiting.

       M-X  Reap  File  and M-X Clean Directory can be given a numeric
     argument which specifies how many versions to keep.  For example,
     C-U 4 M-X Reap File would keep the  four  most  recent  versions.
     The  default  when  there  is  no  argument  is  the value of the
     variable File Versions Kept, which is initially 2.



     13.6 DIRED, the Directory Editor Subsystemî     13.6 DIRED, the Directory Editor Subsystemî     13.6 DIRED, the Directory Editor Subsystem


       DIRED makes it easy to delete many of the  files  in  a  single
     directory  at  once.    It  presents  a  copy of a listing of the
     directory, which you  can  move  around  in,  marking  files  for
     deletion.  When you are satisfied, you can tell DIRED to go ahead
     and delete the marked files.î     77                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Invoke  DIRED  with  M-X  DIRED  to  edit  the  current default
     directory, or M-X DIRED$<dir>;<cr> to edit directory <dir>.   You
     are  then  given  a  listing  of the directory which you can move
     around in with all the normal EMACS motion commands.  Some  EMACS
     commands  are made illegal and others do special things, but it's
     still a recursive editing level which you can exit normally  with
     C-M-C and abort with C-].


     13.6.1 Basic DIRED Commandsî     13.6.1 Basic DIRED Commandsî     13.6.1 Basic DIRED Commands


       You  can  mark  a  file  for  deletion  by  moving  to the line
     describing the file and typing D, C-D, K, or C-K.   The  deletion
     mark  is  visible  as a D at the beginning of the line.  Point is
     moved to the beginning of the next  line,  so  that  several  D's
     delete  several  files.  Alternatively, if you give D an argument
     it marks that many consecutive files.  Given a negative argument,
     it marks the preceding file (or several files) and puts point  at
     the  first  (in  the  buffer)  line  marked.    Most of the DIRED
     commands (D, U, !, $, P, S, C, E, Space)  repeat  this  way  with
     numeric arguments.

       If you wish to remove a deletion mark, use the U (for Undelete)
     command,  which  is  invoked like D: it removes the deletion mark
     from the current line (or next few lines, if given an  argument).
     The  Rubout  command  removes the deletion mark from the previous
     line, moving up to that line.  Thus, a Rubout after a D precisely
     cancels the D. 

       For extra convenience, Space is made a command similar to  C-N.
     Moving  down a line is done so often in DIRED that it deserves to
     be easy to type.  Rubout is often useful simply for moving up.

       If you are not sure whether you want to delete a file, you  can
     examine  it  by typing E. This enters a recursive editing mode on
     the file, which you can exit with C-M-C.  The file is not  really
     visited at that time, and you are not allowed to change it.  When
     you exit the recursive editing level, you return to DIRED.  The V
     command is like E but uses View File to look at the file.

       When  you  have marked the files you wish to mark, you can exit
     DIRED with C-M-C.  If any files were marked for  deletion,  DIRED
     lists  them  in  a concise format, several per line.  A file with
     "!"  appearing next to it in this list has not been saved on tape
     and will be gone forever if deleted.  A file with ">" in front of
     it is the most recent version of a sequence  and  you  should  be
     wary  of  deleting  it.   Then DIRED asks for confirmation of the
     list.  You can type "YES" (Just "Y" won't do)  to  go  ahead  andî     78                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     delete  them,  "N"  to return to editing the directory so you can
     change the marks, or "X" to give  up  and  delete  nothing.    No
     Return character is needed.  No other inputs are accepted at this
     point.


     13.6.2 Other DIRED Commandsî     13.6.2 Other DIRED Commandsî     13.6.2 Other DIRED Commands


       The  "!"  command moves down (or up, with an argument of -1) to
     the next undumped file (one with a "!" before its date).

       N finds the next "hog": the next file which has at least  three
     versions (or, more than File Versions Kept).

       T when given on a line describing a link marks for deletion the
     file  which  the  link  points  to.  This file need not be in the
     directory you are editing to be deleted in this way.

       1 copies the file you are pointing at to the primary pack.    2
     copies  it  to  SECOND:.   3 copies it to THIRD:.  4 copies it to
     FOURTH:.

       $ complements the don't-reap attribute of  the  file;  this  is
     displayed as a dollar sign to the left of the file date.

       M  moves  the  file to any other directory or device.  You must
     say where to move it.

       C runs SRCCOM to compare the file version you are  pointing  at
     with  the  latest version of the same file.  You must confirm the
     SRCCOM command with a Return before it is executed; you  can  add
     extra  SRCCOM  switches  before  the  Return.  When you return to
     EMACS, the cursor moves down a line to the next file.

       H helps you clean up.  It marks "old" versions of  the  current
     file,  and  versions  with  "temporary"  second  file  names, for
     deletion.  You can then use the D  and  U  commands  to  add  and
     remove  marks  before  deleting  the  files.   The variables File
     Versions Kept and Temp File FN2 List control which files H  picks
     for  deletion.    With  an  argument  (C-U  H), it does the whole
     directory instead of just the current file.

       ? displays a list of the DIRED commands.î     79                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     13.6.3 Invoking DIREDî     13.6.3 Invoking DIREDî     13.6.3 Invoking DIRED


       There  are  some other ways to invoke DIRED.  The command C-X D
     (^R Dired) puts you in DIRED on the directory containing the file
     you are currently editing.  With a numeric argument of 1  (C-U  1
     C-X  D),  only the current file is displayed instead of the whole
     directory.  In combination with the H command this can be  useful
     for  cleaning  up excess versions of a file after a heavy editing
     session.  With a numeric argument of 4 (C-U C-X D), it  asks  you
     for  the  directory  name.    Type a directory name followed by a
     semicolon, and/or a file name.  If you explicitly specify a  file
     name  only  versions  of  that  file are displayed, otherwise the
     whole directory is displayed.


     13.6.4 Editing the DIRED Buffer Yourselfî     13.6.4 Editing the DIRED Buffer Yourselfî     13.6.4 Editing the DIRED Buffer Yourself


       It is unwise to try to edit the text of the  directory  listing
     yourself,  without  using  the special DIRED commands, unless you
     know what you are doing, since you can confuse  DIRED  that  way.
     To  make  it  less  likely  that you will do so accidentally, the
     self-inserting characters are  all  made  illegal  inside  DIRED.
     However,  deleting whole lines at a time is certainly safe.  This
     does not delete the files described by those lines;  instead,  it
     makes  DIRED  forget that they are there and thus makes sure they
          ___î     will not be deleted.  Thus, M-X Delete Non-Matching Lines$FOO<cr>
     is useful if you wish to delete only files with a  FOO  in  their
     names.  See section 19 [Replacement], page 98.

       For  more complicated things, you can use the minibuffer.  When
     you call the minibuffer from within DIRED, you  get  a  perfectly
     normal one.  The special DIRED commands are not present while you
     are  editing  in  the  minibuffer.   To mark a file for deletion,
     replace the space at the beginning of its line with a  "D".    To
     remove a mark, replace the "D" with a space.



     13.7 Miscellaneous File Operationsî     13.7 Miscellaneous File Operationsî     13.7 Miscellaneous File Operations


       EMACS   has   extended   commands  for  performing  many  other
     operations on files.

       M-X View File$<file><cr> allows you to scan or read a  file  by
     sequential  screenfuls  without  visiting  the file.  It enters a
     subsystem in which you type a Space to see the next screenful  orî     80                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     a  Backspace to see the previous screenful.  Typing anything else
     exits the command.  View File does not visit the  file;  it  does
     not alter the contents of any buffer.  The advantage of View File
     is  that the whole file does not need to be loaded before you can
     begin reading it.  The inability to do anything but page  forward
     or backward is a consequence.

       M-X  Write  File$<file><cr>  writes  the contents of the buffer
     into the file <file>, and then visits  that  file.    It  can  be
     thought  of  as  a way of "changing the name" of the file you are
     visiting.  Unlike C-X C-S, Write File saves even  if  the  buffer
     has  not been changed.  C-X C-W is another way of getting at this
     command.

       M-X Insert File$<file><cr> inserts the contents of <file>  into
     the  buffer at point, leaving point unchanged before the contents
     and mark after them.  The current defaults are used  for  <file>,
     and are updated.

       M-X Write Region$<file><cr> writes the region (the text between
     point  and  mark)  to  the  specified  file.  It does not set the
     visited filenames.  The buffer is not changed.

       M-X Append to File$<file><cr> appends  the  region  to  <file>.
     The text is added to the end of <file>.

       M-X  Prepend  to File$<file><cr> adds the text to the beginning
     of <file> instead of the end.

       M-X Set Visited Filename$<file><cr> changes  the  name  of  the
     file  being  visited  without  reading or writing the data in the
     buffer.  M-X Write  File  is  approximately  equivalent  to  this
     command followed by a C-X C-S.

       M-X  Delete  File$<file><cr>  deletes the file.  If you did not
     get a chance to see  the  default  filenames  before  typing  the
     filename to delete, then Delete File asks for confirmation before
     deleting the file.

       M-X Copy File$<old file>$<new file><cr> copies the file.

       M-X Rename File$<old name>$<new name><cr> renames the file.

                                                                  ____î       The  default  filenames  for  all  of these operations are TECO
     _______ _________î     default filenames.  Most of these operations also leave the  TECO
     default names set to the file they operated on.  The TECO default
         ___  ______î     is  not  always  the same as the file you are visiting.  When you
     visit a file, they start out the  same;  the  commands  mentioned
     above  change  the  TECO  default,  but do not change the visited
     filenames.  Each buffer has its own TECO default filenames.î     81                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  operation  of  visiting  a file is available as a function
     under the name M-X Visit File$<file><cr>.  In this form, it  uses
     the  TECO  default as its defaults, though it still sets both the
     TECO default and the visited filenames.



     13.8 The Directory Comparison Subsystemî     13.8 The Directory Comparison Subsystemî     13.8 The Directory Comparison Subsystem


       The function Compare Directories makes it easy to  compare  two
     directories  to see which files are present in both and which are
     present only in one.   It  compares  a  directory  on  the  local
     machine with the directory of the same name on another machine.

       Do  M-X  Compare  Directories$<machine>:<dir  spec>  <switch>$,
     where <machine> is AI, ML, MC or DM, and is not the  machine  you
     are  on,  <dir spec> is an optional directory name and semicolon,
     and the optional switch is a slash followed by S, D or L. 

       After a while of crunching, you will be placed in  a  recursive
     editing  level  on a listing of both directories.  The reason for
     the recursive editing level is simply to make it easy for you  to
     view  the  comparison; unlike DIRED, Compare Directories does not
     have any commands for moving or deleting the files.  To exit,  do
     C-M-C.

       Here is a sample of part of a directory comparison:


       AI   RMS    #1=72 #2=78 #3=71 #4=77 #5=87 -
       MC   RMS    #0=231 #1=254 #13=2844
       AI MC     .DDT.  (INIT)    1   11/18/76 01:08   10/21/76 05:06
       AI MC L   .DDT_  (INIT) STAN.K ML EXIT
          MC L   .TECO. (INIT) .TECO. .TECO. (INIT)
       AI        AR2    1        16   2/6/77   17:51
       AI        AR3    1        13   2/17/77  21:37
       AI    L   ATS    ORDER  .INFO. @ ORDER
          MC     FTPU   4         9                   !3/4/77   16:46
          MC     FTPU   5         9                   !3/4/77   16:49
       AI MC     MATCH  1        15  !3/4/77   15:39  !3/4/77   15:39


       It begins with one line for each of the two directories.  These
     lines say which two directories they are, and how much disk space
     is available on each of the machines.

       Then  there comes the list of files, one line for each distinct
     pair of filenames that appears.  At the  beginning  of  the  lineî     82                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     appear  the  names  of the machines on which the file exists.  At
     the end of the line come the creation dates (or names pointed at,
     for links) of the file for the machines it is on.  Note that  all
     the dates/link names for the first machine line up, and so do all
     those for the second machine.

       The  switches allow you to view only some of the files.  The /S
     switch shows only files present on both machines.  /D shows  only
     those  not  present  on both machines.  /L shows only files which
     are the most recent (largest-numbered) of a sequence.   Only  one
     switch is allowed.î     83                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             CHAPTER FOURTEENî                             CHAPTER FOURTEENî                             CHAPTER FOURTEEN
                          USING MULTIPLE BUFFERSî                          USING MULTIPLE BUFFERSî                          USING MULTIPLE BUFFERS



       When  we speak of "the buffer", which contains the text you are
     editing, we have given the impression that there is only one.  In
     fact, there may be many of them, each with its own body of  text.
                                            ________î     At  any  time  only  one buffer can be selected and available for
     editing, but it isn't hard to switch to a different  one.    Each
     buffer  individually  remembers  which  file it is visiting, what
     modes are in effect, and whether there are any changes that  need
     saving.


             C-X B       Select or create a buffer.
             C-X C-F     Visit a file in its own buffer.
             C-X C-B     List the existing buffers.
             C-X K       Kill a buffer.  


       Each  buffer in EMACS has a single name, which normally doesn't
     change.  A buffer's name can be any length.    The  name  of  the
     currently  selected  buffer,  and the name of the file visited in
     it, are visible in the mode line when you are at top  level.    A
     newly started EMACS has only one buffer, named "Main".

       As  well  as the visited file and the major mode, a buffer can,
                                               _______î     if ordered to, remember many other things locally,  which  means,
     independently   of   all   other   buffers.    See  section  22.3
     [Variables], page 137.



     14.1 Creating and Selecting Buffersî     14.1 Creating and Selecting Buffersî     14.1 Creating and Selecting Buffers


       To create a new buffer, you need only think of a  name  for  it
     (say,  "FOO") and then do C-X B FOO<cr>, which is the command C-X
     B (Select Buffer) followed by the name.  This makes a new,  empty
     buffer  and  selects  it  for  editing.    The  new buffer is not
     visiting any file, so if you try to save it you will be asked for
     the filenames to use.  Each buffer has its own  major  mode;  the
     new  buffer's  major mode is taken from the value of the variable
     Default Major Mode, or from the  major  mode  of  the  previously
     selected  buffer  if  the value of Default Major Mode is the null
     string.  Normally the Default Major Mode is Fundamental mode.

       To return to buffer FOO later after having switched to another,î     84                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     the  same  command  C-X  B  FOO<cr> is used, since C-X B can tell
     whether a buffer named FOO exists already or not.   It  does  not
     matter  whether  you  use  upper case or lower case in typing the
     name of a buffer.  C-X B Main<cr> reselects the buffer Main  that
     EMACS  started  out  with.  Just C-X B<cr> reselects the previous
     buffer.  Repeated C-X B<cr>'s  alternate  between  the  last  two
     buffers selected.

       You can also read a file into its own newly created buffer, all
     with  one command: C-X C-F (Find File), followed by the filename.
     The first name of the file becomes the buffer name.   C-F  stands
     for  "Find",  because  if the specified file already resides in a
     buffer in your EMACS, that buffer is reselected.  So you need not
     remember whether you have brought the file in already or not.   A
     buffer  created  by C-X C-F can be reselected later with C-X B or
     C-X C-F, whichever you find more convenient.   Nonexistent  files
     can  be created with C-X C-F just as they can be with C-X C-V.  A
     nonzero argument to C-X C-F makes the file or  buffer  read-only;
     it is like the argument to C-X C-V.  See section 13.1 [Visiting],
     page 69.

       Sometimes  EMACS  needs  to  visit a file as part of some other
     operation.  By default, it visits the file in whatever buffer was
     selected.  If you like to use C-X C-F and multiple  buffers,  you
     can  tell  EMACS to use multiple buffers for implicit visiting by
     setting the variable TAGS Find File to a  nonzero  value.    This
     causes  automatic visiting to be done by means of C-X C-F instead
     of C-X C-V.  Automatic visiting is done by the TAGS package  (See
     section  21  [TAGS],  page  122.)  or  by  invoking  EMACS with a
     filename 


         :EMACS <filename><cr>


       If the buffer with the same name that  C-X  C-F  wants  to  use
     already  exists  but  with  the wrong contents (often a different
     file with a similar name), then you are asked what to  do.    You
     can  type  Return meaning go ahead and reuse that buffer for this
     new file, or you can type another buffer name to use instead.  If
     C-X C-F does find the file already in a buffer, then it checks to
     see whether the version on disk is the same as the  last  version
     read  or  written  from  that  buffer,  for  safety.  If they are
     different, you are warned that someone else may  be  editing  the
     file,  and  left with the version which was already in the EMACS.
     To get the new version from disk instead, use M-X Revert File.î     85                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     14.2 Using Existing Buffersî     14.2 Using Existing Buffersî     14.2 Using Existing Buffers


       To  get  a list of all the buffers that exist, do C-X C-B (List
     Buffers).  Each buffer's name, major mode, and visited  filenames
     are  printed.    A  star  at  the beginning of a line indicates a
     buffer which contains changes that have  not  been  saved.    The
     number  that  appears before a buffer's name in a C-X C-B listing
                      ______ ______î     is that buffer's buffer number.   You  can  select  a  buffer  by
     giving its number as a numeric argument to C-X B, which then does
     not need to read a string from the terminal.

       If  several  buffers  have  stars, you should save some of them
     with M-X Save All Files.  This finds all the  buffers  that  need
     saving  and asks about each one individually.  Saving the buffers
     this way is much easier and more efficient  than  selecting  each
     one and typing C-X C-S.

       A  quick  way  of  glancing  at  another  buffer,  faster  than
     selecting it, is to use M-X View Buffer$<buffername><cr>.    This
     displays  the  contents  of  the  other  buffer and lets you move
     forward and back a screen at a time  with  Space  and  Backspace.
     See section 15 [Display], page 87.

       M-X  Rename  Buffer$<new  name><cr>  changes  the  name  of the
     currently selected buffer.  If <new name> is the null string, the
     first filename of the visited file is used as the new name of the
     buffer.

       The commands C-X A (^R Append to Buffer) and M-X Insert  Buffer
     can  be  used  to  copy  text  from  one  buffer to another.  See
     section 9.3 [Copying], page 44.



     14.3 Killing Buffersî     14.3 Killing Buffersî     14.3 Killing Buffers


       After you use an EMACS for a while, it may fill up with buffers
     which you no longer need.  Eventually you can reach a point where
     trying to create any more results in an "URK" error.  So whenever
     it is convenient you should do M-X Kill Some Buffers, which  asks
     about each buffer individually.  You can say Y or N to kill it or
     not.   Or you can say Control-R to take a look at it first.  This
     does not actually select the buffer, as the mode line shows,  but
     gives  you a recursive editing level in which you can move around
     and look at things.  When you have seen enough to  make  up  your
     mind,  exit the recursive editing level with a C-M-C and you will
     be asked the question again.  If you say to kill  a  buffer  thatî     86                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     needs  saving, you will be asked whether it should be saved.  See
     section 24.2.5 [Storage Exhausted], page 161.  .

       You can kill the buffer FOO by doing C-X K FOO<cr>.    You  can
     kill  the  selected  buffer,  a common thing to do if you use C-X
     C-F, by doing C-X K<cr>.  If you kill the selected buffer, in any
     way, EMACS asks you which buffer to select instead.  Saying  just
     <cr>  at  that point tells EMACS to choose one reasonably.  C-X K
     runs the function Kill Buffer.î     87                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              CHAPTER FIFTEENî                              CHAPTER FIFTEENî                              CHAPTER FIFTEEN
                          CONTROLLING THE DISPLAYî                          CONTROLLING THE DISPLAYî                          CONTROLLING THE DISPLAY



       Since only part of a large file fits on the screen, EMACS tries
     to  show  the part that is likely to be interesting.  The display
     control commands allow you to ask to see a different part of  the
     file.


             C-L     Clear  and  redisplay  screen, putting point at a
                     specified vertical position.
             C-V     Scroll forwards (a screen or a few lines).
             M-V     Scroll backwards.
             M-R     Move point  to  the  text  at  a  given  vertical
                     position.
             C-M-R   Shift the function point is in onto the screen.  


       The  terminal  screen  is rarely large enough to display all of
     your file.  If the whole buffer doesn't fit on the screen,  EMACS
     shows a contiguous portion of it, containing point.  It continues
     to  show approximately the same portion until point moves outside
     of it; then EMACS chooses a new portion centered around  the  new
     point.   This is EMACS's guess as to what you are most interested
     in seeing.  But if the guess is wrong, you can  use  the  display
     control  commands to see a different portion.  The finite area of
                                                                   ___î     screen through which you can see part of the buffer is called the
     ______î     window, and the choice of where in the buffer to start displaying
                    ___ ______î     is also called the window.

       First we describe how EMACS chooses a new  window  position  on
     its  own.    The goal is usually to place point 35 percent of the
     way down the screen.  This is controlled by the  variable  Cursor
     Centering  Point,  whose  value is the percent of the screen down
     from the top.  However, if the  end  of  the  buffer  is  on  the
     screen,  EMACS  tries  to  leave at most 35 percent of the screen
     blank beneath it, so  that  the  screen  is  not  wasted.    This
     percentage  is  controlled  by the variable End of Buffer Display
     Margin.  These variables work by controlling FS flags, and  their
     values must never be negative or greater than 99.

       Normally  EMACS  only chooses a new window position if you move
     point off the screen.  However, you can  ask  for  a  new  window
     position  to be computed whenever point gets too close to the top
     of the screen by setting the variable Top Display Margin  to  the
     percentage  of the screen in which point must not appear.  Bottom
     Display Margin does the same thing for a region near the bottom.î     88                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  basic  display control command is C-L (^R New Window).  In
     its simplest form, with no argument, it  clears  the  screen  and
     tells  EMACS  to choose a new window position, centering point 35
     percent of the way from the top as usual.

       C-L with a positive argument chooses a new window so as to  put
     point  that  many  lines  from the top.  An argument of zero puts
     point on the very top line.  Point does not move with respect  to
     the  text; rather, the text and point move rigidly on the screen.
     C-L with a negative argument puts point that many lines from  the
     bottom  of the window.  For example, C-U -1 C-L puts point on the
     bottom line, and C-U -5 C-L puts it five lines from  the  bottom.
     C-L  with  an  argument does not clear the screen, so that it can
     move the text on the screen instead of printing it again  if  the
     terminal allows that.

       C-U  C-L is different from C-L with any other sort of argument.
     It causes just the line containing point to be redisplayed.

           _________î       The scrolling commands C-V and  M-V  let  you  move  the  whole
     display  up  or  down  a few lines.  C-V (^R Next Screen) with an
     argument shows you that many more lines  at  the  bottom  of  the
     screen,  moving the text and point up together as C-L might.  C-V
     with a negative argument shows you more lines at the top  of  the
     screen,  as  does  Meta-V  (^R  Previous  Screen) with a positive
     argument.

       To read the buffer a screenful at a time, use the  C-V  command
     with  no  argument.  It takes the last two lines at the bottom of
     the screen and puts them at the top, followed by nearly  a  whole
     screenful  of  lines not visible before.  Point is put at the top
     of the screen.  Thus, each C-V shows the "next screenful", except
     for two lines of overlap to provide  continuity.    The  variable
     Next  Screen  Context  Lines, if defined, controls how many lines
     from the bottom of the screen move to the top; the default if the
     variable is not defined is 2.  To move backward, use M-V  without
     an  argument, which moves a whole screenful backwards (again with
     overlap).

       Scanning by screenfuls through the buffer for some distance  is
     most  conveniently  done  with the M-X View Buffer command.  This
     command  enters  a  simple  subsystem  in  which  Space  moves  a
     screenful  forward and Backspace moves a screenful backward.  The
     Return character exits, leaving point centered in  whatever  part
     of the buffer was visible.  Any other character exits and returns
     point  to  its former location, and is then executed as a command
     (unless it is a Rubout; Rubout exits but is not executed).   View
     Buffer  can be used to view another buffer by giving the buffer's
     name as a string argument.  In this  case,  exiting  with  Returnî     89                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     moves  point permanently in the other buffer, but does not select
     it.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

       With the M-X View File command,  you  can  scan  by  screenfuls
     through  a  file  which  you  have not visited.  See section 13.7
     [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

       To scroll the buffer so that the current function or  paragraph
     is  positioned  conveniently on the screen, use the C-M-R command
     (^R Reposition Window).  This command tries to  get  as  much  as
     possible  of  the  current function or paragraph onto the screen,
     preferring the beginning to the end, but not moving point off the
     screen.  A "function" in Lisp mode is a defun;  otherwise  it  is
     defined  to be a set of consecutive unindented lines, or a set of
     consecutive indented lines.

       C-L in all its forms changes  the  position  of  point  on  the
     screen,  carrying  the text with it.  Another command moves point
     the same way but leaves the text fixed.    It  is  called  Meta-R
     (^R Move to Screen Edge).  With no argument, it puts point at the
     beginning  of  the line at the center of the screen.  An argument
     is used to specify the line to put it on, counting from  the  top
     if  the  argument  is  positive,  or  from  the  bottom  if it is
     negative.  Thus, Meta-R with an argument of 0 puts point  on  the
     top  line of the screen.  Meta-R never causes any text to move on
     the screen; it causes point to move with respect  to  the  screen
     and the text.î     90                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              CHAPTER SIXTEENî                              CHAPTER SIXTEENî                              CHAPTER SIXTEEN
                              TWO WINDOW MODEî                              TWO WINDOW MODEî                              TWO WINDOW MODE



                                                       _______î       EMACS  allows  you to split the screen into two windows and use
     them to display parts of two files, or  two  parts  of  the  same
     file.


             C-X 2       Start showing two windows.
             C-X 3       Show two windows but stay "in" the top one.
             C-X 1       Show only one window again.
             C-X O       Switch to the Other window
             C-X 4       Find buffer, file or tag in other window.
             C-X ^       Make this window bigger.
             C-M-V       Scroll the other window.


           ___  ______î       In  two  window mode, the text display portion of the screen is
                                   _______î     divided into two parts called windows,  which  display  different
     pieces of text.  The two windows can display two different files,
     or  two  parts  of  the  same  file.   Only one of the windows is
     selected; that is the window which the cursor  is  in.    Editing
     normally  takes place in that window alone.  To edit in the other
     window, you would give a special command to move  the  cursor  to
     the  other  window, and then edit there.  Since there is only one
     mode line, it applies to the window you are in at the moment.

       The command C-X 2 (^R Two Windows) enters two-window mode.    A
     line  of dashes appears across the middle of the screen, dividing
     the text display area into two halves.   Window  one,  containing
     the  same text as previously occupied the whole screen, fills the
     top half, while window two fills the bottom  half.    The  cursor
     moves  to  window two.  If this is your first entry to two-window
     mode, window two contains a new buffer named W2.   Otherwise,  it
     contains the same text it held the last time you looked at it.

       To  return  to  viewing  only one window, use the command C-X 1
     (^R One Window).  Window one expands to fill  the  whole  screen,
     and  window  two  disappears until the next C-X 2. C-U C-X 1 gets
     rid of window one and makes window  two  use  the  whole  screen.
     Neither  of  these  depends on which window the cursor is in when
     the command is given.

       While you are in two window mode you can use C-X  O  (^R  Other
     Window)  to  switch  between the windows.  After doing C-X 2, the
     cursor is in window two.  Doing C-X O moves the  cursor  back  to
     window  one,  to  exactly  where  it  was  before the C-X 2.  Theî     91                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     difference  between  this  and  doing  C-X 1 is that C-X O leaves
     window two visible on the screen.   A  second  C-X  O  moves  the
     cursor  back  into  window  two, to where it was before the first
     C-X O.  And so on...

       Often you will be editing one window while using the other just
     for reference.  Then, the command C-M-V (^R Scroll Other  Window)
     is very useful.  It scrolls the other window without switching to
     it  and  switching back.  It scrolls the same way C-V does:  with
     no argument, a whole screen up; with an argument, that many lines
     up (or down, for a negative argument).  With just  a  minus  sign
     (no  digits)  as  an  argument,  C-M-V  scrolls a whole screenful
     backwards (what M-V does).

       The C-X 3 (^R View Two Windows)  command  is  like  C-X  2  but
     leaves  the  cursor  in window one.  That is, it makes window two
     appear at the bottom of the screen but leaves the cursor where it
     was.  C-X 2 is equivalent to C-X 3 C-X O.  C-X 3 is equivalent to
     C-X 2 C-X O, but C-X 3 is much faster.

       M-X Compare Windows compares  the  text  in  the  two  windows.
     Starting  from  the  existing  values of point in each window, it
     advances point in both  windows  to  the  first  mismatch.    The
     variable Collapse in Comparison, if it exists, should be a string
     containing  all  the  "insignificant"  characters;  any string of
     insignificant  characters  matches  any  other  string  of  those
     characters.    If  the variable does not exist, the insignificant
     characters are return, linefeed, space and tab.

       If you quit with C-G in the middle of Compare Windows, point is
     advanced in both windows as far as the  matching  has  proceeded.
     As   a   result,   calling  Compare  Windows  again  resumes  the
     comparison.

       Normally, the screen is divided evenly between the two windows.
     You can also redistribute screen space between the  windows  with
     the  C-X  ^  (^R  Grow  Window)  command.  It makes the currently
     selected window get one line bigger,  or  as  many  lines  as  is
     specified  with a numeric argument.  With a negative argument, it
     makes the selected window smaller.  The allocation  of  space  to
     the  windows  is  remembered while you are in one window mode and
     the same allocation is used when you return to two  window  mode.
     The allocation changes only when you give a C-X ^ command.

       After leaving two-window mode, you can still use C-X O, but its
     meaning  is  different.  Window two does not appear, but whatever
     was being shown in it appears, in window one (the whole  screen).
     Whatever  buffer  used  to  be in window one is stuck, invisibly,
     into window two.  Another C-X O reverses the effect of the first.î     92                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     For  example,  if  window one shows buffer B and window two shows
     buffer W2 (the usual case), and only window one is visible,  then
     after  a  C-X  O  window one shows buffer W2 and window two shows
     buffer B. 



     16.1 Multiple Windows and Multiple Buffersî     16.1 Multiple Windows and Multiple Buffersî     16.1 Multiple Windows and Multiple Buffers


       Buffers can be selected independently in each window.  The  C-X
     B  command selects a new buffer in whichever window the cursor is
     in.  The other window's buffer does not  change.    Window  two's
     buffer  is  remembered while you are in one window mode, and when
     you return to two window  mode  that  same  buffer  reappears  in
     window two.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

       You  can  view  one  buffer  in  both  windows.   Give C-X 2 an
     argument as in C-U C-X 2 to go into two window  mode,  with  both
     windows  showing the buffer which used to be in window one alone.
     Although the same buffer  appears  in  both  windows,  they  have
     different  values  of point, so you can move around in window two
     while window one continues to show the same text.   Then,  having
     found  in  window  two the place you wish to refer to, you can go
     back to window one with C-X O to make your changes.  Finally  you
     can  do  C-X  1  to make window two leave the screen.  If you are
     already in two window mode, C-U C-X O switches  windows  carrying
     the  buffer  from  the  old  window  to  the new one so that both
     windows show that buffer.

       If you have the same buffer in both windows, you must beware of
     trying to visit a different file in one of the windows  with  C-X
     C-V,  because  if  you bring a new file into this buffer, it will
                             ____î     replace the old file in both windows.  To view different files in
     the two windows again, you must switch  buffers  in  one  of  the
     windows first (with C-X B or C-X C-F, perhaps).

       A convenient "combination" command for viewing something in the
     other  window  is  C-X  4  (^R Visit in Other Window).  With this
     command you can ask to see any specified buffer, file or  tag  in
     the  other  window.   Follow the C-X 4 with either B and a buffer
     name, F or C-F and a file name, or T or "." and a tag  name  (See
     section 21 [TAGS], page 122.).  This switches to the other window
     and  finds  there  what you specified.  If you were previously in
     one-window mode, two-window mode is entered.  C-X 4 B is  similar
     to to C-X 2 C-X B.  C-X 4 F is similar to C-X 2 C-X C-F.  C-X 4 T
     is  similar  to  C-X  2  M-Period.    The  difference  is  one of
     efficiency, and also that C-X 4 works equally  well  if  you  are
     already using two windows.î     93                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             CHAPTER SEVENTEENî                             CHAPTER SEVENTEENî                             CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
                                 NARROWINGî                                 NARROWINGî                                 NARROWING



       _________î       Narrowing  means  focusing  in  on  some portion of the buffer,
     making the rest temporarily invisible and inaccessible.


             C-X N       Narrow down to between point and mark.
             C-X P       Narrow down to the page point is in.
             C-X W       Widen to view the entire buffer.  


       When you have narrowed down to a part of the buffer, that  part
     appears  to  be  all there is.  You can't see the rest, you can't
     move into it (motion commands won't go outside the visible part),
     you can't change it in any way.  However, it is not gone, and  if
     you  save  the  file  all  the  invisible text will be saved.  In
     addition to sometimes making it easier to concentrate on a single
     subroutine or paragraph by eliminating clutter, narrowing can  be
     used  to  restrict  the  range of operation of a replace command.
     The word "Narrow" appears in the mode line whenever narrowing  is
     in effect.

       The  primary  narrowing  command  is C-X N (^R Narrow Bounds to
                           _______ ______ __________î     Region).  It sets the virtual buffer boundaries at point and  the
     mark,  so that only what was between them remains visible.  Point
     and mark do not change.

       The way to undo narrowing is to widen  with  C-X  W  (^R  Widen
     Bounds).  This makes all text in the buffer accessible again.

       Another way to narrow is to narrow to just one page, with C-X P
     (^R Narrow Bounds to Page).  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.

       You  can  get  information  on  what part of the buffer you are
     narrowed down to using the C-X  =  command.    See  section  11.4
     [Filling], page 56.

       The  virtual  buffer  boundaries  are a powerful TECO mechanism
     used internally in EMACS in many ways.  While only  the  commands
     described  here  set them so as you can see, many others set them
     temporarily using the TECO  commands  FS  VB$  and  FS  VZ$,  but
     restore them before they are finished.î     94                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             CHAPTER EIGHTEENî                             CHAPTER EIGHTEENî                             CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
                      COMMANDS FOR MANIPULATING PAGESî                      COMMANDS FOR MANIPULATING PAGESî                      COMMANDS FOR MANIPULATING PAGES



                                                    _____î       Files  are  often thought of as divided into pages by the ASCII
                         ^î     character formfeed (|L).  For example, if a file is printed on  a
     line printer, each page of the file, in this sense, will start on
     a  new  page  of paper.  Most editors make the division of a file
     into pages extremely important.  For example, they may be  unable
     to show more than one page of the file at any time.  EMACS treats
     a  formfeed  character  just like any other character.  It can be
     inserted with C-Q C-L  (or,  C-M-L),  and  deleted  with  Rubout.
     Thus, you are free to paginate your file, or not.  However, since
     pages  are  often  meaningful divisions of the file, commands are
     provided to move over them and operate on them.


             C-M-L       Insert formfeed.
             C-X C-P     Put point  and  mark  around  this  page  (or
                         another page).
             C-X [       Move point to previous page boundary.
             C-X ]       Move point to next page boundary.
             C-X P       Narrow down to just this (or next) page.
             C-X L       Count the lines in this page.
             M-X What Page
                         Print current page and line number.  


       The  C-X  [  (^R  Previous  Page)  command  moves  point to the
     previous page delimiter (actually, to right after it).  If  point
     starts  out  right  after a page delimiter, it skips that one and
     stops at the previous one.  A numeric argument serves as a repeat
     count.  The C-X ] (^R Next Page) command moves forward  past  the
     next page delimiter.

       The  command  M-X  What Page prints the page and line number of
     the cursor in the echo area.  There  is  a  separate  command  to
     print this information because it is likely to be slow and should
     not  slow down anything else.  The design of TECO is such that it
     is not possible to know the absolute number of the page  you  are
     in, except by scanning through the whole file counting pages.

       The  C-X C-P command (^R Mark Page) puts point at the beginning
     of the current page and the mark at the end.  The page  delimiter
     at the end is included (the mark follows it).  The page delimiter
     at the front is excluded (point follows it).  This command can be
     followed  by a C-W to kill a page which is to be moved elsewhere.
     If it is inserted after a page delimiter, at a place where C-X  ]î     95                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     or C-X [ would take you, then the page will be properly delimited
     before and after once again.

       A  numeric argument to C-X C-P is used to specify which page to
     go to, relative to the current one.  Zero means the current page.
     One means the next page, and -1 means the previous one.

       The command C-X P (^R Narrow Bounds to Page)  narrows  down  to
     just  one  page.  Everything before and after becomes temporarily
     invisible  and  inaccessible   (See   section   17   [Narrowing],
     page  93.).  Use C-X W (^R Widen Bounds) to undo this.  Both page
     terminators,  the  preceding  one  and  the  following  one,  are
     excluded  from  the  visible  region.    Like  C-X C-P, the C-X P
     command normally selects the current  page,  but  allows  you  to
     specify  which page explicitly relative to the current one with a
     numeric argument.  However, when you are already narrowed down to
     one page, C-X P with no argument  moves  you  to  the  next  page
     (otherwise,  it would be a useless no-op).  So several C-X P's in
     a row get first the current page and then successive pages.

       If you prefer to see only one page of the file at a time  as  a
     general  rule,  use  the  PAGE library.  See section 18.1 [PAGE],
     page 96.

       Just what delimits pages is controlled  by  the  variable  Page
     Delimiter,  which  should  contain  a  TECO  search  string  (See
     section 19.3 [TECO search strings], page 101.) which matches  all
                                                                   ^î     page  separators.    Normally, it is a string containing just |L.
                                                       ^ ^ ^ ^î     For an INFO file, it might usefully be changed to |_|L|O|_, which
                         ^ ^            ^î     means that either a |_|L or just a |_ (either of the two  strings
     that  separate INFO nodes) should be a page separator.  Then each
     node counts as  a  page.    In  any  case,  page  separators  are
     recognized  as  such  only  at  the  beginning  of  a  line.  The
     paragraph  commands  consider  each  page  boundary  a  paragraph
     boundary as well.

       The  C-X  L  command (^R Count Lines Page) is good for deciding
     where to break a page in two.  It prints in  the  echo  area  the
     total number of lines in the current page, and then divides it up
     into those preceding the current line and those following, as in 


         Page has 96 lines (72+25)


     Notice  that  the  sum is off by one; this is correct if point is
     not at the front of a line.î     96                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     18.1 Editing Only One Page at a Timeî     18.1 Editing Only One Page at a Timeî     18.1 Editing Only One Page at a Time


       The  PAGE  library allows you to edit only within a single page
     at a time, with special commands to move between pages, and split
     and join pages.  It contrives to show the number of the page  you
     are  looking  at  in  the  mode  line.  You can also ask to see a
     _________î     directory of the pages in the file, or  to  insert  it  into  the
     file.    This is an extension of and replacement for the facility
     provided by the C-X P command  in  standard  EMACS.    It  is  an
     optional  library  because  we  do not think it is necessarily an
     improvement.

       The commands in the PAGE library supplant and redefine commands
     in standard EMACS.  Therefore, you cannot  use  them  unless  you
     give  the  command  M-X  Load  Library$PAGE<cr>  explicitly.  See
     section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.


             C-X ]       Move to next page.
             C-X [       Move to previous page.
             C-X C-P     Move to page by absolute number.
             C-X P       Split this page at point.
             C-X J       Join this page to the next or previous one.
             C-X W       See the whole file again.  


       The most fundamental thing to do  with  PAGE  is  to  go  to  a
     specific  page.  This can be done by giving the page number as an
     argument to C-X C-P (^R Goto Page).  If you  give  a  number  too
     big, the last page in the file is selected.

       For  convenience, C-X C-P with no argument when you are looking
     at the whole file selects the page containing point.    When  you
     are  looking  at  only one page, C-X C-P with no argument goes to
     the next page and with a negative argument goes to  the  previous
     page.

       However,  the  main  commands for moving forward or backward by
     pages are C-X [ and C-X ] (^R Goto Previous Page and ^R Goto Next
     Page).  These take a numeric argument (either sign) and move that
     many pages.

       To go back to viewing the whole file instead of just one  page,
     you  can use the C-X W (^R PAGE Widen Bounds) command.  These are
     the same characters that you would use  in  standard  EMACS,  but
     they  run  a  different  function  that  knows to remove the page
     number from the mode line.î     97                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  C-S  (^R  Incremental  Search) and C-R (^R Reverse Search)
     commands are redefined to widen  bounds  first  and  narrow  them
     again  afterwards.  So you can search through the whole file, but
     afterward see only the page in which the search ended.  In  fact,
     PAGE  goes  through  some  trouble  to  work with whatever search
     functions you prefer to use, and find them wherever you put them.

                                                      ^î       To split an existing page, you could insert a  |L,  but  unless
     you  do  this  while  viewing  the  whole  file,  PAGE  might get
     confused.  The clean way is to use C-X  P  (^R  Insert  Pagemark)
     which  inserts  the  page mark, and narrows down to the second of
     the two pages formed from the old page.  The clean way to get rid
     of a page mark is to use C-X J (^R Join Next Page).  It gets  rid
     of  the  page  mark  after  the current page; or, with a negative
     argument, gets rid of the page mark before this page.

                                       ^î       A page mark is defined as <CRLF>|L.  If you  set  the  variable
                                                   ^î     PAGE  Flush  CRLF  to 1, a page mark is <CRLF>|L<CRLF>, which has
     the effect of making the CRLF  at  the  beginning  of  each  page
     invisible.  This may be desirable for EMACS library source files.
                                                         ^î     You  can also specify some other string in place of |L by setting
     the  variable  Page  Delimiter.    If  Page  Delimiter  specifies
                                           ^î     multiple  alternatives,  separated by |O, PAGE always inserts the
     first of them, but recognizes them all.

       To see  a  list  of  all  the  pages  in  the  file,  each  one
     represented  by  its  first  nonempty  line,  use  M-X  View Page
     Directory.  It prints out the first non-blank line on each  page,
     preceded  by  its page number.  M-X Insert Page Directory inserts
     the same directory into the buffer at point.  If you give  it  an
     argument,  it  tries  to  make  the whole thing into a comment by
     putting the Comment Start string at the front of  each  line  and
     the Comment End string at the end.

       If  the  variable Page Setup Hook exists, PAGE will execute its
     value as the function for placing PAGE's functions on keys.  This
     is done instead of the normal assignments to C-X [,  C-X  ],  C-X
     C-P, C-X P, and C-X J. î     98                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             CHAPTER NINETEENî                             CHAPTER NINETEENî                             CHAPTER NINETEEN
                           REPLACEMENT COMMANDSî                           REPLACEMENT COMMANDSî                           REPLACEMENT COMMANDS



       Global search-and-replace operations are not needed as often in
     EMACS  as  they are in other editors, but they are available.  In
     addition to the simple Replace operation which is like that found
     in most editors, there is a Query Replace  operation  which  asks
     you, for each occurrence of the pattern, whether to replace it.

       To  replace every instance of FOO after point with BAR, you can
     do 


         M-X Replace$FOO$BAR<cr>


     Replacement occurs only after point, so if you want to cover  the
     whole  buffer  you  must  go to the beginning first.  Replacement
     continues to the end of the buffer, but you can  restrict  it  by
     narrowing.  See section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

       Unless  the  variable  Case  Replace  is zero, Replace tries to
     preserve case; give both FOO and BAR in  lower  case,  and  if  a
     particular   FOO   is   found  with  a  capital  initial  or  all
     capitalized, the BAR which replaces it will  be  given  the  same
     case pattern.  Thus, 


         M-X Replace$foo$bar<cr>


     would  replace  "foo" with "bar", "Foo" with "Bar" and "FOO" with
     "BAR".  If Case  Replace  is  zero,  the  replacement  string  is
     inserted  with  the  case  you  used  when you typed it.  If Case
     Search is zero, the string to be replaced is found only  when  it
     has the same case as what you typed.

       If  you  give  Replace  (or Query Replace) an argument, then it
     replaces only occurrences of FOO delimited  by  break  characters
     (or an end of the buffer).  So you can replace only FOO the word,
     and not FOO when it is part of FOOBAR.

       The string FOO to be replaced is actually a TECO search string,
                                                   ^   ^   ^   ^   ^î     a  type  of  pattern, in which the characters |B, |N, |O, |Q, |S,
     ^       ^î     |X, and |] are special.  See section 19.3 [TECO search  strings],
     page 101.î     99                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     19.1 Query Replaceî     19.1 Query Replaceî     19.1 Query Replace


       If  you want to change only some of the occurrences of FOO, not
     all, then you cannot use an ordinary Replace.  Instead,  use  M-X
     Query  Replace$FOO$BAR<cr>.  This displays each occurrence of FOO
     and waits for you to say whether to replace it with a BAR.    The
     things you can type when you are shown an occurrence of FOO are:


             Space       to  replace  the  FOO  (preserving case, just
                         like plain Replace, unless  Case  Replace  is
                         zero).
             Rubout      to  skip  to  the  next FOO without replacing
                         this one.
             Comma       to replace this FOO and display  the  result.
                         You   are   then   asked  for  another  input
                         character, except that since the  replacement
                         has  already  been made, Rubout and Space are
                         equivalent.
             Altmode     to exit without doing any more replacements.
             Period      to replace this FOO and then exit.
             !           to  replace  all  remaining   FOO's   without
                         asking.
             ^           to  go back to the previous FOO (or, where it
                         was), in case you have made a mistake.   This
                         works  by  jumping to the mark (Query Replace
                         sets the mark each time it finds a FOO).
             C-R         to enter a recursive editing level,  in  case
                         the  FOO  needs to be edited rather than just
                         replaced with a BAR.  When you are done, exit
                         the recursive editing level  with  C-M-C  and
                         the next FOO will be displayed.
             C-W         to delete the FOO, and then start editing the
                         buffer.     When  you  are  finished  editing
                         whatever is to  replace  the  FOO,  exit  the
                         recursive  editing  level  with C-M-C and the
                         next FOO will be displayed.  


       If you type any other character, the Query Replace  is  exited,
     and  the  character  executed as a command.  To restart the Query
     Replace, use C-X Altmode which is a  command  to  re-execute  the
     previous  minibuffer  command or extended command.  See section 5
     [M-X], page 21.î     100                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     19.1.1 Running Query Replace with the Minibufferî     19.1.1 Running Query Replace with the Minibufferî     19.1.1 Running Query Replace with the Minibuffer


       Meta-%  gives  you  a minibuffer pre-initialized with "MM Query
     Replace$".  See section 23 [Minibuffer], page 156.  This  is  the
     easiest  way  to invoke Query Replace.  It also allows you to get
     Returns and Altmodes into the arguments.

       With the minibuffer, Query Replace  can  be  given  a  precomma
     argument,  which says that the second string argument is actually
     a TECO program to be executed to perform the replacement,  rather
     than simply a string to replace with.

       When   you  invoke  Query  Replace  from  the  minibuffer,  the
               ^î     character |] becomes special  (because  it  is  special  in  TECO
                                      ^î     programs).    In  order to get a |] into the search string or the
     replacement string, you must use two of them.  You can also use a
     ^î     |] to quote an  Altmode.    In  the  minibuffer,  Return  has  no
     syntactic  significance,  so  there is no need for a way to quote
     it.  However, in order to insert any control characters into  the
                                                                    ^î     arguments,  you need to quote them again with C-Q.  So, to get |Q
     ^                                               ^î     |X into the search string so as to search for a |X, you  have  to
     type C-Q C-Q C-Q C-X.



     19.2 Other Search-and-loop Functionsî     19.2 Other Search-and-loop Functionsî     19.2 Other Search-and-loop Functions


       Here  are  some  other functions related to replacement.  Their
     arguments are TECO search strings (See section 19.3 [TECO  search
     strings],  page 101.).  They all operate from point to the end of
     the buffer (or where narrowing stops them).


     M-X List Matching Lines$FOO<cr>
                     prints  each  line  containing  FOO.    With   an
                     argument,  it  prints  that many lines before and
                     after each occurrence.

     M-X Count Occurrences$FOO<cr>
                     prints the number of  occurrences  of  FOO  after
                     point.

     M-X Delete Non-Matching Lines$FOO<cr>
                     kills  all  lines  after point that don't contain
                     FOO.

     M-X Delete Matching Lines$FOO<cr>
                     kills all lines after point that contain FOO.  î     101                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     19.3 TECO Search Stringsî     19.3 TECO Search Stringsî     19.3 TECO Search Strings


       The  first  string  argument  to  Replace  and Query Replace is
     actually a TECO search string.  This means  that  the  characters
     ^   ^   ^   ^   ^       ^î     |X, |B, |N, |S, |O, and |Q have special meanings.

       ^                          ^î       |X matches any character.  |B matches any "delimiter" character
     (anything  which  the  word commands consider not part of a word,
     according to the  syntax  table.    See  section  22.4  [Syntax],
                     ^                                    ^î     page  139.).    |N  negates  what  follows,  so that |N A matches
                         ^  ^                                   ^î     anything but A, and |N |B  matches  any  non-delimiter.    |S  is
     followed  by  a  parameter  character, and matches anything whose
                                           ^î     Lisp syntax equals the parameter.  So |S( matches  any  character
                                                     ^ ^î     given  the  syntax  of  an  open-parenthesis.   |N|SA matches any
     character which is not part of symbol names.

       ^                           ^              ______î       |O means "or", so that XYXY |O ZZZ matches either XYXY or  ZZZ.
     ^                                                   ^î     |O  can  be  used  more  than  once  in a pattern.  |Q quotes the
     following character, in case you want to search for  one  of  the
     special  control characters.  However, you can't quote an Altmode
     or a Return in this way because its specialness is at an  earlier
     stage of processing.

       Some  variables  are  supposed  to  have TECO search strings as
     their values.  For example, Page Delimiter is supposed  to  be  a
     search  string to match anything which should start a page.  This
                            ^î     is so that you can use |O to match several alternatives.  In  the
                                   ^    ^    ^   ^   ^   ^      ^î     values  of  such  variables,  |B,  |N,  |O, |Q, |S, |X and |] are
                                   ^          ^                    ^î     special, but Altmode is not.  |B through |X are quoted with a |Q,
         ^                         ^î     and |] is quoted with another |].

       The function Apropos (or, Help A)  and  all  similar  functions
     actually take TECO search strings as arguments, so you can search
     for  more  than  one substring at a time.  This is useful because
                          ^î     doing Apropos on word|Opara is not really slower  than  searching
     for just "word" or just "para".î     102                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              CHAPTER TWENTYî                              CHAPTER TWENTYî                              CHAPTER TWENTY
                             EDITING PROGRAMSî                             EDITING PROGRAMSî                             EDITING PROGRAMS



       Special   features   for  editing  programs  include  automatic
     indentation, comment alignment,  parenthesis  matching,  and  the
     ability  to  move  over  and  kill balanced expressions.  Many of
     these features are parameterized so that they can  work  for  any
     programming language.

                                                    _____  ____î       For   each  language  there  is  a  special  major  mode  which
     customizes EMACS slightly to be better suited to editing programs
     written in that language.  These modes  sometimes  offer  special
     facilities as well.

       See section 11.1 [Words], page 50.  Moving over words is useful
     for editing programs as well as text.

       See  section  11.2  [Paragraphs],  page  52.   Most programming
     language major modes define paragraphs to be  separated  only  by
     blank  lines  and  page  boundaries.    This  makes the paragraph
     commands useful for editing programs.

       See section 21 [Tags], page 122.  The TAGS package can remember
     all the labels or functions in a multi-file program and find  any
     one of them quickly.



     20.1 Major Modesî     20.1 Major Modesî     20.1 Major Modes


                                 _____ _____î       EMACS  has many different major modes, each of which customizes
     EMACS for editing text of a particular sort.  The major modes are
     mutually exclusive, and one major mode is current  at  any  time.
     When at top level, EMACS always says in the mode line which major
     mode you are in.

                                                     ___________ ____î       When EMACS starts up, it is in what is called Fundamental mode,
     which  means  that the character commands are defined so as to be
     convenient in general.  More precisely, in Fundamental mode every
     EMACS option is set in  its  default  state.    For  editing  any
     specific  type  of  text,  such as Lisp code or English text, you
     should switch to the appropriate major mode.  This tells EMACS to
     change the meanings of a few commands to become more specifically
     adapted to the language  being  edited.    Most  commands  remain
     unchanged;  the  ones  which  usually change are Tab, Rubout, and
     Linefeed.  In addition, the commands which  handle  comments  use
     the mode to determine how comments are to be delimited.î     103                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Selecting  a  new major mode is done with an M-X command.  Each
     major mode is the name of  the  function  to  select  that  mode.
     Thus,  you  can  enter Lisp mode by executing M-X Lisp (short for
     M-X Lisp Mode).  You can specify which major mode should be  used
     for editing a certain file by putting -*-<mode name>-*- somewhere
     in  the  first nonblank line of the file.  For example, this file
     has -*-SCRIBE-*-.  In a program, this  string  is  surrounded  by
     appropriate  other  characters  to hide it from the compiler in a
     comment.

       Many  major  modes  redefine  the  syntactical  properties   of
     characters  appearing  in the buffer.  See section 22.4 [Syntax],
     page 139.

       Most programming language major modes specify that  only  blank
     lines  separate  paragraphs.    This  is  so  that  the paragraph
     commands remain useful.  They also cause Auto Fill  mode  to  use
     the  definition  of Tab to indent the new lines it creates.  This
     is because most lines in a program are usually indented.

       To find out what a particular major  mode  redefines,  use  the
     command  M-X  List  Redefinitions  while  that mode is in effect.
     This command describes all the local variables  and  commands  of
     the selected buffer, in a form designed to be easy to understand.

       Major  modes  are  available  for  the  languages LISP, MUDDLE,
     MIDAS, PALX, IBM370 (assembler), CLU, FORTRAN,  MACSYMA,  PASCAL,
     PL1, SAIL, and TECO.

       There is also Text mode, designed for editing English text, and
     TEX  and  SCRIBE modes, for editing input to those text justifier
     programs.  See section 11 [Text], page 50.



     20.2 Compiling Your Programî     20.2 Compiling Your Programî     20.2 Compiling Your Program


       The command M-X Compile<cr> is  used  to  compile  the  visited
     file.    It  knows how to compile it based on the major mode; for
     example, in  TECO  mode,  it  invokes  the  generator  for  EMACS
     libraries.    Usually  it assumes that the major mode name is the
     name of the compiler or assembler to use.

       The first thing M-X Compile does is offer to save each  buffer.
     This  is because it is likely that other buffers contain parts of
     the same program you are about to compile.

       Then M-X Compile invokes the appropriate compiler and passes itî     104                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     the  name  of the visited file as the source file.  If you give a
     string argument to M-X Compile, that is passed  to  the  compiler
     also.    This  can  be used to specify switches or the name of an
     output file.

       The major mode or the file's local modes  list  can  specify  a
     different  compiler  by  setting  the  variable Compiler Filename
     locally.  They can specify switches to be  used  by  setting  the
     variable  Compiler  Switches  (the  default is to use no switches
     except those specified by the user in the string argument to  M-X
     Compile).

       After  compilation,  you  must  type  $P to resume EMACS.  When
     EMACS starts up again, it executes  the  value  of  the  variable
     After Compilation Hook, if that is nonzero.  This can be used for
     such  tasks as reading the compiler's file of error messages into
     EMACS.

       The major mode or the file's local modes  list  can  completely
     override the normal processing of M-X Compile by giving a nonzero
     local  value  to  the variable Compile Command.  This should be a
     TECO expression  which  takes  complete  responsibility  for  the
     compilation.    It  can find the filename to use in q-register 1.
        ____     ^î     It must use |\ to exit.  All the other hooks described above  are
     ignored.    This  is  often used when several input files must be
     compiled together in order to compile any of them.  See the  file
     AI:EMACS1;CCL  >  for  an  example  of  doing  this  for an EMACS
     library.



     20.3 Indentation Commands for Codeî     20.3 Indentation Commands for Codeî     20.3 Indentation Commands for Code


             Tab         Indents current line.
             Linefeed    Equivalent to Return followed by Tab.
             M-^         Joins two lines, leaving one space between if
                         appropriate.
             M-\         Deletes all spaces and tabs around point.
             M-M         Moves to the first nonblank character on  the
                         line.  


       Most  programming  languages  have some indentation convention.
     For Lisp code, lines are indented according to their  nesting  in
     parentheses.    For assembler code, almost all lines start with a
     single tab, but some have one or more spaces as well.   Indenting
     TECO code is an art rather than a science, but it is often useful
     to indent a line under the previous one.î     105                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Whatever  the  language, to indent a line, use the Tab command.
     Each major mode defines this  command  to  perform  the  sort  of
     indentation  appropriate  for  the  particular language.  In Lisp
     mode, Tab aligns the line according to its depth in  parentheses.
     No  matter where in the line you are when you type Tab, it aligns
     the line as a whole.  In MIDAS mode,  Tab  inserts  a  tab,  that
     being  the standard indentation for assembly code.  In TECO mode,
     Tab realigns the current line to match a previous line.  PL1 mode
     (See the  file  INFO;EPL1.)  knows  in  great  detail  about  the
     keywords  of  the language so as to indent lines according to the
     nesting structure.

       The command Linefeed (^R Indent New Line)  does  a  Return  and
     then  does  a Tab on the next line.  Thus, Linefeed at the end of
     the line makes a following blank line and supplies  it  with  the
     usual  amount  of  indentation.  Linefeed in the middle of a line
     breaks the line and supplies the usual indentation  in  front  of
     the new line.

       The   inverse  of  Linefeed  is  Meta-^  or  C-M-^  (^R  Delete
     Indentation).  This command deletes the indentation at the  front
     of  the  current  line, and the line separator as well.  They are
     replaced by a single space, or by no space if  before  a  ")"  or
     after  a  "(", or at the beginning of a line.  To delete just the
     indentation of a line, go to the beginning of the  line  and  use
     Meta-\ (^R Delete Horizontal Space), which deletes all spaces and
     tabs around the cursor.

       To insert an indented line before the current one, do C-A, C-O,
     and  then  Tab.   To make an indented line after the current one,
     use C-E Linefeed.

       To move over the indentation on a line,  use  Meta-M  or  C-M-M
     (^R Back to Indentation).  These commands move the cursor forward
     or back to the first nonblank character on the line.



     20.4 Automatic Display Of Matching Parenthesesî     20.4 Automatic Display Of Matching Parenthesesî     20.4 Automatic Display Of Matching Parentheses


       The  EMACS  parenthesis-matching  feature  is  designed to show
     automatically how parentheses balance in text as it is typed  in.
     When  this feature is enabled, after a close parenthesis or other
     close bracket character  is  inserted  the  cursor  automatically
     moves  for  an  instant  to  the  open  which  balances the newly
     inserted character.  The cursor stays at the open parenthesis for
     a second before returning home, unless you type  another  command
     before the second is up.î     106                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       It  is  worth emphasizing that the location of point, the place
     where your type-in will be  inserted,  is  not  affected  by  the
     parenthesis   matching   feature.    It  stays  after  the  close
     parenthesis, where it ought to be.  Only the cursor on the screen
     moves away and back.   You  can  type  ahead  freely  as  if  the
     parenthesis  display feature did not exist.  In fact, if you type
     fast enough, you won't see the cursor move.  You must pause after
     typing a close parenthesis to let the cursor  move  to  the  open
     parenthesis.

       The   variable  Display  Matching  Paren  controls  parenthesis
     display.  If it is  zero,  the  feature  is  disabled.    If  the
     variable  is  nonzero,  then  its absolute value is the number of
     seconds for the cursor to stay at  the  open  parenthesis  before
     coming  back  to  its real location.  The sign of the variable is
     also significant: if it is negative, then the open parenthesis is
     shown only if it is already on the screen.  If  the  variable  is
     positive,  then  EMACS  will actually shift text on the screen to
     show the open parenthesis.  The default setting of  the  variable
     is -1.

       An  additional  parameter  is  whether EMACS should warn you by
     ringing the bell if you type an unmatched close parenthesis.  The
     default is to warn you if you are editing  a  language  in  which
     parentheses  are  paramount,  such  as Lisp, but not to do so for
     languages in which parentheses are  not  so  crucial.    This  is
     controlled by the variable Permit Unmatched Paren.  When it is 1,
     you  are  never warned (they are always "permitted").  When it is
     0, you are warned, regardless of major mode.  When it is -1,  you
     are  warned  only  in  Lisp  mode  and similar modes (this is the
     default).   Note  that  these  modes  distinguish  themselves  by
     setting the variable locally to 0 if it was -1.  Unmatched parens
     are  always "permitted" in that EMACS will never refuse to insert
     them.

       While this feature was intended primarily for Lisp, it  can  be
     used just as well for any other language, and it is not dependent
     on  what major mode you are in.  It is expected that you wouldn't
     want it in Text mode, so Text  mode  sets  the  variable  Display
     Matching  Paren  locally  to zero.  If you do want the feature in
     Text mode, you can create a Text Mode Hook  variable  which  sets
     the variable back to -1.  See the file INFO;CONV, node Hooks, for
     more info on Text Mode Hook.  The way to control which characters
     trigger  this  feature  is  with the syntax table.  Any character
     whose Lisp syntax is  ")"  causes  the  matching  character  with
     syntax  "("  to  be shown.  Most major modes automatically set up
     the syntax table (See section 22.4 [Syntax], page 139.).

       The syntax table also controls what is done with  the  case  ofî     107                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     "mismatched"  parens,  as  in  "[  )".  The third slot in a close
     parenthesis character's syntax table entry should be  the  proper
     matching  open  parenthesis  character,  if you want this feature
     turned on.  If that slot contains a space instead, then any  open
     parenthesis  character  is  considered  a legitimate match.  If a
     close parenthesis is mismatched, it is inserted as always, but it
     rings the bell.

       The implementation of  this  feature  uses  the  TECO  flag  FS
     ^R PAREN$.  See section 22.5 [FS Flags], page 142.



     20.5 Manipulating Commentsî     20.5 Manipulating Commentsî     20.5 Manipulating Comments


       The  comment  commands  insert, kill and align comments.  There
     are also commands for moving through existing code and  inserting
     comments.


             M-;         Insert or align comment.
             C-;         The same.
             C-M-;       Kill comment.
             Return      Move  past  comment  terminator  and onto new
                         line.
             C-X ;       Set comment column.
             M-N         Move to Next line and insert comment.
             M-P         Move to Previous line and insert comment.
             M-J         Continue a comment on a new line.
             M-Linefeed  The same.  


       The command that creates  a  comment  is  Meta-;  or  Control-;
     (^R  Indent  for Comment).  If there is no comment already on the
     line, a new comment is created,  aligned  at  a  specific  column
                  _______ ______î     called  the  comment column.  The comment is created by inserting
     whatever string EMACS thinks should start comments in the current
     major mode.  Point is left after the comment-starting string.  If
     the text of the line goes  past  the  comment  column,  then  the
     indentation  is  done to a suitable boundary (usually, a multiple
     of 8).

       Meta-; can also be used to align an existing  comment.    If  a
     line  already  contains the string that starts comments, then M-;
     just moves point after it and re-indents it to the right  column.
     Exception:  comments starting in column 0 are not moved.

       Even when an existing comment is properly aligned, M-; is still
     useful for moving directly to the start of the comment.î     108                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Some languages require an explicit comment terminator, which is
     not  simply  the end of the line.  Although the language may then
     allow comments in the middle  of  the  line,  the  EMACS  comment
     commands  assume  that  a  comment is the last thing on the line.
     When there is a comment terminator, M-; inserts the terminator as
     well as the starter, and leaves point between them, so  that  you
     are  ready to insert the text of the comment.  When you are done,
     the  Return  command  given  immediately   before   the   comment
     terminator  acts as if it were at the end of the line already: it
     moves down to or creates a following blank line.    It  does  not
     break  the  existing  line  before  the comment terminator as you
     would expect.

       C-M-; (^R Kill Comment) kills the comment on the current  line,
     if there is one.  The indentation before the start of the comment
     is  killed  as well.  If there does not appear to be a comment in
     the line, nothing is done.  To reinsert the  comment  on  another
     line,  move  to  the end of that line, do C-Y, and then do M-; to
     realign it.


     20.5.1 Multiple Lines of Commentsî     20.5.1 Multiple Lines of Commentsî     20.5.1 Multiple Lines of Comments


       If you wish to align a large number of comments, you  can  give
     Meta-;  an  argument  and  it indents what comments exist on that
     many lines, creating none.  Point is left  after  the  last  line
     processed (unlike the no-argument case).

       When  adding  comments  to a long stretch of existing code, the
     commands M-N (^R Down Comment Line) and M-P (^R Up Comment  Line)
     may  be  useful.  They are like C-N and C-P except that they do a
     C-; automatically on each line as you move to it, and delete  any
     empty  comment  from the line as you leave it.  Thus, you can use
     M-N to move down through the code, putting text into the comments
     when you want to, and allowing the comments that you  don't  fill
     in to be removed because they remained empty.

       If  you are typing a comment and find that you wish to continue
     it  on  another  line,  you  can  use  the  command   Meta-J   or
     Meta-Linefeed  (^R Indent New Comment Line), which terminates the
     comment you are typing, creates or gobbles a new blank line,  and
     begins  a new comment indented under the old one.  When Auto Fill
     mode is on, going past the fill column  while  typing  a  comment
     causes  the  comment  to be continued in just this fashion.  Note
     that if the next line is not blank, a blank line is created,  and
     the  continuation  goes  on  that line.  By comparison, M-N would
     create a continuation comment on the next existing line of code.î     109                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     20.5.2 Double and Triple Semicolons in Lispî     20.5.2 Double and Triple Semicolons in Lispî     20.5.2 Double and Triple Semicolons in Lisp


       In  Lisp  code  there  are conventions for comments which start
     with more than one semicolon.   Comments  which  start  with  two
     semicolons are indented as if they were lines of code, instead of
     at   the  comment  column.    Comments  which  start  with  three
     semicolons are supposed to start  at  the  left  margin.    EMACS
     understands  these  conventions  by  indenting a double-semicolon
     comment using Tab, and by  not  changing  the  indentation  of  a
     triple-semicolon  comment  at  all.  (Actually, this rule applies
     whenever the  comment  starter  is  a  single  character  and  is
     duplicated).  Note that the :@ program considers a four-semicolon
     comment a subtitle in Lisp code.


     20.5.3 Options Controlling Commentsî     20.5.3 Options Controlling Commentsî     20.5.3 Options Controlling Comments


       The  comment  column  is stored in the variable Comment Column.
     You can set it  to  a  number  explicitly.    Alternatively,  the
     command  C-X ; (^R Set Comment Column) sets the comment column to
     the column point is at.  C-U C-X ; sets  the  comment  column  to
     match  the last comment before point in the buffer, and then does
     a Meta-; to align the current line's comment under  the  previous
     one.

       Many  major  modes  supply default local values for the comment
     column.  In addition, C-X  ;  automatically  makes  the  variable
     Comment  Column  local.    Otherwise,  if you change the variable
     itself, it changes globally (for all buffers) unless it has  been
     made  local  in  the  selected  one.   See section 22.7 [Locals],
     page 150.

       The string recognized as the start of a comment  is  stored  in
     the  variable Comment Start, while the string used to start a new
     comment is kept in Comment Begin (if that is zero, Comment  Start
     is  used  for  new  comments).  This makes it possible for you to
     have any ";" recognized  as  starting  a  comment  but  have  new
     comments begin with ";; ** ".

       The  string  used  to  end  a  comment  is kept in the variable
     Comment End.  In many languages no comment end is needed  as  the
     comment extends to the end of the line.  Then, this variable is a
     null string.

       If  Comment  Multi Line is nonzero, then Meta-Linefeed within a
     comment does not close the old comment and start a new comment on
     the new line.  Instead it allows the original comment  to  extendî     110                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     through  the  new  line.   This is legitimate if the language has
     explicit comment terminators.  Then it's a matter of taste.



     20.6 Lisp Mode and Muddle Modeî     20.6 Lisp Mode and Muddle Modeî     20.6 Lisp Mode and Muddle Mode


       Lisp's simple syntax makes it much  easier  for  an  editor  to
     understand;  as  a  result,  EMACS can do more for Lisp, and with
     less work, than for any other language.

       Lisp programs should be edited in Lisp mode.  In this mode, Tab
     is  defined  to  indent  the  current  line  according   to   the
     conventions  of Lisp programming style.  It does not matter where
     in the line Tab is used; the effect on the line is the same.  The
     function which does the  work  is  called  ^R  Indent  for  Lisp.
     Linefeed,  as  usual, does a Return and a Tab, so it moves to the
     next line and indents it.

       As in most modes where indentation is likely to vary from  line
     to  line,  Rubout  is  redefined to treat a tab as if it were the
     equivalent number of space (^R  Backward  Delete  Hacking  Tabs).
     This  makes  it possible to rub out indentation one position at a
     time without worrying whether it is made up of  spaces  or  tabs.
     Control-Rubout  does  the ordinary type of rubbing out which rubs
     out a whole tab at once.

       Paragraphs are defined to start only with blank lines  so  that
     the  paragraph commands can be useful.  Auto Fill indents the new
     lines which it creates.  Comments start with ";".  If  Atom  Word
     mode  is  in  effect,  them in Lisp mode the word-motion commands
     regard each Lisp atom as one word.

       The LEDIT library allows EMACS and Lisp to communicate, telling
     Lisp the new definitions of functions which you  edit  in  EMACS.
     See the file INFO;LEDIT.

       The  language Muddle is a variant form of Lisp which shares the
     concept of using parentheses  (of  various  sorts)  as  the  main
     syntactical construct.  It can be edited using Muddle mode, which
     is  almost  the same as Lisp mode and provides the same features,
     differing only in the syntax table used.î     111                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     20.6.1 Moving Over and Killing Lists and S-expressionsî     20.6.1 Moving Over and Killing Lists and S-expressionsî     20.6.1 Moving Over and Killing Lists and S-expressions


             C-M-F           Move Forward over s-expression.
             C-M-B           Move Backward.
             C-M-K           Kill s-expression forward.
             C-M-Rubout      Kill s-expression backward.
             C-M-U           Move Up and backward in list structure.
             C-M-(           The same.
             C-M-)           Move up and forward in list structure.
             C-M-D           Move Down and forward in list structure.
             C-M-N           Move forward over a list.
             C-M-P           Move backward over a list.
             C-M-T           Transpose s-expressions.
             C-M-@           Put mark after s-expression.
             M-(             Put      parentheses      around     next
                             s-expression(s).
             M-)             Move  past  next  close  parenthesis  and
                             re-indent.  


       By   convention,   EMACS   commands  that  deal  with  balanced
     parentheses are usually Control-Meta- characters.  They  tend  to
     be analogous in function to their Control- and Meta- equivalents.
     These  commands are usually thought of as pertaining to Lisp, but
     can be useful with any language in which some sort of parentheses
     exist (including English).

       To move forward over an s-expression,  use  C-M-F  (^R  Forward
     Sexp).  If the first significant character after point is an "(",
     C-M-F  moves  past the matching ")".  If the first character is a
     ")", C-M-F just moves past it.  If the character begins an  atom,
     C-M-F  moves  to  the  end  of  the atom.  C-M-F with an argument
     repeats that operation the specified  number  of  times;  with  a
     negative argument, it moves backward instead.

       The  command  C-M-B  (^R  Backward Sexp) moves backward over an
     s-expression; it is like C-M-F with the  argument  negated.    If
     there  are "'"-like characters in front of the s-expression moved
     over, they are moved over  as  well.    Thus,  with  point  after
     " 'FOO ", C-M-B leaves point before the "'", not before the "F".

       These  two  commands (and most of the commands in this section)
     do not know how to deal with the presence of comments.   Although
     that would be easy to fix for forward motion, for backward motion
     the  syntax  of  Lisp  makes  it  nearly impossible.  Comments by
     themselves can be dealt with,  but  handling  both  comments  and
     strings is impossible with local backward parsing.  In a line î     112                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         ((FOO ; " BAR


     are the open parentheses inside a string?  So C-M-B cannot handle
     comments, and C-M-F does not either for simplicity's sake.

       For  this  reason,  two  other  commands  which move over lists
     instead of s-expressions  are  often  useful.    They  are  C-M-N
     (^R  Forward  List)  and C-M-P (^R Backward List).  They act like
     C-M-F and C-M-B except that  they  don't  stop  on  atoms;  after
     moving over an atom, they move over the next expression, stopping
     after  moving  over  a  list.    With this command, you can avoid
     stopping after all of the words in a comment.

       Killing an s-expression at a time can be done  with  C-M-K  and
     C-M-Rubout  (^R  Forward  Kill  Sexp  and ^R Backward Kill Sexp).
     C-M-K kills the  characters  that  C-M-F  would  move  over,  and
     C-M-Rubout kills what C-M-B would move over.

       C-M-F  and  C-M-B  stay  at the same level in parentheses, when
                               __î     that's possible.  To move up one (or  n)  levels,  use  C-M-(  or
     C-M-)  (^R Backward Up List and ^R Forward Up List).  C-M-( moves
     backward up past one containing "(".  C-M-) moves forward up past
     one containing ")".  Given a positive  argument,  these  commands
     move  up the specified number of levels of parentheses.  C-M-U is
     another name for C-M-(, which is easier to  type,  especially  on
     non-Meta  keyboards.   If you use that name, it is useful to know
     that a negative argument makes the command move up forwards, like
     C-M-).

               ____î       To move down in list structure, use C-M-D (^R Down List).    It
     is nearly the same as searching for a "(".

       A  somewhat  random-sounding command which is nevertheless easy
     to use is C-M-T (^R Transpose Sexps), which  drags  the  previous
     s-expression across the next one.  An argument serves as a repeat
     count,  and  a  negative argument drags backwards (thus canceling
     out the effect of C-M-T with a positive argument).   An  argument
     of  zero, rather than doing nothing, transposes the s-expressions
     at the point and the mark.

       To make the region be the next s-expression in the buffer,  use
     or  C-M-@  (^R  Mark Sexp) which sets mark at the same place that
     C-M-F would move to.  C-M-@  takes  arguments  like  C-M-F.    In
     particular, a negative argument is useful for putting the mark at
     the beginning of the previous s-expression.

       The  commands  M-( ("^R  Insert ()") and M-) ("^R Move Over )")
     are designed for a  style  of  editing  which  keeps  parenthesesî     113                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     balanced at all times.  M-( inserts a pair of parentheses, either
     together  as  in  "()", or, if given an argument, around the next
     several  s-expressions,  and  leaves   point   after   the   open
     parenthesis.    Instead  of typing "(FOO)", you can type M-( FOO,
     which has the same effect except for leaving  the  cursor  before
     the  close  parenthesis.  Then you type M-), which moves past the
     close parenthesis, deleting any indentation preceding it (in this
     example there is none), and indenting with Linefeed after it.

       The library LSPUTL contains two other list commands.  Find  Pat
     searches  for  lists  which  contain several strings.  ^R Extract
     Sublist  replaces  a  list  with  one  of  its  sublists.     See
     section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.

       <level>M-X  Find  Pat$<mainstring>$<string1>$<string2> searches
     for a list which contains <mainstring>  at  a  depth  of  <level>
     lists  down,  and  contains <string1> and <string2> at any level.
     There can be any number of such additional strings to search for;
     there can be none of them.

       ^R Extract Sublist is meant to be  connected  to  a  character.
     Given an argument of <level>, it replaces the list <level> levels
     up from point with its sublist which starts after point.

       The  library  XLISP  contains  a  functions  for making various
     transformations on Lisp code:

       Lowercase Lisp Buffer changes all the Lisp code in  the  buffer
     to  lower case, without changing comments, strings, or slashified
     characters.    Uppercase  Lisp  Buffer   performs   the   inverse
     transformation.   Lowercase Lisp Region and Uppercase Lisp Region
     are similar but act only between point and mark.

       Change /  to  \  takes  Lisp  code  written  with  "/"  as  the
     character-quote  character  and  transforms  it  to  use  the new
     character-quote character, "\".  The meaning of  the  transformed
     code in the new syntax is the same as that of the old code in the
     old syntax.

       XLISP  contains  several  other  commands  which  transform old
     constructs into new ones.  They behave like Query Replace in that
     they display each occurrence of the old  construct  and  ask  you
     whether to change it to the new one.  A Space means yes, a Rubout
     means  no.    Here is a list of these commands, and what each one
     transforms.


     Modernize FUNCTION References
                     (FUNCTION ...) into #'...î     114                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Modernize QUOTE References
                     (QUOTE ...) into '...

     Modernize LAMBDA References
                     '(LAMBDA ...) into #'(LAMBDA ...)

     Modernize MAP References
                     (MAPxxx '... ...) into (MAPxxx #'... ...)

     Modernize NIL Occurrences
                     NIL into ()

     Modernize LAMBDA Combinations
                     ((LAMBDA (X) Y) ARG) into (LET ((X ARG)) Y)

     Modernize Strings
                     '|...| into "..."  


       facility   for  replacing  obsolete  or  old-fashioned  Maclisp
     constructs with equivalent modern ones.

       The  list  commands'  understanding  of  syntax  is  completely
     controlled  by the syntax table.  Any character can, for example,
     be declared to act like an open parenthesis.   See  section  22.4
     [Syntax], page 139.


     20.6.2 Commands for Manipulating Defunsî     20.6.2 Commands for Manipulating Defunsî     20.6.2 Commands for Manipulating Defuns


             C-M-[, C-M-A    Move to beginning of defun.
             C-M-], C-M-E    Move to end of defun.
             C-M-H           Put region around wHole defun.  


       In  EMACS,  an  expression  at  the  top level in the buffer is
              _____î     called a defun, regardless of what function is actually called by
     the expression, because such expressions usually call defun.

       In the remotest past, EMACS found defuns  by  moving  upward  a
     level  of  parentheses  until there were no more levels to go up.
     This required scanning all the way back to the beginning  of  the
     file.   To speed up the operation, EMACS now assumes that any "("
     (or any character with "(" as its Lisp syntax) in column 0 is the
     start of a defun.  This heuristic  is  nearly  always  right  and
     avoids the costly scan.

       The  commands  to  move to the beginning and end of the currentî     115                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     defun  are  C-M-[  (^R  Beginning  of Defun) and C-M-] (^R End of
     Defun).  Alternate names for these two  commands  are  C-M-A  for
     C-M-[  and  C-M-E  for  C-M-].  The alternate names are easier to
     type on many non-Meta keyboards.

       If you wish to operate on the current defun, use C-M-H (^R Mark
     Defun) which puts point at the beginning and mark at the  end  of
     the current or next defun.



     20.7 Lisp Grindingî     20.7 Lisp Grindingî     20.7 Lisp Grinding


       The  best way to keep Lisp code properly indented ("ground") is
     to use EMACS to re-indent it when  it  is  changed.    EMACS  has
     commands  to  indent  properly  either a single line, a specified
     number  of  lines,  or  all  of  the  lines   inside   a   single
     s-expression.


             Tab         In  Lisp  mode,  re-indents line according to
                         parenthesis depth.
             Linefeed    Equivalent to Return followed by Tab.
             M-^         Join two lines,  leaving  one  space  between
                         them if appropriate.
             C-M-Q       Re-indent all the lines within one list.
             C-M-G       Grind a list, moving code between lines.  


       The  basic  indentation  function  is ^R Indent for Lisp, which
     gives the current line the correct indentation as determined from
     the previous lines' indentation and parenthesis structure.   This
     function  is  normally found on C-M-Tab, but when in Lisp mode it
     is placed on Tab as well (Use Meta-Tab or C-Q  Tab  to  insert  a
     tab).    If  executed at the beginning of a line, it leaves point
     after the indentation; when given inside the text on the line, it
     leaves point fixed with respect to the characters around it.

       When  entering  a  large  amount  of  new  code,  use  Linefeed
     (^R Indent New Line), which is equivalent to a Return followed by
     a  Tab.    In  Lisp mode, a Linefeed creates or moves down onto a
     blank line, and then gives it the appropriate indentation.

       To join two lines together, use the  Meta-^  or  Control-Meta-^
     command  (^R  Delete  Indentation),  which  is  approximately the
     opposite of Linefeed.  It deletes any  spaces  and  tabs  at  the
     front  of  the  current line, and then deletes the line separator
     before the line.  A single  space  is  then  inserted,  if  EMACSî     116                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     thinks  that one is needed there.  Spaces are not needed before a
     close parenthesis, or after an open parenthesis.

       If you are dissatisfied about where Tab indents the second  and
     later  lines  of  an  s-expression,  you can override it.  If you
     alter the indentation of one of the lines yourself, then Tab will
     indent successive lines of the same list  to  be  underneath  it.
     This   is  the  right  thing  for  functions  which  Tab  indents
     unaesthetically.

       When you wish to re-indent code which has been altered or moved
     to a different level in the  list  structure,  you  have  several
     commands available.  You can re-indent a specific number of lines
     by  giving  the  ordinary  indent  command (Tab, in Lisp mode) an
     argument.  This indents as many lines as you say and moves to the
     line following them.  Thus, if you underestimate, you can  repeat
     the process later.

       You  can  re-indent  the  contents  of a single s-expression by
     positioning  point  before  the  beginning  of  it   and   typing
     Control-Meta-Q  (^R  Indent  Sexp).    The  line the s-expression
     starts on is not re-indented; thus, only the relative indentation
     with in the s-expression, and not its position, is changed.    To
     correct the position as well, type a Tab before the C-M-Q.

       Another  way  to  specify  the  range to be re-indented is with
     point and mark.  The command C-M-\ (^R Indent Region) applies Tab
     to every line whose first character is between  point  and  mark.
     In Lisp mode, this does a Lisp indent.

       A more powerful grind command which can move text between lines
     is  C-M-G  (^R Format Code).  You might or might not like it.  It
     knows in different ways about Lisp code and Macsyma code.


     20.7.1 Customizing Lisp Indentationî     20.7.1 Customizing Lisp Indentationî     20.7.1 Customizing Lisp Indentation


       The indentation pattern for a Lisp expression can depend on the
     function called by the expression.  For each Lisp  function,  you
     can  choose  among several predefined patterns of indentation, or
     define an arbitrary one with a TECO program.

       The standard pattern of indentation is as follows:  the  second
     line  of  the expression is indented under the first argument, if
     that is on the same line as  the  beginning  of  the  expression;
     otherwise,  the  second  line is indented one space more than the
     entire expression.  Each following line  is  indented  under  the
     previous line whose nesting depth is the same.î     117                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Another  indentation  pattern is used for functions whose names
     start with "def".  The second line of the expression is  indented
     two  spaces  more  than the entire expression.  The variable Lisp
     Special Indent Offset  (default  2)  controls  the  increment  in
     depth.    Each  following  line  indents  under the previous one.
     Again, lines starting at lower depths do not count.  Setting  the
     variable  Lisp Indent DEFAnything to zero turns this feature off.
     Then the standard pattern applies to def- functions by default.

       The indentation pattern for expressions that call the  function
     FOO  is  controlled specifically by the variable Lisp FOO Indent.
     If this variable does not exist,  the  standard  pattern  or  the
     def-  pattern  is  used.    If the variable does exist, its value
     should be one of these:


         -3          selects the standard or def- indentation pattern,
                     as if the variable did not exist.
         -2          selects the standard indentation  pattern.    The
                     def-  pattern  is  not used, even if the function
                     name starts with "def".
         -1          selects the def- indentation pattern, independent
                     of the function name  and  the  setting  of  Lisp
                     Indent DEFAnything.
         0 or more   selects  special form with body indentation.  The
                     value of the variable is the  number  of  special
                     arguments  that  precede  the body; thus, LET and
                     LAMBDA have one distinguished argument before the
                     body (the list of  bound  variables),  PROGN  has
                     none,   and   DO  has  two.    The  distinguished
                     expressions at the beginning are  indented  using
                     the standard pattern, but the first expression of
                     the  body, if it should occur at the beginning of
                     a line, is indented two spaces  deeper  than  the
                     entire  expression.   Following lines indent each
                     under the previous one as usual.    The  variable
                     Lisp  Special  Indent Offset (default 2) controls
                     the increment in depth.
         a string    should be a TECO expression which  implements  an
                     indentation pattern.  Initially, Lisp PROG Indent
                     is  defined  as  a  string  (the  definition of &
                     Standard Lisp PROG Indent) which detects tags and
                     indents them specially.


       The  variable  Lisp  Indent  Offset,  if  nonzero,  selects   a
     different  indentation  pattern  as the standard one.  It indents
     the second line of each expression that many spaces  deeper  than
     the enclosing expression.î     118                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Implementing and selecting among the above indentation patterns
     is  the  responsibility  of  the  definition of the variable Lisp
     Indentation Hook.  This variable must exist and its value must be
     a TECO program.  By default its value  is  the  definition  of  &
     Standard Lisp Indentation Hook.

       Whatever  its  value,  the  hook  is called with two arguments,
     which are the position in the buffer of the most recent  unclosed
     "("  and  the  buffer position of the beginning of the line to be
     indented.  The buffer position of the cursor at the time the  tab
     was  typed  is  stored as an offset from Z in qZ, so Z-qZ is that
     buffer position.  The hook should not modify the buffer.   If  it
     returns  0 or no value, the caller will use the horizontal cursor
     position of point as the column to indent to.  Hence,  to  indent
     under the "O" in PROG, it is sufficient to jump to that character
     in  the  buffer  and  return.  Alternatively, the hook can simply
     return the desired indentation column number as a value.

       The hook should return a nonzero precomma  value  if  following
     lines of the same expression should be indented individually.  If
     it  does  not  return  a  nonzero  precomma value, the caller may
     remember the indentation of this line and indent following  lines
     the same way.

       If Lisp FOO Indent has a TECO expression as its value, the same
     interface conventions apply to it.

       Different  Lisp-like languages can select an entirely different
     set of indentation patterns by changing the value of the variable
     Lisp Indent Language.  Normally the value of this variable is the
     string "Lisp".    All  the  variables  listed  above  with  names
     beginning  with  "Lisp" actually should have names beginning with
     the Lisp Indent Language.   Thus,  if  Lisp  Indent  Language  is
     changed  to "Muddle", then the indentation commands will look for
     variables Muddle Indent Offset, Muddle Indentation  Hook,  Muddle
     PROG Indent, etc.



     20.8 Editing Assembly-Language Programsî     20.8 Editing Assembly-Language Programsî     20.8 Editing Assembly-Language Programs


       MIDAS  mode  is  designed  for  editing programs written in the
     MIDAS assembler.  Major modes for other assemblers, such as PALX,
     also exist but differ only in the syntax table and in the name of
     the major mode hook that they will invoke.  (There is also IBM370
     mode, for 370 assembler, which is completely different.  Refer to
     the self-documentation of the IBM370 library for  information  on
     it).î     119                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       In  MIDAS  mode,  comments start with ";", and "<" and ">" have
     the syntax of parentheses.  In addition, there are  five  special
     commands  which understand the syntax of instructions and labels.
     These commands are:


             C-M-N       Go to Next label.
             C-M-P       Go to Previous label.
             C-M-A       Go to Accumulator field of instruction.
             C-M-E       Go to Effective Address field.
             C-M-D       Kill next word and its Delimiting  character.
                         


       Two other commands with slightly different uses are


             M-[         Move up to previous blank line.
             M-]         Move down to next blank line.  


       Any  line  which  is  not indented and is not just a comment is
     taken to contain a label.  The label  is  everything  up  to  the
     first  whitespace (or the end of the line).  C-M-N (^R Go to Next
     Label) and C-M-P (^R Go to  Previous  Label)  both  position  the
     cursor  right  at the end of a label; C-M-N moves forward or down
     and C-M-P moves backward or up.   At  the  beginning  of  a  line
     containing  a  label, C-M-N moves past it.  Past the label on the
     same line, C-M-P moves back to the end of it.    If  you  kill  a
     couple  of  indented  lines and want to insert them right after a
     label, these commands put you at just the right place.

       C-M-A (^R Go to AC Field) and C-M-E (^R Go  to  Address  Field)
     move  to  the  beginning  of  the  accumulator  (AC) or effective
     address fields of a PDP-10 instruction.  They always stay on  the
     same  line, moving either forward or backward as appropriate.  If
     the instruction contains no AC  field,  C-M-A  positions  to  the
     start of the address field.  If the instruction is just an opcode
     with  no AC field or address field, a space is inserted after the
     opcode and the cursor left after the space.  In PDP-11  programs,
     C-M-A  moves  to  the first operand and C-M-E moves to the second
     operand.

       Once you've gone to the beginning of the AC field you can often
     use C-M-D (^R Kill Terminated Word) to kill the AC name  and  the
     comma  which terminates it.  You can also use it at the beginning
     of a line, to kill a label and  its  colon,  or  after  a  line's
     indentation  to kill the opcode and the following space.  This is
     very convenient for moving a label from one line to another.   Inî     120                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     general,  C-M-D  is  equivalent  to  M-D C-D, except that all the
     characters are  saved  on  the  kill  ring,  together.    C-D,  a
     "deletion" command, doesn't save on the kill ring if not given an
     argument.

       The  M-[ and M-] commands are not, strictly speaking, redefined
     by MIDAS mode.  They go up or down to a  paragraph  boundary,  as
     usual.    However,  in  MIDAS  mode the criterion for a paragraph
     boundary is changed by setting the variable  Paragraph  Delimiter
     (See  section  11.2  [Paragraphs],  page  52.) so that only blank
     lines (and pages) delimit paragraphs.  So, M-[ moves  up  to  the
     previous blank line and M-] moves to the next one.



     20.9 Major Modes for Other Languagesî     20.9 Major Modes for Other Languagesî     20.9 Major Modes for Other Languages


       MACSYMA mode redefines the syntax of words and s-expressions in
     an  attempt  to  make  it  easier  to move over MACSYMA syntactic
     units.  In addition, the C-M-G "grind" command is told  to  grind
     text  as MACSYMA instead of as Lisp.  Also, the syntax of MACSYMA
     comments is understood.

       TECO mode is good for editing EMACS library source files.    It
     connects  Tab  to  ^R Indent Nested (see its self-documentation).
     Comments start with "!* " and end with "!".    In  addition,  the
     PURIFY  library, which contains many things useful for processing
     library sources (including the  commands  to  compile  them),  is
     loaded.    M-' and M-" are connected to functions ^R Forward TECO
     Conditional and ^R Backward TECO Conditional which  move  forward
     and  backward over balanced TECO conditionals.  In TECO mode on a
     terminal with a Meta key, it may be useful to set the  TECO  flag
     FS  CTLMTA$  which causes Control-Meta commands to insert Control
     characters.  See section 22.5 [FS Flags], page 142.

       CLU mode is for editing CLU code.  It is similar to LISP  mode,
     but  it  treats the statement nesting tokens like the appropriate
     sorts of parentheses.  It is in the library called CLU.  See  the
     file INFO;ECLU.

       PL1  mode  is for editing PL1 code, and causes Tab to indent an
     amount based on the previous statement type.   The  body  of  the
     implementation of PL1 mode is in the library PL1, which is loaded
     automatically when necessary.  See the file INFO;EPL1.

       PASCAL  mode  is similar to PL1 mode, for PASCAL.  It is in the
     library called PASCAL.  See the file INFO;EPASC.î     121                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       FORTRAN  mode  is  implemented by the FORTRAN library.  See the
     file INFO;EFORTRAN.

       There  are  major  modes  for   many   other   languages,   but
     documentation  for  them except that in the libraries themselves.
     Any volunteers to write some?  Meanwhile, you  can  look  at  the
     documentation  in  the  libraries.  See section 22.2 [Libraries],
     page 135.î     122                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            CHAPTER TWENTY-ONEî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-ONEî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE
                             THE TAGS PACKAGE.î                             THE TAGS PACKAGE.î                             THE TAGS PACKAGE.



       The  TAGS  package  remembers  the  locations  of  the function
     definitions in a file and enables  you  to  go  directly  to  the
     definition of any function, without searching the whole file.

       The functions of several files that make up one program can all
     be  remembered  together  if you wish; then the TAGS package will
     automatically select the appropriate file as well.



     21.1 How to Make a Tag Table for a Programî     21.1 How to Make a Tag Table for a Programî     21.1 How to Make a Tag Table for a Program


       To use the TAGS package, you must create a tag  table  for  the
     source  file  or  files in your package.  Normally, the tag table
     does not reside in any of those files,  but  in  a  separate  tag
     table  file  which  contains the names of the text files which it
     describes.  Tag table files are generated by the  :TAGS  program.
     The  same  program  can  be  used  to  update the tag table if it
     becomes very far out of date (slight inaccuracies do not matter).
     Tag tables  for  INFO  files  work  differently;  the  INFO  file
     contains  its own tag table, which describes only that file.  See
     section 21.8 [INFO tag tables], page 131, for how  to  deal  with
     them.

       The normal mode of operation of the :TAGS program is to read in
     an  existing  tag  table  and  update it by rescanning the source
     files that it describes.  The old tag  table  file  itself  tells
     :TAGS which source files to process.  When making a new tag table
     you  must start by making a skeleton.  Then :TAGS is used to turn
     the skeleton into an accurate tag table.

       A skeleton tag table is like a  real  one  except  that  it  is
     empty;  there  are  no tags in it.  It contains exactly this much
     data, for each source file that it is going to describe:


         <filenames>
         0,<language>
         ^î         |_


       The languages that :TAGS understands now are TECO, LISP, MIDAS,
     FAIL, PALX, MUDDLE, MACSYMA, TJ6, and  R.    MIDAS  will  do  forî     123                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     MACRO-10  files.    Any  incompletely  specified  filenames  will
     default to > and to the directory on which  the  tag  table  file
                                  ____î     itself  is stored.  The "0," must be present, since :TAGS expects
     that there will be a number in that place and will be  completely
                                                       ^       ____î     confused  if  there  is not.  The CRLF after each |_ also must be
                                          ^î     present.  You can omit both the last |_ and  its  CRLF  together,
     however.

       Thus,  a  skeleton  tag  table for the files EMACS;USRCOM > and
     EMACS;TAGS > would look like


         EMACS;USRCOM >
         0,TECO
         ^î         |_
         EMACS;TAGS >
         0,TECO
         ^î         |_


       If this were written out as EMACS;EMACS TAGS, you could then do
     


                              _______ ___ __ ____î         :TAGS EMACS;EMACS   (default FN2 is TAGS)


     which would tell :TAGS to read in the tag table, and  write  back
     an  up-to-date  tag  table  for the same set of source files.  To
     update the tag table because lots of changes have been made,  the
     same  command  to  the :TAGS program will work.  See section 21.6
     [Edit], page 129, for info on adding, deleting, or renaming files
     in existing tag tables.

       The recently developed TAGGEN library is contains the  function
     Generate  Tags  File  for updating a tag table.  This library may
     eventually replace the TAGS program, being easier  to  customize.
     In the mean time, you are encouraged to try it out.  Refer to its
     self-documentation for more information.



     21.2 How to Tell EMACS You Want to Use TAGSî     21.2 How to Tell EMACS You Want to Use TAGSî     21.2 How to Tell EMACS You Want to Use TAGS


       Before  you  can  use  the TAGS package to find a tag, you must
     tell EMACS the name of the tag table file you want to use.   This
     is done with the commandî     124                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         M-X Visit Tag Table$ <filenames> <cr>


     The FN2 of "TAGS" need not be mentioned.

       EMACS  can  only  know  about  one tag table file at a time, so
     doing a second M-X Visit Tag Table causes the  first  one  to  be
     forgotten (or written back if you have added definitions to it).

       Giving M-X Visit Tag Table a nonzero numeric argument, as in 


         C-U 1 M-X Visit Tag Table$ <filenames> <cr>


     has  the additional effect of setting the variable Tags Find File
     nonzero, which causes the TAGS package to use  Find  File  rather
     than  Visit  File when it needs to switch files.  This causes all
     the files to remain resident in the EMACS, in different  buffers.
     In  the  default mode, visiting a tag in a different file read it
     in on top of the old file, in the same buffer (but it  offers  to
     write out changes if there are any).  Warning: you can easily run
     out  of  address space by making too many buffers, this way.  See
     section 24.2.5 [Storage Exhausted], page 161. .

       Visit Tag Table is  essentially  equivalent  to  selecting  the
     buffer  *TAGS*  and  visiting  the tag table file in that buffer,
     then returning to the previously selected  buffer.    Afterwards,
     M-X  List Buffers will show the buffer *TAGS* visiting that file.
     The only difference is that  Visit  Tag  Table  causes  the  TAGS
     library to be loaded.



     21.3 Jumping to a Tagî     21.3 Jumping to a Tagî     21.3 Jumping to a Tag


       To  jump  to  the  definition  of  a  function, use the command
     Meta-Period <tag name>  <cr>.    You  will  go  straight  to  the
     definition  of the tag.  If the definition is in a different file
     then TAGS visits that file.  If it is  in  the  same  file,  TAGS
     leaves the mark behind and prints "^@" in the echo area.

       You do not need to type the complete name of the function to be
     found;  any  substring  will do.  But this implies that sometimes
     you won't get the function you intended.  When that happens,  C-U
     Meta-Period will find the "next" function matching what you typed
     (next,  in  the order of listing in the tag table).  Thus, if you
     want to find the definition of X-SET-TYPE-1 and you specify  justî     125                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     TYPE-1,  you  might  find  X-READ-TYPE-1 instead.  You could then
     type C-U Meta-Period until you reach X-SET-TYPE-1.

       If you want to make sure you reach a precise function the first
     time, you should just include a character of context  before  and
     after  its name.  Thus, in a Lisp program, put a space before and
     after the function name.  In a  MIDAS  program,  put  a  linefeed
     before it and a colon after.

       If  Meta-Period  is  used  before  M-X Visit Tag Table has been
     done, it asks for the name of a tag table file.  After  you  type
     this  name and a <cr>, you type the name of the tag as usual.  If
     the  variable  Tag  Table  Filenames  exists,  it  specifies  the
     defaults for the filename.

       Typing  an  Altmode  as  the first character of the argument to
     Meta-Period allows you to switch to a new tag table.  It  prompts
     for the tag table filenames, then prompts again for the tag.



     21.4 Other Operations on Tag Tablesî     21.4 Other Operations on Tag Tablesî     21.4 Other Operations on Tag Tables


     21.4.1 Adding a New Function to a Tag Tableî     21.4.1 Adding a New Function to a Tag Tableî     21.4.1 Adding a New Function to a Tag Table


       When  you define a new function, its location doesn't go in the
     tag table automatically.  That's because EMACS  can't  tell  that
     you  have  defined  a function unless you tell it by invoking the
     function ^R Add Tag.  Since the operation of adding a  tag  to  a
     tag  table  has proved not to be very necessary, this function no
     longer placed on any character, by default.  You can invoke  with
     M-X  or connect it to a character if you like.  For this section,
     let's assume you have placed it on C-X Period.

       When you type the command C-X Period, the pointer should be  on
     the  line  that  introduces  the  function  definition, after the
     function name and the punctuation that ends it.  Thus, in a  Lisp
     program,  you might type "(DEFUN FOO " (note the space after FOO)
     and then type the C-X Period.  In a MIDAS program, you might give
     the C-X Period after typing "FOO:".  In a TECO program  in  EMACS
     format, you might type C-X Period after "!Set New Foo:!".

       ^R  Add Tag modifies only the copy of the tag table loaded into
     EMACS.  To modify the tag table file itself, you must cause it to
     be saved.  M-X Save All Files is the easiest way to do this.

       Although local modifications to  a  file  do  not  degrade  theî     126                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     efficiency  of  the TAGS package or require that the tag table be
     updated with :TAGS, moving a function a great  distance  make  it
     much  slower  to find that function.  In this case, you can "add"
     the function to the tag table with C-X Period to give  the  table
     its  new  location.    Or  you can just run :TAGS again to update
     everything, as is usually done.


     21.4.2 How to Process All the Files in a Tag Tableî     21.4.2 How to Process All the Files in a Tag Tableî     21.4.2 How to Process All the Files in a Tag Table


       The TAGS package  contains  a  function  M-X  Next  File  which
     visits,  one  by one, all the files described by the selected tag
     table.  This is useful when there is something to be done to  all
     of the files in the package.  To start off the sequence, do C-U 1
     M-X  Next  File,  which  visits  the  first  file.   When you are
     finished operating on one file, do M-X Next File (no argument) to
     see the next.  When all the files have been processed,  M-X  Next
     File gives an error.

       The files of the package are visited in the order that they are
     mentioned in the tag table, and the current place in the sequence
     is remembered by the pointer in the buffer *TAGS* which holds the
     tag  table.   Thus, if you visit a tag in a different file in the
     middle of a M-X Next File sequence, you will screw it  up  unless
     you return to the proper file again by visiting a tag (or go into
     the  buffer *TAGS* and reset the pointer).  However, visiting any
     other files directly, not using TAGS, does not interfere with the
     sequence, and the next M-X Next File will go just where it  would
     have gone.

       Next File is also useful as a subroutine in functions that wish
     to  perform an automatic transformation (such as a Query Replace)
     on each file.  Such  functions  should  call  Next  File  with  a
     precomma  argument  as  in  1,M(M.M  Next File$) or 1,1M(M.M Next
     File$).  The precomma  argument  tells  Next  File  to  return  0
     instead  of  giving  an  error  when  there  are no more files to
     process.  Normally, it returns -1.

       Here is an example of TECO code to do a Query Replace on all of
     the files listed in the visited tag table:


         1M(M.M Next File$)
         < M(M.M Query Replace$)FOO$BAR$
           1,M(M.M Next File$);>


       Tags Search and Tags Query Replace (see below) both work  using
     Next File.î     127                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     21.4.3 Multi-File Searches and Replacementsî     21.4.3 Multi-File Searches and Replacementsî     21.4.3 Multi-File Searches and Replacements


       The  TAGS  package  contains  a function Tags Search which will
     search through all of the files listed in the visited  tag  table
     in the order they are listed.  Do 


         M-X Tags Search$<string><cr>


     to  find every occurrence of <string>.  <string> is a TECO search
                                                              ^    ^î     string in which special TECO search characters such  as  |O,  |X,
     ^    ^         ^î     |N,  |B,  and  |Q  are  allowed.    See section 19.3 [TECO Search
     Strings], page 101.

       When M-X Tags Search reaches the end of the buffer,  it  visits
     the  next  file  automatically, typing its name in the echo area.
     As soon as M-X Tags Search finds one occurrence, it returns.  But
     it defines the command Control-Period to resume the  search  from
     wherever point is.

       M-X  Tags Query Replace does a Query Replace over all the files
     in a tag table.  Like M-X Tags Search, it sets Control-. up to be
     a command to continue the Query Replace,  in  case  you  wish  to
     exit, do some editing, and then resume scanning.

       With  Tags  Find  File  set  nonzero, Tags Search or Tags Query
     Replace could easily require more buffers  than  EMACS  has  room
     for.  To prevent such a problem, they do not always put each file
     in a separate buffer.  If Tags Search or Tags Query Replace wants
     to search a file which is already visited in some buffer, it uses
     the  copy  in  that  buffer.  But if the file is not present, and
     Tags Find File is 1, then instead  of  visiting  it  in  its  own
     buffer,  they  visit  it  in a buffer named *Tags Search*.  So at
     most one new buffer is created.  If Tags Find File is  2,  a  new
     buffer is created for each file.

       The  library  MQREPL  enables  you to use Next File to repeat a
     sequence of many Query Replace commands  over  a  set  of  files,
     performing all the replacements on one file at a time.


     21.4.4 Miscellaneous Applications of Tagsî     21.4.4 Miscellaneous Applications of Tagsî     21.4.4 Miscellaneous Applications of Tags


       M-X  List  Tags$<file><cr>  lists all the tags in the specified
     file.  Actually, all the files  in  the  tag  table  whose  names
     contain the string <file> are listed.î     128                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       M-X  Tags  Apropos$<pat><cr>  lists  all known tags whose names
     contain <pat>.

       M-X Tags File List inserts in the buffer a list  of  the  files
     known in the visited tag table.

       M-X  Tags  Rescan  runs  :TAGS  over  the visited tag table and
     revisits it.  This is the most convenient way to update  the  tag
     table.

       M-X View Arglist$<tag><cr> lets you look briefly at the line on
     which  a  tag  is  defined,  and  at  the lines of comments which
     precede the definition.  This is a good  way  to  find  out  what
     arguments  a  function  needs.   The file is always loaded into a
     separate buffer, when this command is used.

       M-X What Tag? tells you which function's definition you are in.
     It looks through the tag table for  the  tag  which  most  nearly
     precedes point.



     21.5 What Constitutes a Tagî     21.5 What Constitutes a Tagî     21.5 What Constitutes a Tag


       In  Lisp  code, a function definition must start with an "(" at
     the beginning of a line, followed immediately with an atom  which
     starts  with  "DEF"  (and  does  not start with "DEFP"), or which
     starts with "MACRO", or which starts with "ENDF".  The next  atom
     on  the  line is the name of the tag.  If there is no second atom
     on the line, there is no tag.

       In MIDAS code, a tag is any symbol that occurs at the beginning
     of a line and is terminated with a colon or an equal sign.  MIDAS
     mode is good for MACRO-10 also.

                                                              ^î       FAIL code is like MIDAS code, except that one or  two  |A's  or
     "^"'s  are  allowed  before a tag, spaces are allowed between the
     tag name and the colon or equal sign,  and  _  is  recognized  as
     equivalent to =.

       PALX  code  is  like MIDAS code, except that spaces are allowed
     between a tag and the following colon or equals, and  local  tags
     such as "10$" are ignored.

       In  TECO  code,  a tag starts with an "!" and ends with a ":!".
     There may be any number of tags on a line, but the first one must
     start at the beginning of a line.î     129                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       In  MUDDLE code, a tag is identified by a line that starts with
     "<DEFINE " or "<DEFMAC ", followed by a symbol.

       In MACSYMA code, a function definition is recognized when there
     is a symbol at the beginning of a line, terminated with a "("  or
     "[",  and  there  is  a  ":" later on in the line.  If the symbol
     itself is  terminated  with  a  ":",  a  variable  definition  is
     recognized.

       In R text, any line which starts with ".de" or ".am" or ".rtag"
     defines  a  tag.   The name of the tag is what follows, up to the
     second run of spaces or the end of the line.  There is no ".rtag"
     in R; define it to be a null macro, if you like, and  use  it  to
     put in tags for chapters, or anything else.  Any macro whose name
     starts  with  "de"  or  "am"  or  "rtag",  such  as  ".define" or
     ".amplify", also defines a tag.

       In TJ6 text, any line which starts with ".C TAG" starts a  tag.
     The  name  of the tag is whatever follows the spaces which should
     follow the "C TAG", up to the next space or the end of the line.



     21.6 Adding or Removing Source Filesî     21.6 Adding or Removing Source Filesî     21.6 Adding or Removing Source Files


       A tag table file is a sequence of entries, one per file.   Each
     entry looks like


         <filenames>
         <count>,<language>
         <data lines>
         ^î         |_


       <filenames>   are  the  fully  defaulted  names  of  the  file,
     <language> is one  of  the  languages  that  TAGS  knows  how  to
     process,   and  <data  lines>  are  the  actual  tag  information
                                             ^  ____î     (described below).  The CRLF after each |_ must be present.   You
                            ^î     can omit both the last |_ and its CRLF together, however.

       A  tags table file is for the most part an ordinary ASCII file,
     and any changes you make in it, including changes to  the  source
     files' names, will do what they appear to do.

       The  one  exception  is  that  each  entry contains a count, in
                                                               ^î     decimal, of the number of characters in it, including the |_  and
     CRLF.    If  you edit the contents of an individual source file'sî     130                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     entry,  and  change its length, then the tag table is no good for
     use in editing until the count is updated.  This is usually  done
     by  running :TAGS over it.  :TAGS ignores the specified count and
     always writes the correct count.  If you are sure that the length
     is unchanged, or if you change the count manually,  then  running
     :TAGS is not necessary, but you do so at your own risk.

       Thus,  if  you  are  changing  a source file's name, you should
     simply change the name where it is present in the tag table,  and
     run :TAGS over it if necessary.

       To  add  a  new source file, simply insert a dummy entry of the
     sort used in making a new tag table. Then use :TAGS to update the
     tag table.  The dummy will turn into a real entry.

       You can delete a source file from a tag table by  deleting  its
     entire  entry.    Since  the  counts of the remaining entries are
     still valid, you need not run :TAGS over the file again.  You can
     also change the order of the entries without doing any harm.  The
     order of the entries matters if there are tags  which  appear  in
     more than one source file.

       You  can edit everything else in the tag table too, if you want
     to.  You might want to change a language name once  in  a  while,
     but  I  doubt  you  will  frequently  want to add or remove tags,
     especially since that would all be undone  by  the  next  use  of
     :TAGS!



     21.7 How a Tag Is Described in the Tag Tableî     21.7 How a Tag Is Described in the Tag Tableî     21.7 How a Tag Is Described in the Tag Table


       A tag table file consists of one or more entries in succession.
     Each entry lists the tags of one source file, and has the overall
     format described in the previous section, containing zero or more
     lines  describing tags.  Here we give the format of each of those
     lines.

       Starting with the third line of the tag table entry, each  line
     describes  a  tag.  It starts with a copy of the beginning of the
     line that the tag is defined on, up through the tag name and  its
     terminating punctuation.  Then there is a rubout, followed by the
     character  position  in  decimal  of  the place in the line where
     copying stopped.  For example, if  a  line  in  a  MIDAS  program
     starts with "FOO:"  and the colon is at position 602 in the file,
     then the line describing it in the tag table would beî     131                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         FOO:<rubout>603


       One  line can describe several tags, if they are defined on the
     same line; in fact, in that case, they must be on the  same  line
     in the tag table, since it must contain everything before the tag
     name on its definition line.  For example, 


         !Foo:! !Bar:!


     in  a  file  of TECO code followed by character number 500 of the
     file would turn into 


         !Foo:! !Bar:!<rubout>500


     EMACS will be able to use that line to find either  FOO  or  BAR.
     :TAGS knows how to create such things only for TECO files, at the
     moment.    They  aren't  necessary  in Lisp or MACSYMA files.  In
     MIDAS files, :TAGS simply ignores all but  the  first  tag  on  a
     line.



     21.8 Tag Tables for INFO Structured Documentation Filesî     21.8 Tag Tables for INFO Structured Documentation Filesî     21.8 Tag Tables for INFO Structured Documentation Files


       INFO  files  are  divided up into nodes, which the INFO program
     must search for.  Tag tables for these files are designed to make
     the INFO program run faster.  Unlike a normal tag table, the  tag
     table  for  an  INFO file resides in that file and describes only
     that file.  This is so that  INFO,  when  visiting  a  file,  can
     automatically use its tag table if it has one.  INFO uses the tag
     tables  of  INFO  files  itself, without going through the normal
     TAGS package, which has no knowledge of  INFO  file  tag  tables.
     Thus,  INFO  file  tag tables and normal ones resemble each other
     only in their appearance and purpose, and  that  for  convenience
     the  same  :TAGS  program  generates  both.    In  use,  they are
     unrelated.

       To create a tag table in an INFO file, you must first put in  a
     skeleton.    This  skeleton  must be very close to the end of the
     file (at most 8 lines may follow it, or INFO will not notice it),
                                               ^     ^ ^î     and it must start on the line following a |_ or |_|L which ends a
     node.  Its format is as follows:î     132                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         ^ ^î         |_|L
         Tag Table:
         ^î         |_
         End Tag Table


       No  nodes  may follow the tag table, or :TAGS will not put them
     in it.  :TAGS is one pass and after writing the  tag  table  into
     the file it copies the rest of the input file with no processing.

       To  turn the skeleton into the real thing, or to update the tag
     table, run :TAGS on the file and specify the /I switch, as in


         :TAGS INFO;EMACS/I


       :TAGS will process the file and replace the old  tag  table  or
     skeleton  with  an  up-to-date  tag table.  The /I identifies the
     specified file as an INFO file rather  than  a  tag  table  file.
     Also, it makes the default FN2 ">" rather than the usual "TAGS".

       Once the tag table is constructed, INFO will automatically make
     use  of  it.    A  tag  in  an INFO file is just a node; whatever
                                                               ^î     follows "Node:" on a line whose predecessor contains  a  "|_"  is
     taken to be a tag.  The character which terminates the node name,
     which  may  be  a comma, tab, or CRLF, is not included in the tag
     table.  Instead, the rubout comes right after the tag name.  This
     is to make it easy for INFO to demand  an  exact  match  on  node
     names,  rather  than  the  substring match which the TAGS package
     normally uses.

       Tag tables in INFO files must be kept  close  to  up  to  date.
     INFO will not find the node if its start has moved more than 1000
     characters before the position listed in the tag table.  For best
     results,  you  should  update an INFO file's tag table every time
     you modify more than a few characters of it.î     133                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            CHAPTER TWENTY-TWOî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-TWOî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO
                           SIMPLE CUSTOMIZATIONî                           SIMPLE CUSTOMIZATIONî                           SIMPLE CUSTOMIZATION



       In this chapter we describe the many simple ways of customizing
     EMACS without knowing how to write TECO programs.

       One   form   of  customization,  reconnection  of  commands  to
     functions, was discussed above in  the  explanation  of  how  M-X
     commands  work.    See  section  5.2.3  [Reconnecting  Commands],
     page 26.



     22.1 Minor Modesî     22.1 Minor Modesî     22.1 Minor Modes


       Minor modes are options which you can use or not.  For example,
     Auto Fill mode is a  minor  mode  in  which  Spaces  break  lines
     between  words  as you type.  All the minor modes are independent
     of each other and of the selected major mode.  Most  minor  modes
     say in the mode line when they are on; for example, "Fill" in the
     mode line means that Auto Fill mode is on.

       Each minor mode is the name of the function that can be used to
     turn it on or off.  With no argument, the function turns the mode
     on  if  it  was  off  and  off  if  it  was on.  This is known as
     ________î     toggling.  A positive argument always turns the mode on,  and  an
     explicit  zero  argument  or  a negative argument always turns it
     off.  All the minor mode functions are suitable for connecting to
     single or double character commands if you want to enter and exit
     a minor mode frequently.

       Auto Fill mode  allows  you  to  type  text  endlessly  without
     worrying  about the width of your screen.  Line separators are be
     inserted where needed to prevent lines from  becoming  too  long.
     See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

       Auto   Save   mode  protects  you  against  system  crashes  by
     periodically saving the file you  are  visiting.    Whenever  you
     visit  a  file,  auto  saving  is enabled if Auto Save Default is
     nonzero; in addition, M-X Auto  Save  allows  you  to  turn  auto
     saving on or off in a given buffer at any time.  See section 13.3
     [Auto Save], page 72.

       Atom  Word  mode causes the word-moving commands, in Lisp mode,
     to move over Lisp atoms instead of words.  Some people like this,
     and others don't.  In any case, the s-expression motion  commandsî     134                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     can  be  used  to  move over atoms.  If you like to use segmented
     atom names  like  FOOBAR-READ-IN-NEXT-INPUT-SOURCE-TO-READ,  then
     you  might  prefer not to use Atom Word mode, so that you can use
     M-F to move over just part of the atom, or C-M-F to move over the
     whole atom.

       Overwrite mode causes ordinary printing characters  to  replace
     existing text instead of shoving it over.  It is good for editing
     pictures.    For  example,  if  the point is in front of the B in
     FOOBAR, then in Overwrite mode typing a G changes it  to  FOOGAR,
     instead  of  making it FOOGBAR as usual.  Also, Rubout is changed
     to turn the previous character into a space instead  of  deleting
     it.

       SAIL  Character mode causes ASCII control characters in text to
     display as themselves, with no conversion.  This assumes that the
     terminal uses codes 200 and above for cursor motion and  erasure,
     and  can  display  all  the  ASCII  control characters as graphic
                                           ^î     characters.    The  command   Control-|B   runs   this   command.
             ^î     Control-|B  is  a  character which can generally only be typed on
     terminals which can display the ASCII control characters  in  the
     appropriate fashion.

       Word  Abbrev  mode  allows  you  to  define  abbreviations that
     automatically expand as you type them.  For example, "wam"  might
     expand  to  "word  abbrev mode".  The abbreviations may depend on
     the major (e.g. Lisp, Text, ...) mode you are currently in.    To
     use  this,  you  must  load  the  WORDAB library.  See section 25
     [Wordab], page 172.

       Indent Tabs mode controls whether indentation commands use tabs
     and spaces or just spaces to indent with.  Usually they use both,
     but you might want to use only spaces in a file to  be  processed
     by  a  program or system which doesn't ignore tabs, or for a file
     to be shipped to a system like Multics on which tab stops are not
     every 8 characters.

       Most minor modes are actually controlled  by  variables.    The
     mode  is  on  if the variable is nonzero.  Setting the minor mode
     with a command works by changing the variable.  This  means  that
     you can turn the modes on or off with Edit Options, or make their
     values  local  to  a  buffer.    See  section  22.3  [Variables],
     page 137.

       You could also put a minor mode in the local modes  list  of  a
     file,  but that is usually bad practice.  This is because usually
     the preference for a minor mode is usually a matter of individual
     style rather than a property of the file per se.   To  make  this
     more  concrete, it is a property of a file that it be filled to aî     135                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     certain column, but use of Auto Fill mode to accomplish that is a
     matter  of  taste.   So it would be good practice for the file to
     specify the value of Fill Column, but bad practice for  the  file
     to specify the value of Auto Fill Mode.

       If  you  find  yourself constantly tempted to turn on Auto Fill
     mode in local modes lists, what you probably really  want  is  to
     have  Auto  Fill mode on whenever you are in Text mode.  This can
     be accomplished with the following code in an EVARS file:  


         Text Mode Hook: 1M.LAuto Fill Mode$


     Suffice it to explain that this  is  TECO  code  to  be  executed
     whenever Text mode is entered, which makes the variable Auto Fill
     Mode local to the buffer with local value 1.



     22.2 Libraries of Commandsî     22.2 Libraries of Commandsî     22.2 Libraries of Commands


       All  EMACS  functions,  including  the  ones  described in this
     document, reside in libraries.   A  function  is  not  accessible
     unless  the  library  that  contains  it  is loaded.  Every EMACS
     starts out with one library loaded:  the  EMACS  library.    This
     contains  all of the functions described in this document, except
     those explicitly stated to be elsewhere.    Other  libraries  are
     provided  with  EMACS,  and  can  be  loaded  automatically or on
     request  to  make  their  functions  available.    See  section
     [Catalogue], page 234, for a list of them.

       To  load  a  library,  say M-X Load Library$<libname><cr>.  The
     library is found, either on your own directory or  whichever  one
     you  specify,  or on the EMACS directory, and loaded in.  All the
     functions in the library are then available for  use.    Whenever
     you  use  M-X, the function name you specify is looked up in each
     of the libraries which you  have  loaded,  more  recently  loaded
     libraries  first.   The first definition found is the one that is
     used.

       For example, if you load the PICTURE library, you can then  use
     M-X Edit Picture to run the Edit Picture function which exists in
     that library.

       In  addition to making functions accessible to M-X, the library
     may connect some of them to command characters.  This is done  by
     the  library's  &  Setup  function  (See the file INFO;CONV, nodeî     136                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Lib.).    If  you give Load Library an argument, the setup is not
     done.

       You can also load a library temporarily, just  long  enough  to
     use  one  of  the  functions  in it.  This avoids taking up space
     permanently with the library.  Do  this  with  the  function  Run
     Library,  as  in  M-X  Run$<libname>$<function  name><cr>.    The
     library <libname> is loaded in,  and  <function  name>  executed.
     Then  the library is removed from the EMACS job.  You can load it
     in again later.

       M-X  List  Loaded  Libraries  types   the   names   and   brief
     descriptions of all the libraries loaded, last loaded first.  The
     last one listed is always the EMACS library.

       You  can  get  a  brief  description  of all the functions in a
     library with M-X List Library$<libname><cr>, whether the  library
     is  loaded  or not.  This is a good way to begin to find out what
     is in a library that has no  INFO  documentation.    Continue  by
     loading  the  library  and  using Help D to inquire further about
     whichever functions looked interesting.

       The function Kill Libraries can be used  to  discard  libraries
     loaded  with  Load Library.  (Libraries used with Run Library are
     discarded  automatically).    However,  of  all   the   libraries
     presently  loaded,  only  the  most  recently  loaded  one can be
     discarded.  Kill Libraries offers to kill  each  loaded  library,
     most recently loaded first.  It keeps killing libraries until you
     say  to keep one library.  Then it returns, because the remaining
     libraries cannot be deleted if that library is kept.

       Libraries are loaded automatically in the course  of  executing
     certain  functions.    You  will  not  normally notice this.  For
     example, the TAGS library is automatically loaded in whenever you
     use M-. or Visit Tag Table for the first time.  This  process  is
                ___________î     known  as  autoloading.   It is used to make the functions in the
     TAGS library available without the user's having to know to  load
     the  library  himself,  while  not  taking up space in EMACSes of
     people who aren't using them.  It works by  simply  calling  Load
     Library  on  the  library  known  to  be needed.  Another kind of
     autoloading loads a library  temporarily,  the  way  Run  Library
     does.  This is done when you use the DIRED function, for example,
     since  the  DIRED  library is not needed after the DIRED function
     returns.  (This does not use Run Library; it uses M.A,  which  is
     what Run Library uses).

       You can make your own libraries, which you and other people can
     then use, if you know how to write TECO code.  See the file INFO;
     CONV, node Lib, for more details.î     137                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     22.3 Variablesî     22.3 Variablesî     22.3 Variables


       A variable is a name which is associated with a value, either a
     number  or  a  string.  EMACS uses many variables internally, and
     has  others  whose  purpose  is  to  be  set  by  the  user   for
     customization.    (They  may  also  be set automatically by major
     modes.)  One example of  such  a  variable  is  the  Fill  Column
     variable,  which  specifies  the position of the right margin (in
     characters from the left margin) to  be  used  by  the  fill  and
     justify commands.

       The  easiest way for the beginner to set a named variable is to
     use the function Edit Options.  This shows you a list of selected
     variables which you are likely to want to change,  together  with
     their  values,  and  lets  you  edit them with the normal editing
     commands in a recursive editing level.  Don't make any changes in
     the names, though!  Just change the values.  Digits with maybe  a
     minus  sign  stand  for  a  numeric  value of the variable, while
     string values are enclosed  in  doublequotes.    Each  option  is
     followed  by  a  comment which says what the option is for.  Type
     the Help character for more information on the format used.

       When you are finished, exit Edit Options using  C-M-C  and  the
     changes will take effect.  If you decide not to make the changes,
     C-]  gets  out  without  redefining the options.  See section 6.3
     [Recursive Editing Levels], page 30.

       If you give Edit Options a string argument, it shows  you  only
     the  options  whose  names  include the string.  For example, M-X
     Edit Options$Fill<cr> shows only the options that have "Fill"  in
     their  names.  This is much more convenient, if you know what you
     plan to do.

       However, Edit Options can be used only to set a variable  which
     already  exists, and is marked as an option.  Some commands refer
     to variables which do not exist in the initial environment.  Such
     commands always use a default value  if  the  variable  does  not
     exist.    In these cases you must create the variable yourself if
     you wish to use it to alter the behavior of the command.  Use M-X
     Set Variable for this.  You can set the  variable  to  a  numeric
     value by doing 


         C-U <number> M-X Set Variable$<varname><cr>


     or to a string by doing î     138                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         M-X Set Variable$<varname>$<string><cr>


       In  fact, you can use Set Variable to set any variable, whether
     it exists already or not.  For existing variables,  it  does  not
     matter  whether you use upper case or lower case letters, and you
     are allowed to abbreviate the name as long as the abbreviation is
     unique.  If the variable might not exist yet, you must  type  the
     name  in  full.  While either upper case or lower case will still
     work, you are encouraged to capitalize each word of the name  for
     aesthetic reasons since EMACS stores the name as you give it.

       To examine the value of a single variable, do 


         M-X View Variable$<varname><cr>


       To  print  a  complete  list  of  all  variables,  do  M-X List
     Variables.  List Variables with a string argument shows only  the
     variables  whose  names  or  values contain that string (like the
     function Apropos).  M-X Describe can be given a  variable's  name
     instead  of a function's name; it prints the variable's value and
     its documentation, if it has any.

       If you want to set a variable a particular way  each  time  you
     use  EMACS,  you  can use an init file or an EVARS file.  This is
     one of the main ways of customizing EMACS for yourself.  An  init
     file  is  a file of TECO code to be executed when you start EMACS
     up.  They are very general, but writing one is a black art.   You
     might be able to get an expert to do it for you, or modify a copy
     of  someone  else's.    See  the  file  INFO;CONV, node Init, for
     details.  An EVARS file is a much simpler thing which you can  do
     yourself.  See section 22.6 [EVARS files], page 143.

       You can also set a variable with the TECO command 


         <value> M.V <varname>$


     or 


         :I*<string>$ M.V <varname>$


     This is useful in init files.î     139                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Any  variable  can  be made local to a specific buffer with the
     TECO command M.L<variable name>$.  Thus, if you want the  comment
     column  to  be  column 50 in one buffer, whereas you usually like
     40, then in the  one  buffer  do  M.LComment  Column$  using  the
     minibuffer.   Then, you can do 50U$Comment Column$ in that buffer
     and other buffers will not be affected.  This is how local  modes
     lists  in files work.  M-X List Redefinitions describes the local
     variables of the selected buffer in a verbose fashion.

       Most local variables are killed  if  you  change  major  modes.
                                                                  ____î     Their  global  values  come back.  They are therefore called mode
     ______                  _________î     locals.  There are also permanent locals which are not killed  by
     changing  modes;  use  2,M.L to create one.  Permanent locals are
     used by things like Auto Save mode to keep  internal  information
     about the buffer, whereas mode locals are used for customizations
     intended  only  for  one  buffer.    See the file INFO;CONV, node
     Variables, for information  on  how  local  variables  work,  and
     additional related features.

       Local  values  of  variables can be specified by the file being
     edited.  For example, if a certain file ought to have a 50 column
     width, it can specify a value of 50 for the variable Fill Column.
     Then Fill Column will have the value 50  whenever  this  file  is
     edited,  by  anyone.    Editing other files is not affected.  See
     section 22.7 [Locals], page 150, for how to do this.



     22.4 The Syntax Tableî     22.4 The Syntax Tableî     22.4 The Syntax Table


       All the EMACS commands which parse words or balance parentheses
                           ______ _____î     are controlled by the syntax table.  Each ASCII character  has  a
     word  syntax and a Lisp syntax.  By changing the word syntax, you
     can control whether a character is considered a word delimiter or
     part of a word.  By changing the Lisp  syntax,  you  can  control
     which  characters  are  parentheses,  which  ones  are  parts  of
     symbols, which ones are prefix operators, and which ones are just
     ignored when parsing s-expressions.

       The syntax table is actually a string which is 128*5 characters
     long.  Each group of 5 consecutive characters of the syntax table
     describe one ASCII character's syntax; but only the  first  three
     of  each  group are used.  To edit the syntax table, use M-X Edit
     Syntax Table.  But before we describe this  command,  let's  talk
     about the syntax of the syntax table itself.

       The first character in each group of five sets the word syntax.
     This  can  be either "A" or a space.  "A" signifies an alphabetic
     character, whereas a space signifies a separator character.î     140                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  second character in each group is the Lisp syntax.  It has
     many possible values:


             A       an alphabetic character
             Space   a whitespace or nonsignificant character
             (       an open parenthesis
             )       a close parenthesis
             ;       a comment starter
             ^î             |M      a comment ender
             |       a string quote
             /       a character quote
             '       a prefix character 


       When a character has the syntax of an  open  parenthesis,  that
     means  that  the  character  is  taken  to  be the beginning of a
     parenthesized grouping when expressions are being parsed.   Thus,
     any  number  of  different  expression-starting characters can be
     handled.

       The syntax of  "prefix  character"  means  that  the  character
     becomes  part  of  whatever  object follows it, whether symbol or
     list, and can also be in the middle of a  symbol,  but  does  not
     constitute anything by itself if surrounded by whitespace.

       A   character  quote  character  causes  itself  and  the  next
     character to be treated as alphabetic.

       A string quote is one which matches in pairs.   All  characters
     inside  a  pair of string quotes are treated as alphabetic except
     for the character quote, which retains its significance, and  can
     be used to force a string quote or character quote into a string.

       A  comment  starter  is taken to start a comment, which ends at
     the next comment ender, suppressing  the  normal  syntax  of  all
     characters  between.   Only the indentation commands give special
     treatment to these two syntax codes; all other commands  consider
     them  the same as Space (nonsignificant character).  The commands
     specifically  for  comments  use  the  variables  Comment  Start,
     Comment  Begin,  and  Comment End to detect comments.  This is so
     that the comment delimiters can be multi-character strings.

       The  third  character  in   each   group   controls   automatic
     parenthesis  matching display.  It is defined only for characters
     which have the Lisp syntax of close parentheses, and for them  it
     should   contain   the   appropriate  matching  open  parenthesis
     character (or a space).    If  you  insert  a  close  parenthesis
     character  which is matched by the wrong kind of open parenthesisî     141                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     character,  it  rings  the  bell.    If  the  third  syntax table
     character of a close parenthesis is a space, any open parenthesis
     is allowed to match it.

       The fourth and fifth characters in each group should always  be
     spaces, for now.  They are not used.  The reason they exist is so
     that  word-wise  indexing can be used on the PDP-10 to access the
     syntax of a character given in an accumulator.

       Edit Syntax Table displays the  syntax  table  broken  up  into
     labeled  five-character  groups.    You  can  see easily what the
     syntax of any character is.    You  are  not  editing  the  table
     immediately,  however.   Instead, you are asked for the character
     whose syntax you  wish  to  edit.    After  typing  it,  you  are
     positioned  at  that character's five-character group.  Overwrite
     mode is on, so you can simply type the  desired  syntax  entries,
     which  replace  the old ones.  You can also do arbitrary editing,
     but be careful not to change the  position  of  anything  in  the
     buffer.  When you exit the recursive editing level, you are asked
     for  another  character to position to.  An Altmode at this point
     exits and makes the changes.   A  C-]  at  any  time  aborts  the
     operation.

       Many  major modes alter the syntax table.  Each such major mode
     creates its own syntax table once and reselects the  same  string
     whenever  the mode is selected, in any buffer.  Thus, all buffers
     in Text mode at any time use the same  syntax  table.    This  is
     important  because  if  you  ever  change the syntax table of one
     buffer that is in Text mode, you change them all.  It is possible
     to give one buffer a local copy with a TECO program:  


         MM Make Local Q-Register$..D$W  :G..DU..D


     The  syntax  tables  belonging  to  the  major  modes   are   not
     preinitialized  in EMACS; they are created when the major mode is
     invoked for the first time, by copying the default one and making
     specific changes.  Thus, any other changes you have made  in  the
     default   (Fundamental   mode)  syntax  table  at  the  beginning
     propagate into  all  modes'  syntax  tables  unless  those  modes
     specifically override them.

       After a major mode has created its own syntax table, that table
     is stored in the variable <modename> ..D.  This makes a different
     variable  for each major mode, since the mode name is part of the
     variable name.  Further use of the major  mode  gets  the  syntax
     table  from  that  variable.  If you create the variable yourself
     before the first use of the major mode, the value you  put  there
     will be used.î     142                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       TECO  programs and init files can most easily change the syntax
     table with the function & Alter ..D (look at its  documentation).
     The  syntax  table  is  kept  in  the q-register named ..D, which
     explains that name.



     22.5 FS Flagsî     22.5 FS Flagsî     22.5 FS Flags


       FS flags are variables defined and implemented  by  TECO  below
     the  level  of EMACS.  Some of them are options which control the
     behavior of parts of TECO such as the display processor.  Some of
     them control the execution of TECO programs; you are  not  likely
     to  want  to change these.  Others simply report information from
     inside TECO.  The  list  of  FS  flags  is  fixed  when  TECO  is
     assembled and each one exists for a specific purpose.

       FS  flags  are  used mostly by the TECO programmer, but some of
     them are of interest to the EMACS user doing minor customization.
     For example, FS ECHO LINES$ is the number of lines  in  the  echo
     area.   By setting this flag you can make the echo area bigger or
     smaller.  Many FS flags useful for customization  are  controlled
     by  EMACS  variables; instead of setting the FS flag, you can set
     the  EMACS  variable  like  any  other.    Setting  the  variable
     automatically  sets  the FS flag as well.  Here is a list of such
     variables which control flags:



         Auto Save Interval             FS ^R MDLY$
         Bottom Display Margin          FS %BOTTOM$
         Case Search                    FS BOTHCASE$
         Cursor Centering Point         FS %CENTER$
         Display Mode Line Inverse      FS INVMOD$
         Display Overprinting           FS ^H PRINT$ and FS ^M PRINT$
         Echo Area Height               FS ECHO LINES$
         End of Buffer Display Margin   FS %END$
         Error Messages in Echo Area    FS ECHO ERRORS$
         Fill Column                    FS ADLINE$
         Overwrite Mode                 FS ^R REPLACE$
         SAIL Character Mode            FS SAIL$
         Top Display Margin             FS %TOP$


     Setting one of these variables causes the flag to be set, but not
     vice versa.  To avoid confusion, always set these flags using the
     associated variables, never directly,  unless  you  are  changingî     143                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     them  temporarily  during  one command and the user will not have
     the opportunity to notice the confusion.

       To get the value of  an  FS  flag,  use  the  TECO  command  FS
     followed  by  the  name  of  the  flag, terminated by an Altmode.
     Spaces in the name of the flag are completely ignored,  and  case
     does not matter.  Thus, FS Tab Width$= executed in the minibuffer
     prints  the  number of columns between tab stops used for display
     of tab characters.  See section 23 [Minibuffer], page 156.   This
     works  only  for  flags  with numeric values.  The easiest way to
     examine a flag's value with EMACS commands is 


         C-M-X View Variable<cr> (FS Tab Width$)<cr>


     This works for both numeric and string values.

       To set the flag, give the FS command a numeric argument  (which
     must  be  a  string  pointer, if the intended value is a string).
     For example, in the minibuffer or an init file, do 


         10FS Tab Width$


     Be warned that FS always returns a value, so put a CRLF after  it
     to discard the value if necessary.

       It  is  possible  to make an FS flag's value local to a buffer.
     See the file INFO;CONV, node Vars.

       The documentation of individual FS flags can be  found  through
     Help  T.    Help T FS Echo Lines<cr> prints the description of FS
     ECHO LINES$.  Spaces are not significant in Help  T  either.    A
     list of just the names of all FS flags is printed by the function
     List TECO FS Flags, found in the library PURIFY.



     22.6 Init Files and EVARS Filesî     22.6 Init Files and EVARS Filesî     22.6 Init Files and EVARS Files


       EMACS  is  designed to be customizable; each user can rearrange
     things to suit his taste.  Simple customizations are primarily of
     two types:  moving functions from one character to  another,  and
     setting  variables which functions refer to so as to direct their
     actions.  Beyond this, extensions can involve redefining existing
     functions,  or  writing  entirely  new  functions  and   creating
     sharable libraries of them.î     144                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  most  general way to customize is to write an init file, a
     TECO program which is executed whenever you  start  EMACS.    The
     init  file  is  found by looking for a particular filename, <home
     directory>;<user name> EMACS.  This method is general because the
     program can do anything.  It can ask you questions and do things,
     rather than just setting up commands for later.    However,  TECO
     code  is arcane, and only a few people learn how to write it.  If
     you need an init file and don't feel up to learning to write TECO
     code, ask a local expert to do it for you.  See  the  file  INFO;
     CONV, for more about init files.

       However, simple customizations can be done in a simple way with
     an EVARS file.  Such a file serves the same sort of purpose as an
     init  file,  but instead of TECO code, it contains just a list of
     variables and values.  Each line of  the  EVARS  file  names  one
     variable  or  one  command character and says how to redefine it.
     Empty lines, and lines starting with spaces or tabs, are ignored.
     They can be used as comments.  Your EVARS file is  found  by  its
     filename,  as  an  init  file  is,  but it should be called <home
     directory>;<user name> EVARS instead of EMACS.  You can have both
     an init file and an EVARS file if you want, as long as your  init
     file  calls  the  default init file, since that is what processes
     the EVARS file.

       To set a variable, include in the EVARS file a line  containing
     the  name  of  the  variable,  a colon, and the value.  A numeric
     value is represented by the number.  A string value  is  enclosed
                                                       ^î     in double quotes.  To include a double quote or a |] character in
                                                  ^î     the  value  of the string, precede it with a |] to quote it.  You
     can also simply give the string value, with no quotes, as long as
     it is not ambiguous (does not consist of digits or start  with  a
     double  quote);  however,  in this case, any spaces following the
     colon become part of the value of the variable.    They  are  not
     ignored.  Examples:  


         Comment Column: 70
         Comment Start: ";"
         MM Foo:FTFOO$


     The  last  line  defines  a  variable named MM Foo, which has the
     effect of defining a function named Foo with the specified  value
     as its definition.

       To  redefine  a command character is a little more complicated.
                                               ^î     Instead of the name of a variable, give a |R (control-R) followed
     by the character.  Since the general Control and  Meta  character
     cannot  be  part  of  a file, all Control and Meta characters areî     145                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                             ^î     represented  in a funny way:  after the |R put the residue of the
                                                                    ^î     character after removing the Control and Meta, and before the  |R
     put  periods,  one  for  Control,  two  for  Meta,  and three for
                                                  ^î     Control-Meta.  Thus, C-D is represented by ".|RD"  and  C-M-;  is
                          ^î     represented  by  "...|R;".  Lower case characters such as C-a are
     usually defined as "execute the  definition  of  the  upper  case
     equivalent".    Therefore, by redefining the C-A command you also
                                                      ^î     change C-a; but if you redefine C-a, by saying ".|Ra" instead  of
       ^î     ".|RA", you will not change C-A.  So be careful about case.

       Instead  of  the  value  of  a  variable, for command character
     redefinition you must give a TECO  expression  that  returns  the
     desired  definition.  This is to make it easy to use any function
     whose name you  know,  because  M.MFOO$  is  an  expression  that
     returns  the  definition of the function FOO.  Do not enclose the
     TECO expression in quotes. Example:  


          ^î         .|RK: M.M^R Kill Line$


     would give C-K the definition that it  normally  has.    Remember
     that  in  names of functions the "^R" is actually a "^" and an R,
     not a control-R.  The  space  before  the  M.M  is  part  of  the
     expression, but it is ignored when the expression is executed.

       Some  non-printing  characters are a little tricky to redefine.
     For example, you must know that Return, Linefeed, Tab,  Backspace
     and  Altmode  are not the same in TECO's command character set as
     C-M, C-J, C-I, C-H  and  C-[,  even  though  in  ASCII  they  are
                               ^                                    ^î     synonymous.    By saying .|RJ you will redefine C-J; by saying |R
     followed by a Linefeed (which you must insert in the  EVARS  file
     by typing C-Q Linefeed) you can redefine Linefeed.  Normally, C-J
     is  defined  as  "execute the definition of Linefeed", so you are
     better off redefining Linefeed.

       You can also redefine a subcommand of a prefix  character  such
     as  C-X.    For  this,  you  have  to  know where the character's
     dispatch table is stored.  For C-X, the location of the  dispatch
     is called ".X"; you won't have any other prefix characters unless
     you  define  them yourself.  See the file INFO;CONV, node Prefix.
     Knowing the location,  you  specify  the  subcommand  by  writing
               ^î     :location(|^character).    This  looks  silly,  but  it is a TECO
     expression with the right meaning.  For example,  redefining  C-X
                                                    ^î     C-S, the location is ".X" and the character is |S, so we say


             ^ ^î         :.X(|^|S): M.M^R Save File$î     146                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     This  gives  C-X  C-S  the  definition that it normally has.  The
                           ^î     subcommand character (|S in this case) can  represent  itself  in
     the  EVARS  file  with  no  need  for  dots,  because  subcommand
     characters are just ASCII, with no Meta allowed.

       You can include arbitrary TECO code in an EVARS file by writing
     a definition for "*".  The  definition  is  executed  as  a  TECO
     expression  but  the value is ignored.  Thus, to load the library
     FOO, do 


         *: MM Load Library$FOO$


     Once the library is loaded, you can connect the functions  in  it
     to commands as described above.

       Please  refrain  from  giving newcomers to EMACS a copy of your
     own init file before they understand  what  it  does.    Everyone
     prefers his own customizations, and there is always a tendency to
     proselytize,  but  by the same token your protege's tastes may be
     different from yours.  If you offer him  your  customizations  at
     the time when he is ready to understand what difference they make
     and  decide  for  himself what he prefers, then you will help him
     get what he wants.  Tell him about  each  individual  change  you
     made,  and let him judge them one by one.  There is no reason for
     him to choose all or nothing.


     22.6.1 EVARS File Examplesî     22.6.1 EVARS File Examplesî     22.6.1 EVARS File Examples


       Here are some examples of how to do various useful things in an
     EVARS file.

       This causes new buffers to be created in Lisp mode:  


         Default Major Mode: "LISP"


       This causes new buffers to have Auto Fill mode turned on:  


         Buffer Creation Hook: "1M.L Auto Fill Mode$"


       This causes all Text mode buffers to have Auto Fill mode turned
     on:  î     147                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         Text Mode Hook: "1M.L Auto Fill Mode$"


       This  causes C-M-G to be undefined by copying the definition of
     C-| (which is undefined):  


            ^      ^î         ...|RG: Q.|R|


       This redefines C-S to be a single character search command, and
     M-S to be a non-incremental string search:  


          ^î         .|RS: M.M ^R Character Search$
           ^î         ..|RS: M.M ^R String Search$


       This redefines C-X V to run View File:  


             ^î         :.X(|^V): M.M View File$


       This makes M-M a prefix character and defines M-M W to  mark  a
     word  and  M-M  P  to  mark  a paragraph.  It stores the dispatch
     vector for the prefix character in the variable M-M Dispatch.


           ^                             ^              ^î         ..|RM: MM Make Prefix Character$|]$M-M Dispatch|]$$
         Temp: "M-M  $M-M Dispatch$
         "
            Append the line in Temp to Prefix Char List.
                                                                ^  ^î         *: Q$Prefix Char List$[1 Q$Temp$[2 :i$Prefix Char List$|]1|]2$
                         ^î         :$M-M Dispatch$(|^W): M.M ^R Mark Word$
                         ^î         :$M-M Dispatch$(|^P): M.M ^R Mark Paragraph$


       This loads the library LUNAR and defines C-Q to  run  a  useful
     function found in that library:  


         *: MM Load Library$LUNAR$
          ^î         .|RQ: M.M ^R Various Quantities$


       This causes Auto Save mode to save under the visited filenames:
     î     148                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         Auto Save Visited File: 1


       This causes TAGS to bring new files into separate buffers:  


         TAGS Find File: 1


       This  prevents  the default init file from printing the message
     "EMACS version nnn.  Type ... for Help".  


         Inhibit Help Message: 1


       This redefines the list syntax of "%" to be  ";"  for  "comment
     starter", and that of ";" to be "A" for "alphabetic":  


         *: 1mm& Alter ..D$%;;A$


     22.6.2 Init File Examplesî     22.6.2 Init File Examplesî     22.6.2 Init File Examples


       Here  are  the  ways  to  do exactly the same things in an init
     file.  Don't put more than one of these  TECO  expressions  on  a
     line, or the first may leave behind a value which will affect the
     operation of the second!

       This causes new buffers to be created in Lisp mode:  


         :I$Default Major Mode$LISP$


       This causes new buffers to have Auto Fill mode turned on:  


                                ^î         :I* 1M.L Auto Fill Mode|]$ $ M.VBuffer Creation Hook$


     It  is  different  because  the  variable does not already exist.
              ^î     Note the |] used for getting the Altmode into the value.

       This causes all Text mode buffers to have Auto Fill mode turned
     on:  î     149                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                ^î         :I* 1M.L Auto Fill Mode|]$ $ M.VText Mode Hook$


       This  causes C-M-G to be undefined by copying the definition of
     C-| (which is undefined):  


           ^       ^î         Q.|R| U...|RG


       This redefines C-S to be a single character search command, and
     M-S to be a non-incremental string search:  


                                    ^î         M.M ^R Character Search$ U.|RS
                                  ^î         M.M ^R String Search$ U..|RS


       This redefines C-X V to run View File:  


                             ^î         M.M View File$ U:.X(|^V)


       This makes M-M a prefix character and defines M-M W to  mark  a
     word  and  M-M  P  to  mark  a paragraph.  It stores the dispatch
     vector for the prefix character in the variable M-M Dispatch.


                                        ^î         MM Make Prefix Character$.Y$U..|RM
         Q$Prefix Char List$[1
                             ^       ^              ^î         :i$Prefix Char List$|]1M-M  |]$M-M Dispatch|]$
         $ ]1
                                            ^î         M.M ^R Mark Word$ U:$M-M Dispatch$(|^W)
                                                 ^î         M.M ^R Mark Paragraph$ U:$M-M Dispatch$(|^P)


       This loads the library LUNAR and defines C-Q to  run  a  useful
     function found in that library:  


         MM Load Library$LUNAR$
                                      ^î         M.M ^R Various Quantities$ U.|RQ


       This causes Auto Save mode to save under the visited filenames:
     î     150                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



         1U$Auto Save Visited File$


     Compare  this  and  the next example with the first two, in which
     string values are used.

       This causes TAGS to bring new files into separate buffers:  


         1M.VTAGS Find File$


       This prevents the default init file from printing  the  message
     "EMACS version nnn.  Type ... for Help".  


         1M.VInhibit Help Message$


       This  redefines  the  list syntax of "%" to be ";" for "comment
     starter", and that of ";" to be "A" for "alphabetic":  


         1mm& Alter ..D$%;;A$



     22.7 Local Variables in Filesî     22.7 Local Variables in Filesî     22.7 Local Variables in Files


                     _____ _____î       By specifying local modes in a file you can cause certain major
     or minor modes to be set, or certain  character  commands  to  be
     defined,  whenever  you  are visiting it.  For example, EMACS can
     select Lisp mode for that file, set up a special Comment  Column,
     or put a special command on the character C-M-Comma.  Local modes
     can  specify  the  major mode, and the values of any set of named
     variables and command characters.  Local modes apply  only  while
     the buffer containing the file is selected; they do not extend to
     other files loaded into other buffers.

       The  simplest  kind  of  local mode specification sets only the
     major mode.  You put  the  mode's  name  in  between  a  pair  of
     "-*-"'s,  anywhere  on  the first nonblank line of the file.  For
     example, the first  line  of  this  file  contains  -*-Scribe-*-,
     implying that this file should be edited in Scribe mode.

                                                                 _____î       To  specify more that just the major mode, you must use a local
     _____ ____                    ____î     modes list, which goes in the last page of the file (it  is  best
     to  put it on a separate page).  The local modes list starts withî     151                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     a line containing the string "Local Modes:", and ends with a line
     containing the string "End:".  In between come the variable names
     and  values,  just  as in an EVARS file.  See section 22.6 [EVARS
     files], page 143.

       The line which starts the local modes list does not have to say
     just "Local Modes:".   If  there  is  other  text  before  "Local
                                         ______î     Modes:",  that  text  is called the prefix, and if there is other
                                    ______î     text after, that is called the suffix.   If  these  are  present,
     each  entry in the local modes list should have the prefix before
     it and the suffix after it.  This includes the "End:" line.   The
     prefix  and  suffix are included to disguise the local modes list
     as a comment so that the compiler or text formatter will  not  be
     perplexed  by it.  If you do not need to disguise the local modes
     list as a comment in this way, do not bother with a prefix  or  a
     suffix.

       Aside  from  the  "Local Modes:" and the "End:", and the prefix
     and suffix if any, a local modes list looks like an  EVARS  file.
     However,  comments lines are not allowed, and you cannot redefine
     C-X subcommands  due  to  fundamental  limitations  of  the  data
     structure used to remember local variables.  Sorry.

       The  major  mode  can  be  set  by  specifying  a value for the
     variable "Mode" (don't try setting the major mode this way except
     in a local modes list!).  It should be the  first  thing  in  the
     local  modes  list, if it appears at all.  A function M-X Foo can
     be defined locally by putting in a local setting for  a  variable
     named "MM Foo".  See section 5.2 [Functions], page 24.

       Here is an example of a local modes list:  


         ;;; Local Modes: ***
         ;;; Mode:Mumble ***
         ;;; Comment Column:0 ***
         ;;; Comment Start: ";;; "  ***
         ;;; Comment End:"***" ***
               ^î         ;;; ..|R/: m.m^R My Funny Meta-Slash$ ***
         ;;; End: ***


       Note  that the prefix is ";;; " and the suffix is " ***".  Note
     also that comments in the file begin with ";;;  "  and  end  with
     "***".  Presumably the file contains code in the language Mumble,
     in  which  comments  must start and end that way.  The prefix and
     suffix are used in the local modes list to make the  list  appear
     as comments when the file is read by the Mumble compiler.î     152                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The last page of the file must be no more than 10000 characters
     long  or  the  local  modes list will not be recognized.  This is
     because EMACS finds the local modes list by  scanning  back  only
     10000  characters from the end of the file for the last formfeed,
     and then looking forward for the "Local  Modes:"  string.    This
     accomplishes  these goals: a stray "Local Modes:" not in the last
     page is not noticed; and visiting a long file  that  is  all  one
     page  and has no local mode list need not take the time to search
     the whole file.



     22.8 Keyboard Macrosî     22.8 Keyboard Macrosî     22.8 Keyboard Macros


             C-X (       Start defining a keyboard macro.
             C-X )       End the definition of a keyboard macro.
             C-X E       Execute the most recent keyboard macro.
             C-U C-X (   Re-execute last keyboard macro and append  to
                         its definition.
             C-X Q       Ask  for confirmation when the keyboard macro
                         is executed.
             C-U C-X Q   Allow the user to edit for a while, each time
                         the keyboard macro is executed.
             M-X Name Kbd Macro
                         Make the most recent keyboard macro into  the
                         permanent definition of a command.
             M-X Write Kbd Macro
                         Save a keyboard macro in a file.  


         ________ _____î       A keyboard macro is a command defined by the user to abbreviate
     a sequence of other commands.  If you discover that you are about
     to  type  C-N C-D forty times, you can define a keyboard macro to
     do C-N C-D and call it with a repeat count of forty.

       Keyboard macros differ from ordinary EMACS  commands,  in  that
     they  are  written  in  the EMACS command language rather than in
     TECO.  This makes it easier for the novice  to  write  them,  and
     makes  them  more  convenient  as  temporary hacks.  However, the
     EMACS command language is not powerful enough  as  a  programming
     language  to  be  useful  for  writing  anything  intelligent  or
     general.  For such things, TECO must be used.

       EMACS functions were formerly known as macros (which is part of
     the explanation of the name  EMACS),  because  they  were  macros
     within  the  context  of TECO as an editor.  We decided to change
     the terminology because, when thinking of EMACS, we consider TECO
     a programming language rather than an editor.  The only  "macros"
     in EMACS now are keyboard macros.î     153                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       You  define a keyboard macro while executing the commands which
     are the definition.  Put  differently,  as  you  are  defining  a
     keyboard  macro,  the  definition is being executed for the first
     time.  This way, you can see what the effects  of  your  commands
     are,  so  that  you  don't  have to figure them out in your head.
     When you are finished, the keyboard macro is defined and also has
     been, in effect, executed once.  You can then do the whole  thing
     over again by invoking the macro.


     22.8.1 Basic Useî     22.8.1 Basic Useî     22.8.1 Basic Use


       To  start  defining  a  keyboard  macro, type the C-X ( command
     (^R Start Kbd Macro).  From then on, your commands continue to be
     executed, but also become part of the definition  of  the  macro.
     "Def" appears in the mode line to remind you of what is going on.
     When  you  are  finished,  the  C-X  ) command (^R End Kbd Macro)
     terminates the definition (without becoming part of it!).

       The macro thus defined can be invoked  again  with  the  C-X  E
     command (^R Execute Kbd Macro), which may be given a repeat count
     as a numeric argument to execute the macro many times.  C-X ) can
     also  be  given  a  repeat count as an argument, in which case it
     repeats the macro that many times right after  defining  it,  but
     defining  the  macro  counts as the first repetition (since it is
     executed as you define it).  So, giving C-X ) an  argument  of  2
     executes  the macro immediately one additional time.  An argument
     of zero to C-X E or C-X ) means  repeat  the  macro  indefinitely
     (until it gets an error).

       If  you  want to perform an operation on each line, then either
     you should start by positioning point on the line above the first
     one to be processed and then begin the macro  definition  with  a
     C-N,  or  you should start on the proper line and end with a C-N.
     Either way, repeating the macro will operate on successive lines.

       After you have terminated the definition of a  keyboard  macro,
     you  can  add  to  the end of its definition by typing C-U C-X (.
     This is equivalent to plain C-X ( followed by retyping the  whole
     definition  so far.  As a consequence it re-executes the macro as
     previously defined.

       If you wish to save a keyboard macro for longer than until  you
     define the next one, you must give it a name.  If you do M-X Name
     Kbd Macro$FOO<cr>, the last keyboard macro defined (the one which
     C-X  E would invoke) is turned into a function and given the name
     FOO.  M-X FOO will from then on  invoke  that  particular  macro.
     Name  Kbd  Macro  also  reads  a  character from the keyboard andî     154                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     redefines  that  character  command to invoke the macro.  You can
     use a bit prefix character in specifying  the  command;  you  can
     also  type a C-X command to be redefined.  When you have finished
     typing the command characters, Name Kbd Macro asks you whether it
     should go ahead and redefine the character.

       To save a keyboard macro permanently, do M-X Write  Kbd  Macro.
     Supply  the  function  name  of  the  keyboard  macro as a string
     argument, or else it will ask you to  type  the  character  which
     invokes  the  keyboard  macro.   The keyboard macro is saved as a
     library which, when loaded, automatically redefines the  keyboard
     macro.   The filename is read from the terminal.  Its second name
     should be :EJ, like other libraries; that is the default.

       To examine the definition of a keyboard macro, use the function
     View Kbd Macro.  Either supply the name  of  the  function  which
     runs  the  macro, as a string argument, or type the command which
     invokes the macro when View Kbd Macro asks for it.


     22.8.2 Executing Macros with Variationsî     22.8.2 Executing Macros with Variationsî     22.8.2 Executing Macros with Variations


       If you want to be allowed to do arbitrary editing at a  certain
     point  each  time  around the macro (different each time, and not
     remembered as part of the macro), you  can  use  the  C-U  C-X  Q
     command  (^R  Kbd Macro Query).  When you are defining the macro,
                                               ___î     this lets you do some editing, which does not become part of  the
     macro.   When you are done, exit with C-M-C to return to defining
     the macro.  When you execute the macro, at that same  point,  you
     will  again  be  allowed  to do some editing.  When you exit this
     time with C-M-C, the execution of the macro will resume.  If  you
     abort  the  recursive  editing level with C-], you will abort the
     macro definition or execution.

       You can get the effect of Query Replace, where the  macro  asks
     you  each  time  around  whether  to  make a change, by using the
     command C-X Q with no argument in your keyboard macro.  When  you
     are  defining  the  macro,  the  C-X Q does nothing, but when the
     macro is invoked the C-X Q reads a character from the terminal to
     decide whether to continue.    The  special  answers  are  Space,
     Rubout,  Altmode, C-L, C-R.  A Space means to continue.  A Rubout
     means to skip the remainder of  this  repetition  of  the  macro,
     starting  again  from  the  beginning in the next repetition.  An
     Altmode ends all repetitions of the macro, but only the innermost
     macro (in case it was called from another macro).  C-L clears the
     screen and asks you again for a character to say what to do.  C-R
     enters a recursive editing level; when you exit,  you  are  asked
     again (if you type a Space, the macro will continue from whereverî     155                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     you  left  things  when you exited the C-R).  Anything else exits
     all levels of keyboard macros and is reread as a command.î     156                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                           CHAPTER TWENTY-THREEî                           CHAPTER TWENTY-THREEî                           CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE
                              THE MINIBUFFERî                              THE MINIBUFFERî                              THE MINIBUFFER



            __________î       The  minibuffer  is a facility by means of which EMACS commands
     can read input from the  terminal,  allowing  you  to  use  EMACS
     commands  to  edit the input while you are typing it.  Usually it
     is used to read a TECO program to be executed.


             M-Altmode   Invokes an empty minibuffer.
             M-%         Invokes a minibuffer initialized with a Query
                         Replace.
             C-X Altmode Re-execute a recent minibuffer command.
             C-X ^       Add more lines to the minibuffer.
             C-\         Meta-prefix for use in the minibuffer.
             C-C C-Y     Rotate ring of recent minibuffer commands.  


       The primary use of the minibuffer is for editing and  executing
     simple TECO programs such as 


         MM Query Replace$FOO
         $BAR
         $


     (which  could not be done with M-X Query Replace because when M-X
     is used Return terminates the arguments).

       You can always tell when you are in a minibuffer,  because  the
     mode   line   contains   something   in   parentheses,   such  as
     "(Minibuffer)" or "(Query Replace)".  There is  also  a  line  of
     dashes  across  the  screen  a  few lines from the top.  Strictly
     speaking, the minibuffer is actually the region of  screen  above
     the line of dashes, for that is where you edit the input that the
     minibuffer  is asking you for.  Editing has been limited to a few
     lines so that most of the screen can continue to  show  the  file
     you are visiting.

       If  you want to type in a TECO command, use the minibuffer with
     the command Meta-Altmode, (^R  Execute  Minibuffer).    An  empty
     minibuffer  will  appear,  into  which  you  should type the TECO
     command string.  Exit with Altmode  Altmode,  and  remember  that
     neither  of  the  two Altmodes is inserted into your TECO command
     although the first one may appear to be.  When the  TECO  command
     is  executed,  "the  buffer"  will  be  the text you were editing
     before you invoked the minibuffer.î     157                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Often,  a  minibuffer  starts  out  with some text in it.  This
     means that you are supposed to add to that text,  or,  sometimes,
     to  delete some of it so as to choose among several alternatives.
     For example, Meta-%  (^R  Query  Replace)  provides  you  with  a
     minibuffer  initially  containing the string "MM Query Replace$".
     The cursor comes at the end.  You are then supposed to add in the
     arguments to the Query Replace.

       In a  minibuffer,  you  can  edit  your  input  until  you  are
     satisfied  with  it.    Then  you  tell EMACS you are finished by
     typing two Altmodes.  An Altmode not followed by another  Altmode
     is  simply  inserted in the buffer.  This is because it is common
     to want to  put  Altmodes  into  the  minibuffer,  which  usually
     contains  a  string  of  TECO  commands.   For example, in Meta-%
     (^R Query Replace) each argument must be  ended  by  an  Altmode.
     However, when you type two Altmodes in a row, neither one remains
     in  the  buffer.   The two Altmodes do nothing to the text in the
     minibuffer, they just exit.

       Since Altmode is self-inserting, typing Meta characters can  be
     a  problem.  You can do it by using C-\ instead of Altmode as the
     Meta-prefix.  If  you  type  a  Control-Meta  character  on  your
     keyboard,  the  corresponding ASCII control character is inserted
     in the minibuffer.  This is because the Lisp commands are  rarely
     useful   when   editing  TECO  code,  but  insertion  of  control
     characters is frequent.  If you really want to use a Control-Meta
     EMACS command, you must use C-C to type it.  You cannot  use  C-\
     C-A  to  type  C-M-A,  because  C-\  (unlike Altmode) ignores the
     Control bit of the following character, so you must use C-C  C-A.
     The  motivation  for this quirk of C-\ is that C-\ C-B (to obtain
     M-B) is easier to type than C-\ B,  especially  if  it  is  typed
     several times in a row.

       You  can  cancel  your input in a minibuffer and start all over
     again by typing C-G.  That kills all the text in the  minibuffer.
     A  C-G  typed when the minibuffer is already empty exits from the
     minibuffer.  Usually, this aborts whatever command was using  the
     minibuffer,  so  it will return without doing anything more.  For
     example, if you type two C-G's at Meta-%'s minibuffer,  you  will
     return  to top level and no Query Replace will be done.  Typing a
     single C-G at a preinitialized minibuffer to empty the buffer  is
     not  very  useful, since you would have to retype all the initial
     text.

       The last five distinct minibuffer commands or M-X commands  you
     have  issued  are  remembered  in a ring buffer in q-register .M.
     The C-X Altmode command (^R  Re-execute  Minibuffer)  re-executes
     the  last  command  in  the  ring.    With  an  argument  <n>, it
     re-executes the <n>'th previous command.  The command is  printedî     158                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     out  (only  the  first  40 characters or so) and you are asked to
     confirm with "Y" or "N".

       You can also get your previous minibuffer and M-X commands back
     into the minibuffer to be edited and  re-executed  with  changes.
     Giving  M-Altmode  an  argument,  as in C-U M-Altmode, causes the
     minibuffer to be loaded up with the last command in the ring,  as
     if you had typed it in again from scratch.  You can then edit it,
     execute it by typing two Altmodes, or cancel it with C-G.  To get
     an earlier command string instead of the most recent one, use the
     command  C-C  C-Y  once  you are in the minibuffer.  This command
     "rotates" the ring of saved commands much as M-Y rotates the ring
     of killed text.  Each C-C C-Y reveals an earlier command  string,
     until the ring has rotated all the way around and the most recent
     one reappears.  C-C C-Y is actually a way of saying C-M-Y, but in
     the  minibuffer  that's  the  only  way to type it, since Altmode
     inserts  itself  and  Control-Meta  characters   insert   control
     characters.

       If  you  exit from Meta-Altmode with a C-G, nothing is executed
     and the previous minibuffered command string is still  remembered
     as the last one.

       While in a minibuffer, if you decide you want the minibuffer to
     use  more lines on the screen, you can use C-X ^ (^R Grow Window)
     to get more.  It gets one more line, or  as  many  lines  as  its
     argument says.î     159                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FOURî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FOURî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
                  CORRECTING MISTAKES AND EMACS PROBLEMSî                  CORRECTING MISTAKES AND EMACS PROBLEMSî                  CORRECTING MISTAKES AND EMACS PROBLEMS



       If  you  type  an EMACS command you did not intend, the results
     are often mysterious.  This chapter tells  what  you  can  do  to
     cancel  your  mistake  or  recover  from  a mysterious situation.
     EMACS bugs and system crashes are also considered.



     24.1 Quitting and Abortingî     24.1 Quitting and Abortingî     24.1 Quitting and Aborting


             C-G     Quit.  Cancel running or partially typed command.
             C-]     Abort recursive  editing  level  and  cancel  the
                     command which invoked it.
             M-X Top Level
                     Abort all recursive editing levels and subsystems
                     which are currently executing.  


       There  are  three  ways  of  cancelling  commands which are not
                         ________               ________î     finished executing: quitting with C-G, and aborting with  C-]  or
     M-X  Top Level.  Quitting is cancelling a partially typed command
     or one which is  already  running.    Aborting  is  cancelling  a
     command which has entered a recursive editing level or subsystem.

       Quitting  with C-G is used for getting rid of a partially typed
     command, or a numeric argument that you  don't  want.    It  also
     stops  a  running command in the middle in a relatively safe way,
     so you can use it if you accidentally give a command which  takes
     a  long  time.  In particular, it is safe to quit out of killing;
                           ___                             ___î     either your text will all still be there, or it will  all  be  in
     the  kill  ring  (or maybe both).  Quitting an incremental search
     does special things documented under searching;  in  general,  it
     may  take  two  successive C-G's to get out of a search.  C-G can
     interrupt EMACS at any time, so it is not an ordinary command.

       Aborting with C-] (Abort Recursive Edit) is used to get out  of
     a  recursive  editing  level and cancel the command which invoked
     it.  Quitting with C-G cannot be used for  this,  because  it  is
     used  to  cancel  a  partially typed command within the recursive
     editing level.  Both operations are useful.  For example, if  you
     are  editing  a message to be sent, C-G can be used to cancel the
     commands you use to edit the message, and C-] cancels sending the
     message.  C-] either tells you how to resume the aborted  command
     or queries for confirmation before aborting.î     160                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       When  you  are  in  a  position to use M-X, you can use M-X Top
     Level.  This is equivalent to "enough" C-] commands  to  get  you
     out  of all the levels of subsystems and recursive edits that you
     are in.  C-] gets you out one level at a time, but M-X Top  Level
     goes out all levels at once.  Both C-] and M-X Top Level are like
     all  other  commands,  and unlike C-G, in that they are effective
     only when EMACS is listening.



     24.2 Dealing with Common Forms of EMACS Lossageî     24.2 Dealing with Common Forms of EMACS Lossageî     24.2 Dealing with Common Forms of EMACS Lossage


       This section describes various conditions which can cause EMACS
     not to work, or cause it to display strange things, and  how  you
     can correct them.


     24.2.1 Error Messageî     24.2.1 Error Messageî     24.2.1 Error Message


       When EMACS prints an error message, it occupies the top line of
     the screen, ends with a "?", and is accompanied by the ringing of
     the  bell.    Space  causes the error message to disappear and be
     replaced by the first line of text again.  Any other  command  is
     executed  normally  as  if  there  had been no error message (the
     error message disappears during the redisplay after the command).
     However, "?" enters the error  handler,  which  can  be  used  to
     inspect  the  function  call  stack.    Most  users  will  not be
     interested in doing this.  Type Help inside the error handler  to
     get its documentation, or C-] to exit it.

       If  you  prefer to have echo messages printed in the echo area,
     set the variable Error Messages in Echo Area nonzero.


     24.2.2 Subsystems and Recursive Editing Levelsî     24.2.2 Subsystems and Recursive Editing Levelsî     24.2.2 Subsystems and Recursive Editing Levels


       Subsystems and  recursive  editing  levels  are  important  and
     useful  features of EMACS, but they can seem like malfunctions to
     the user who does not understand them.

       If the mode line starts with a bracket  "["  or  a  parenthesis
     "(",  or  does  not  start  with  the word "EMACS", then you have
     entered a subsystem (See section 6.1 [Subsystems], page 28.) or a
     recursive editing  level  (See  section  6.3  [Recursive  Editing
     Levels], page 30.).î     161                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       In  such  a situation, first try typing C-].  This will get out
     of any recursive editing level and most subsystems.    The  usual
     mode  line  and text display will reappear.  If C-] does not seem
     to have worked, type the Help character.    Instead  of  printing
     "Doc (Type ? for Help)" in the echo area, it will print a list of
     the  subsystem's  commands.   One of these should be a command to
     exit or abort.

       If the above  techniques  fail,  try  restarting  (see  section
     24.2.7).


     24.2.3 Garbage on the Screenî     24.2.3 Garbage on the Screenî     24.2.3 Garbage on the Screen


       If  the data on the screen looks wrong, it could be due to line
     noise on input or output, a bug in the terminal, a bug  in  EMACS
     redisplay,  or  a  bug  in an EMACS command.  To find out whether
     there is really anything wrong with your text, the first thing to
     do is type C-L.  This is  a  command  to  clear  the  screen  and
     redisplay  it.    Often  this will display the text you expected.
     Think of it as getting an opinion from another doctor.


     24.2.4 Garbage Displayed Persistentlyî     24.2.4 Garbage Displayed Persistentlyî     24.2.4 Garbage Displayed Persistently


       If EMACS persistently displays garbage on the screen, or if  it
     outputs  the  right  things  but  scattered  around all the wrong
     places on the screen, it may be that EMACS has the wrong idea  of
     your  terminal  type.    The first thing to do in this case is to
     exit from EMACS and restart it.  Each time EMACS is restarted  it
     asks  the  system what terminal type you are using.  Whenever you
     detach and move to a terminal of  a  different  type  you  should
     restart  EMACS  as a matter of course.  If you stopped EMACS with
     the exit command, or by interrupting it when it  was  awaiting  a
     command, then this is sure to be safe.

       The  system itself may not know what type of terminal you have.
     You should try telling the system with the :TCTYP command.


     24.2.5 URK Error (Address Space Exhausted)î     24.2.5 URK Error (Address Space Exhausted)î     24.2.5 URK Error (Address Space Exhausted)


       If attempting to visit a file or load a library causes an "URK"
     error, it means you have filled up the address space; there is no
     room inside EMACS for any more  files  or  libraries.    In  this
     situation  EMACS will try to run the function Make Space for you.î     162                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     If  EMACS is unable to do it for you, you may still be able to do
     M-X Make Space yourself.  This command compacts the  data  inside
     EMACS to free up some space.  It also offers to discard data that
     may  be  occupying  a  lot  of  space, such as the kill ring (See
     section  9.1  [Killing],  page  39.),  the   undo   memory   (See
     section  24.3  [Undo],  page 163.), and buffers created by RMAIL,
     TAGS and INFO.  Another way of freeing space is to  kill  buffers
     with  M-X  Kill Some Buffers (See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.)
     or unload libraries with M-X Kill  Libraries  (See  section  22.2
     [Libraries], page 135.).

       Use  the command M-X What Available Space to find out how close
     you are to running out of space.  It tells  you  how  many  K  of
     space you have available for additional files or libraries.

       Visiting a file causes an URK error if the file does not fit in
     the  available  virtual  memory  space,  together  with the other
     buffers and the libraries loaded.  A big enough  file  causes  an
     URK  error  all by itself.  For editing such large files, use the
     command Split File (in  the  SPLIT  library)  to  break  it  into
     subfiles.    These  will be fairly large files still, but not too
     large to edit.  After editing one or more of  the  subfiles,  use
     the  command  Unsplit  File  (also  in  SPLIT)  to  put them back
     together again.


     24.2.6 All Type-in Echoes and Nothing Else Happensî     24.2.6 All Type-in Echoes and Nothing Else Happensî     24.2.6 All Type-in Echoes and Nothing Else Happens


       If you find that EMACS  is  not  responding  to  your  commands
     except  for  echoing  them  all  at  the  bottom  of  the screen,
     including the Return character, and  that  Rubout  causes  erased
     characters to be retyped instead of erased, then you have managed
     to exit from EMACS back to TECO.  Often this follows an "Error in
     error  handler" message which indicates that a condition arose in
     which the error handler could not function.   You  can  get  back
     into  EMACS  by typing :M..L$$, or by restarting (see below).  If
     you ever want to exit back to TECO, you can do M-X Top Level with
     an argument greater than zero.  Before using :M..L$$, get rid  of
     any other characters you have typed by mistake by typing a C-G.


     24.2.7 EMACS Hung and Not Respondingî     24.2.7 EMACS Hung and Not Respondingî     24.2.7 EMACS Hung and Not Responding


       Sometimes  EMACS  gets  hung  and  C-G does not work.  The more
     drastic procedure of restarting EMACS may  work  at  such  times.
     C-G  can  fail  to  work because it only takes effect between the
     TECO commands which make up an EMACS program, never in the middleî     163                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     of  one (only a few TECO commands allow quitting at any time), so
     as to prevent  TECO's  internal  data  structures  from  becoming
     inconsistent.  If EMACS is hung inside a TECO command, C-G is not
     noticed, but restarting can still be tried.

       To  restart  EMACS,  type CALL or C-Z to stop EMACS, then $G to
     restart it.  While restarting TECO in this way  is  usually  safe
     (especially  at  times when TECO is doing I/O), there are certain
     times at which it will cause  the  TECO  data  structures  to  be
     inconsistent, so do not try it unless other measures have failed.

       Your  ultimate safeguard against a wedged EMACS is to save your
     work frequently.



     24.3 Undoing Changes to the Bufferî     24.3 Undoing Changes to the Bufferî     24.3 Undoing Changes to the Buffer


       If you mistakenly issue commands that make a  great  change  to
     the  buffer, you can often undo the change without having to know
     precisely how it came about.  This is done  by  using  M-X  Undo.
     Type  M-X  Undo<cr> and the change is undone.  It does not matter
     if you have moved the cursor since you made  the  change;  it  is
     undone where it was originally done.

       The  first  thing  Undo does is tell you what kind of change it
     plans to undo (kill, fill, undo, case-convert,  etc).    Then  it
     asks whether to go ahead.  If you say "Y", the change is actually
     undone.

       Not  all  changes  to  the  buffer  can be undone: deletion (as
     opposed to killing) can't be, and changes  in  indentation  can't
     be, nor can many forms of insertion (but they aren't as important
     since they don't destroy information).  Also, a Replace String or
     Query  Replace  can't be undone, which is a shame.  The reason is
     that actually they make many small changes, and Undo  only  knows
     how to remember one contiguous change.  Perhaps someday I will be
     able to fix this.

       As  a  result,  when  you say Undo, it may undo something other
     than the latest change if the latest  change  was  not  undoable.
     This  might seem to pile one disaster on another, but it doesn't,
                     ______î     because you can always Undo the Undo if it didn't help.  But  you
     can  avoid  even  having  to do that, if you look at what type of
     change Undo says it will undo.

       If you want to undo a considerable amount of editing, not  just
     the  last change, the Undo command can't help you, but M-X Revertî     164                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     File  (See section 13.2 [Revert], page 72.) might be able to.  If
     you  have  been  writing  a  journal  file  (See   section   24.4
     [Journals], page 164.), you can replay the journal after deleting
     the part that you don't want.



     24.4 Journal Filesî     24.4 Journal Filesî     24.4 Journal Files


       A  journal file is a record of all the commands you type during
     an editing session.  If you lose  editing  because  of  a  system
     crash, an EMACS bug, or a mistake on your part, and you have made
     a  journal  file,  you  can  replay  the journal or part of it to
     recover what you lost.  Journal files  offer  an  alternative  to
     auto saving, using less time and disk space if there is no crash,
     but  requiring  more  time  when  you  recover from a crash.  See
     section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.


     24.4.1 Writing Journal Filesî     24.4.1 Writing Journal Filesî     24.4.1 Writing Journal Files


       In order to make a journal file,  you  must  load  the  JOURNAL
     library  and  then execute M-X Start Journal File$<filename><cr>.
     Immediately, most of the current status of EMACS is  recorded  in
     the  journal  file,  and  all subsequent commands are recorded as
     they are typed.   This  happens  invisibly  and  silently.    The
     journal  file  is  made  fully up to date on the disk after every
     50th character, so the last 50 characters of type in is the  most
     you can lose.

       The   default   filenames   for  the  journal  file  are  <home
     directory>;<user name> JRNL.  There is rarely a reason to use any
     other name, because you only need one journal file unless you are
     running two EMACSes at the same time.


     24.4.2 Replaying Journal Filesî     24.4.2 Replaying Journal Filesî     24.4.2 Replaying Journal Files


       To replay the journal file, get a fresh  EMACS,  load  JOURNAL,
     and  do M-X Replay Journal File$<filename><cr>.  The filename can
     usually be omitted since normally you will have used the defaults
     when creating the journal.

       After a delay while the files, buffers and libraries are loaded
     as they were when the journal file was written, EMACS will  begin
     replaying  the  commands  in  the  journal before your very eyes.î     165                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Unlike  keyboard  macros,  which execute invisibly until they are
     finished, journal files display  as  they  are  executed.    This
     allows  you to see how far the replay has gone.  You can stop the
     process at any time by typing C-G.  Aside from that,  you  should
     not type anything on the keyboard while the replay is going on.

       If  the  need  for  a replay is the result of a system crash or
     EMACS crash, then you probably want to  replay  the  whole  file.
     This is what happens naturally.  If you are replaying because you
     made a great mistake, you probably want to stop the replay before
     the  mistake.  This is when it becomes useful to type C-G to stop
     the replay.  Alternatively, you can edit the  journal  file,  and
     delete  everything  from  the  point  of  the mistake to the end,
     before you replay it.

       Once the replay is complete, save all your  files  immediately.
     Don't tempt fate!

       If you quit with C-G in the middle of a command while writing a
     journal  file,  there is no way to record in the journal file how
     much of the command has already been completed.    So,  when  the
     journal is replayed, EMACS has to ask you to fill in for it.  The
     command  which  was  interrupted  will be replayed to completion;
     then, you are given a recursive editing level in which to restore
     the file to the desired state.  This  happens  only  if  the  C-G
     originally  interrupted  an  executing  command.    C-G  typed to
     discard an argument or partial command while EMACS is waiting for
     input can be and is replayed correctly  without  asking  you  for
     help.


     24.4.3 Journal File Formatî     24.4.3 Journal File Formatî     24.4.3 Journal File Format


       To  edit  a  journal  file,  you  must  know the format.  It is
     designed to be mostly transparent.

       The primary problem which the journal file format has to  solve
     is  how to represent 9-bit command characters in a file which can
     contain only 7-bit ASCII characters.  (We could have  filled  the
     journal  file  with  9-bit  characters, but then you would not be
     able to print it out or edit it).  The solution we have  used  is
     to represent each command by two characters in the file.

       So,  a  Control  character  is  represented  by  a  caret ("^")
     followed by the basic character, as in "^E" for Control-E.   This
     was  chosen  to be mnemonically significant.  A Meta character is
     represented by "+" followed  by  the  basic  character,  so  that
     Meta-[  is  represented  by  "+[".    A Control-Meta character isî     166                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     represented  by  "*"  followed by the basic character, as in "*X"
     for C-M-X.

       A command which is not Control or  Meta  is  represented  as  a
     space  followed  by  the  command  itself,  except that Return is
     represented by a CRLF rather than a space and a carriage  return.
     This  prevents  the  journal  file  from being one huge line, and
     makes insertion of text  very  recognizable:  the  text  inserted
     appears in the journal file alternating with spaces.

       The  Help  character,  which  is  not  covered by the scheme as
     described so far, is represented by "??".

       An asynchronous quit, which is  a  problem  for  replaying,  is
                                               ^î     represented  by  a  single  character,  a |G, while a synchronous
                                                                  ^î     quit, which can be replayed reliably, is  represented  by  ":|G".
                                                     ^î     EMACS  considers a quit synchronous, and uses ":|G" to record it,
     if EMACS was waiting for terminal input when the C-G was typed.

       Your commands themselves are not the only  information  in  the
     journal file.  EMACS records other information which is necessary
     in  replaying  the  journal  properly.    The colon character ":"
     indicates a block of such information.  Usually the extent of the
     block is easily recognizable because its contents do not resemble
     the representations of commands described above.  A  large  block
     of  information starting with a colon appears at the beginning of
     every journal file.

       Colons are also used to record the precise effects  of  certain
     commands  such  as  C-V  whose actions depend on how the text was
     displayed on the screen.  Since the effects of such commands  are
     not  completely  determined  by  the  text, replaying the command
     could produce different results, especially if done on a terminal
     with a different screen size.  The extra information recorded  in
     the  journal  makes  it  possible  to  replay these commands with
     fidelity.

       A semicolon in the journal file begins a comment, placed  there
     for  the  benefit of a human looking at the journal.  The comment
     ends at the beginning of the following line.


     24.4.4 Warningsî     24.4.4 Warningsî     24.4.4 Warnings


       Proper replaying of  a  journal  file  requires  that  all  the
     surrounding circumstances be unchanged.

       In  particular, replaying begins by visiting all the files thatî     167                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     were  visited when the writing of the journal file began; not the
     latest versions of these files, but the versions which  were  the
     latest  at  the  earlier  time.   If those versions, which may no
     longer be the  latest,  have  been  deleted,  then  replaying  is
     impossible.

       If  your init file has been changed, the commands when replayed
     may not do what they did before.

       These are the only things that can interfere with replaying, as
     long as you start writing  the  journal  file  immediately  after
     starting  EMACS.    But  as an editing session becomes longer and
     files are saved, the journal file contains increasing amounts  of
     waste  in  the form of commands whose effects are already safe in
     the newer versions of the edited files.   Replaying  the  journal
     will  replay  all  these  commands  wastefully  to generate files
     identical to those already saved, before coming to the last  part
     of   the   session  which  provides  the  reason  for  replaying.
     Therefore it becomes very desirable to start a new journal  file.
     However,  many  more  precautions  must be taken to insure proper
     replaying of a journal file which is started after EMACS has been
     used for a while.  These precautions are described here.  If  you
     cannot  follow  them,  you  must  make  a journal checkpoint (see
     below).

       If any buffer contains text which is not saved in a file at the
     time the journal file is started, it is impossible to replay  the
     journal correctly.  This problem cannot possibly be overcome.  To
     avoid  it,  M-X  Start  Journal  File  offers to save all buffers
     before actually starting the journal.

       Another problem comes from the kill ring and the other ways  in
     which EMACS remembers information from previous commands.  If any
     such  information  which  originated  before starting the journal
     file is used after  starting  it,  the  journal  file  cannot  be
     replayed.    For  example,  suppose you fill a paragraph, start a
     journal file, and  then  do  M-X  Undo?    When  the  journal  is
     replayed, it will start by doing M-X Undo, but it won't know what
     to  undo.    It  is up to you not to do anything that would cause
     such a problem.  It should not be hard.  It would be possible  to
     eliminate  this  problem by clearing out all such data structures
     when a journal file is started, if users would prefer that.

       A more difficult problem comes  from  customization.    If  you
     change  an  option  or  redefine  a command, then start a journal
     file, the journal file will have no record of  the  change.    It
     will  not  replay  correctly unless you remember to make the same
     change beforehand.  Customizations made in an init  file  do  not
     cause  a problem because the init file has also been run when theî     168                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     journal  file  is  replayed.  Customizations made directly by the
     user while the journal file is being written are also no  problem
     because  replaying will make the same changes at the right times.
     However, a customization made  while  a  journal  file  is  being
     written will be a problem if a new journal file is started.


     24.4.5 Journal Checkpointsî     24.4.5 Journal Checkpointsî     24.4.5 Journal Checkpoints


       The  only  cure  for  the  problems  of  starting  a journal in
     mid-session is to record the complete state of EMACS at the  time
     the  journal  is  begun.  This is not done normally because it is
     slow; however, you can do this if you wish by  giving  M-X  Start
     Journal  File a numeric argument.  This writes the complete state
     of EMACS into the file <home directory>;TS ESAVE.  To replay  the
     journal,  run ESAVE, the saved checkpoint, instead of EMACS; then
     load JOURNAL and do M-X Replay Journal File as  described  above.
     Be  sure  to  delete  the checkpoint if you are finished with it,
     since it tends to be large.  Delete them also when you  log  out;
     it  may  be  possible  to  have a command file which deletes them
     automatically when you log out.  Checkpoint files more than a day
     old may be deleted by others without notice; but don't  leave  it
     up to them.



     24.5 Reporting Bugsî     24.5 Reporting Bugsî     24.5 Reporting Bugs


       Sometimes  you will encounter a bug in EMACS.  To get it fixed,
     you must report it.  It is your duty to do so; but you must  know
     when to do so and how if it is to be constructive.


     24.5.1 When Is There a Bugî     24.5.1 When Is There a Bugî     24.5.1 When Is There a Bug


       If  EMACS  executes  an  illegal  instruction,  or dies with an
     operating system error message that indicates a  problem  in  the
     program (as opposed to "disk full"), then it is certainly a bug.

       If  EMACS updates the display in a way that does not correspond
     to what is in the buffer, then it is  certainly  a  bug.    If  a
     command  seems  to  do the wrong thing but the problem is gone if
     you type C-L, then it is a case of incorrect display updating.

       Taking forever to complete a command can be a bug, but you must
     make certain that it was really EMACS's  fault.    Some  commandsî     169                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     simply  take  a long time.  Quit or restart EMACS and type Help L
     to see whether the keyboard or line noise garbled the  input;  if
                                    ____î     the  input  was  such that you know it should have been processed
     quickly, report a bug.  If you don't know, try  to  find  someone
     who does know.

       If  a  command  you  are  familiar  with  causes an EMACS error
     message in  a  case  where  its  usual  definition  ought  to  be
     reasonable, it is probably a bug.

       If  a command does the wrong thing, that is a bug.  But be sure
     you know for certain what it ought to have done.  If  you  aren't
     familiar  with  the  command,  or  don't know for certain how the
     command is supposed to work, then it might  actually  be  working
     right.    Rather than jumping to conclusions, show the problem to
     someone who knows for certain.

       Finally, a command's intended definition may not  be  best  for
     editing  with.   This is a very important sort of problem, but it
     is also a matter of judgement.  Also, it is easy to come to  such
     a  conclusion  out of ignorance of some of the existing features.
     It is probably best not to complain about such  a  problem  until
     you  have  checked  the documentation in the usual ways (INFO and
     Help), feel confident  that  you  understand  it,  and  know  for
     certain  that  what  you  want  is  not  available.   If you feel
     confused about the documentation instead,  then  you  don't  have
     grounds  for an opinion about whether the command's definition is
     optimal.  Make sure you read it through and check  the  index  or
     the  menus  for  all  references  to  subjects  you  don't  fully
     understand.  If you have  done  this  diligently  and  are  still
     confused,  or  if you finally understand but think you could have
     said it better, then you have a constructive  complaint  to  make
     about  the  documentation.    It  is  just as important to report
     documentation bugs as program bugs.


     24.5.2 How to Report a Bugî     24.5.2 How to Report a Bugî     24.5.2 How to Report a Bug


       When you decide that there is a bug, it is important to  report
     it  and  to  report  it  in  a way which is useful.  What is most
     useful is  an  exact  description  of  what  commands  you  type,
     starting  with  a  fresh  EMACS  just  loaded,  until the problem
     happens.  Send the bug report to BUG-EMACS@MIT-AI.

       The most important principle in reporting a bug  is  to  report
     _____î     facts,  not  hypotheses  or  conditions.   It is always easier to
     report the facts, but people seem to prefer to strain to think up
     explanations and report them instead.  If  the  explanations  areî     170                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     based  on  guesses  about  how EMACS is implemented, they will be
     useless; we will have to try to figure out what  the  facts  must
     have  been  to  lead  to  such  speculations.   Sometimes this is
     impossible.  But in any case, it is unnecessary work for us.

       For example, suppose that you type C-X C-V  GLORP;BAZ  UGH<cr>,
     visiting  a file which (you know) happens to be rather large, and
     EMACS prints out "I feel pretty today".  The best way  to  report
     the  bug  is  with  a sentence like the preceding one, because it
     gives all the facts and nothing but the facts.

       Do not assume that the problem is due to the size of  the  file
     and  say  "When  I  visit  a large file, EMACS prints out 'I feel
     pretty today'".  This is what we mean by "guessing explanations".
     The problem is just as likely to be due to the fact that there is
     a "Z" in the filename.  If this is so,  then  when  we  got  your
     report,  we  would  try  out  the  problem  with some "big file",
     probably with no "Z" in its name, and not  find  anything  wrong.
     There  is  no way in the world that we could guess that we should
     try visiting a file with a "Z" in its name.

       Alternatively, the problem might be due to the  fact  that  the
     file  starts with exactly 25 spaces.  For this reason, you should
     make sure that you don't change the file until we have looked  at
     it.   Suppose the problem only occurs when you have typed the C-X
     C-A command previously?  This is why we ask you to give the exact
     sequence of characters you typed since loading the EMACS.

       You should not even say "visit the file ..."  instead  of  "C-X
     C-V"  unless  you know that it makes no difference which visiting
     command is used.  Similarly, rather than saying "if I have  three
     characters  on the line", say "after I type <cr> A B C <cr> C-P",
     if that is the  way  you  entered  the  text.    A  journal  file
     containing  the commands you typed to reproduce the bug is a very
     good form of report.

       If you are not in Fundamental mode when the problem occurs, you
     should say what mode you are in.

       Be sure to say what version of EMACS and TECO are running.   If
     you  don't know, type Meta-Altmode Q$EMACS Version$= FS Version$=
     $$ and EMACS will print  them  out.    (This  is  a  use  of  the
     minibuffer.  See section 23 [Minibuffer], page 156.)

       If  the  bug  occurred  in  a customized EMACS, or with several
     optional libraries loaded, it is helpful to try to reproduce  the
     bug  in a more standard EMACS with fewer libraries loaded.  It is
     best if you can make the problem happen in a completely  standard
                                                             ___î     EMACS  with no optional libraries.  If the problem does not occurî     171                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     in  a  standard  EMACS, it is very important to report that fact,
     because otherwise we will try to debug it in  a  standard  EMACS,
     not find the problem, and give up.  If the problem does depend on
     an  init  file,  then you should make sure it is not a bug in the
     init file by complaining to the person who wrote the file, first.
     He should check over his code, and verify the definitions of  the
     TECO  commands  he is using by looking in INFO;TECORD >.  Then if
     he verifies that the bug is in EMACS he should  report  it.    We
     cannot be responsible for maintaining users' init files; we might
     not even be able to tell what they are supposed to do.

       If  you  can tell us a way to cause the problem without reading
     in any files, please do so.  This makes it much easier to  debug.
     If  you  do need files, make sure you arrange for us to see their
     exact contents.  For example, it can often matter  whether  there
     are  spaces  at  the ends of lines, or a line separator after the
     last line in the buffer (nothing ought to care whether  the  last
     line is terminated, but tell that to the bugs).

       If EMACS gets an operating system error message, such as for an
     illegal  instruction, then you can probably recover by restarting
     it.  But before doing so, you should make a dump file.    If  you
     restart  or  continue the EMACS before making the dump, the trail
     will be covered and it will probably be too late to find out what
     happened.  Use the DDT command 



         :PDUMP CRASH;EMACS <yourname>


     (or use any other suitable filename) to do this.  Your bug report
     should contain the filename you used for the dump, and the  error
     message  printed  when  the  EMACS stopped, as well as the events
     leading up to the bug.  The first number in the error message  is
     the  PC,  which  is  not recorded by :PDUMP, so it must be copied
     precisely.  Also type .JPC/ and include DDT's  response  in  your
     report.

       A  dump  is  also  useful  if EMACS gets into a wedged state in
     which commands that usually work do strange things.î     172                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVEî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVEî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE
                          WORD ABBREVIATION INPUTî                          WORD ABBREVIATION INPUTî                          WORD ABBREVIATION INPUT



       Word  Abbrev  mode  allows you to abbreviate text with a single
     "word", with EMACS expanding the  abbreviation  automatically  as
     soon as you have finished the abbreviation.

       Abbrevs  are  also useful for correcting commonly misspelled or
     mistyped  words  ("thier"  could  expand  to  "their"),  and  for
     uppercasing  words  like  "EMACS" (abbrev "emacs" could expand to
     "EMACS").

       To use this mode, just do M-X Word Abbrev Mode<cr>.    (Another
     M-X Word Abbrev Mode<cr> will turn the mode off; it toggles.)

       For  example,  in  writing  this  documentation  we  could have
     defined "wam" to be  an  abbreviation  for  "word  abbrev  mode".
     After typing just the letters "wam", we see just that, "wam", but
     if we then finish the word by typing space or period or any other
     punctuation,  the  "wam" is replaced by (and redisplays as) "word
     abbrev mode".  If we capitalize the abbrev, "Wam", the  expansion
     is  capitalized:  "Word abbrev mode".  If we capitalize the whole
     abbrev, WAM", each word in the expansion  is  capitalized:  "Word
     Abbrev  Mode".    In  this  particular  example, though, we would
     define "wam" to expand to "Word Abbrev mode" since it  is  always
     to be capitalized that way.

       Thus,  typing  "I  am in wam now" produces "I am in Word Abbrev
     mode now".

       Word Abbrev mode does not  interfere  with  the  use  of  major
     modes,  such  as  Text,  Lisp, TECO, PL1, or minor modes, such as
     Auto Fill.  Those modes (or the user) may redefine what functions
     are connected to characters; this does  not  hamper  Word  Abbrev
     mode.

       There  are two kinds of word abbreviations: mode and global.  A
     mode word abbrev applies only in one  major  mode  (for  instance
     only in Text mode), while a global word abbrev applies regardless
     of  major  mode.    If some abbrev is defined both as a mode word
     abbrev for the current mode and as a global word abbrev, the mode
     word abbrev expansion takes precedence.

       For instance, you might want an abbrev "foo"  for  "find  outer
     otter"     in     Text     mode,     an    abbrev    "foo"    for
     "FINAGLE-OPPOSING-OPINIONS" in Lisp,  and  an  abbrev  "foo"  for
     "meta-syntactic  variable"  in  any  other  mode (the global word
     abbrev).î     173                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       Word  abbrevs  can be defined one at a time (adding them as you
     think of them), or many at a time (from a definition list).   You
     can  save  them  in a file and read them back later.  If you turn
     off Word Abbrev mode, abbrevs stop expanding  automatically,  but
     their  definitions  are  remembered  in case you turn Word Abbrev
     mode back on.



     25.1 Basic Usageî     25.1 Basic Usageî     25.1 Basic Usage


             C-X C-A     Define a mode abbrev  for  some  text  before
                         point.
             C-X +       Define  a  global abbrev for some text before
                         point.
             C-X C-H     Define  expansion  for  mode  abbrev   before
                         point.
             C-X -       Define  expansion  for  global  abbrev before
                         point.
             C-M-Space   Expand abbrev without inserting anything.
             M-'         Mark a  prefix  to  be  glued  to  an  abbrev
                         following.
             C-X U       Unexpand the last abbrev, or undo a C-X U. 


     M-X List Word Abbrevs<cr>
                     Shows definitions of all abbrevs.

     M-X Edit Word Abbrevs<cr>
                     Lets you edit the definition list directly.

     M-X Read Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Defines word abbrevs from a definition file.

     M-X Write Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Makes  a  definition  file  from  current  abbrev
                     definitions.

     Readable Word Abbrev Files
                     Option variable to control abbrev file format.  


       This section describes the most common use of Word Abbrev mode.
     If you don't read any more than this,  you  can  still  use  Word
     Abbrev mode quite effectively.

       Note  that  each of the above commands will also work when Word
     Abbrev mode is turned off, unlike the automatic  expanders  (suchî     174                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     as  Space  or Period), allowing you to manually define and expand
     abbrevs.  (If you want to do this, you might  also  see  the  M-X
     Expand Word Abbrevs in Region command's self-documentation.)


     25.1.1 Adding Word Abbrevsî     25.1.1 Adding Word Abbrevsî     25.1.1 Adding Word Abbrevs


       C-X C-A (^R Add Mode Word Abbrev) defines a mode abbrev for the
     word  before point (this does not include any punctuation between
     that word and point, though).  It prints the word before point in
     the echo area and asks you for that word's  abbreviation.    Type
     the abbrev (which you may edit with Rubout and C-U) followed by a
     Return.    The  abbrev  must  be  a  "word": it must contain only
     letters and digits; the case of the letters is  irrelevant.    If
     you'd  rather  define  a  global abbrev, use C-X + (^R Add Global
     Word Abbrev), which works similarly.

       You can redefine an abbrev with C-X C-A  or  C-X  +.    If  the
     abbrev  already has a definition, it tells you what that was, and
     asks for confirmation.

       To define an abbrev for more than one word of  text,  give  C-X
     C-A  or  C-X  +  a  numeric argument:  an argument greater than 0
     means the expansion is that many words before point; an  argument
     of 0 means to use the region (between point and mark).  (By using
     the region specification you can make an abbrev for any text, not
     just a sequence of words.)  The message in the echo area provides
     you  with  confirmation  of  just what the expansion will be; you
     might see:


         Text Abbrev for "this is the expansion":


       Sometimes you may think you already  had  an  abbrev  for  some
     text,  use  it, and see that it didn't expand.  In this case, the
     C-X C-H (^R Inverse Add Mode Word Abbrev) or C-X  -  (^R  Inverse
     Add  Global  Word  Abbrev) commands are helpful:  they ask you to
                _________î     type in an expansion rather than  an  abbrev.    In  addition  to
     defining  the  abbrev,  they  also expand it.  If you give them a
     numeric argument, n, they use the nth word before  point  as  the
     abbrev.

       You can kill abbrevs (cause them to no longer expand) by giving
     a  negative  numeric argument to C-X C-A or C-X +.  For instance,
     to kill the global abbrev "foo" type C-U - C-X + foo<cr>.î     175                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     25.1.2 Controlling Abbrev Expansionî     25.1.2 Controlling Abbrev Expansionî     25.1.2 Controlling Abbrev Expansion


       When  an abbrev expands, the capitalization of the expansion is
     determined by the capitalization of the abbrev:  If the abbrev is
     all lowercase, the expansion is as  defined.    If  the  abbrev's
     first  letter  is uppercase, the expansion's first letter is too.
     If the abbrev is all uppercase, there are two possibilities:   if
     the  expansion is a single word, it is all-uppercased; otherwise,
     each of its words has its first letter uppercased  (such  as  for
     use  in  a  title).   (If you don't like this distinction between
     single-word and multi-word expansions, set  the  variable  WORDAB
     All  Caps  to 1.  Then an all-uppercase abbrev will always result
     in an all-uppercase expansion.)

       Abbrevs  normally  expand  when  you  type   some   punctuation
     character;  the  abbrev  expands and the punctuation character is
     inserted.  There are other ways of expanding abbrevs:   C-M-Space
     (^R Abbrev Expand Only) causes the abbrev just before point to be
     expanded  without  inserting any other character.  C-M-Space will
     expand abbrevs even if Word Abbrev mode is  currently  off;  this
     can  be  useful  if  the  system  is  slow,  and you just want to
     manually expand a few abbrevs.  M-' (^R Word Abbrev Prefix  Mark)
     allows you to "glue" an abbrev onto any prefix:  suppose you have
     the   abbrev   "comm"   for   "committee",  and  wish  to  insert
     "intercommittee "; type "inter", M-' (you will now see "inter-"),
     and then "comm "; "inter-comm " becomes "intercommittee ".    M-X
     Expand  Word Abbrevs in Region checks each word in the region and
     offers to expand each word abbrev found; for more details see its
     self-documentation.  (It is similar  to  the  M-X  Query  Replace
     command.)


     25.1.3 Unexpanding Abbrevsî     25.1.3 Unexpanding Abbrevsî     25.1.3 Unexpanding Abbrevs


       C-X  U  (^R  Unexpand  Last Word) "unexpands" the last abbrev's
     expansion, replacing the last  expansion  with  the  abbrev  that
     caused it.  If any auto-filling was done because of the expansion
     (you  had  Auto  Fill  mode on), that too is undone.  If you type
     another C-X U, the first  one  is  "undone"  and  the  abbrev  is
     expanded   again.    Only  the  last  expansion  can  be  undone.
     Sometimes you may find that C-X U unexpands an abbrev later  than
     the one you're looking at.  In this case, do another C-X U and go
     back and manually correct the earlier expansion.

       If  you  know  beforehand  that a word will expand, and want to
     prevent it, you can simply "quote" the punctuation character with
     C-Q.  For example, typing "comm",  a  C-Q,  and  then  "."  gives
     "comm." without expanding.î     176                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     25.1.4 Listing Abbrevsî     25.1.4 Listing Abbrevsî     25.1.4 Listing Abbrevs


       M-X  List Word Abbrevs<cr> shows all currently defined abbrevs.
     An abbrev "foo" that expands to "this is an abbrev" in Text  mode
     and has been expanded 3 times, is listed as:


         foo:    (Text)  3       "this is an abbrev"


       An  abbrev "gfoo" which expands to "this is a global abbrev" in
     all modes, expanded 11 times, is listed as:


         gfoo:           11      "this is a global abbrev"


       Note that any use of the double-quote character (")  inside  an
     expansion  is  doubled,  to  distinguish the use of " from the "s
     that surround the whole expansion.  Thus  if  the  global  abbrev
     'helpc' expands to 'the "Help" character', it is listed as:


         helpc:           3       "the ""Help"" character"


     25.1.5 Editing the Definition Listî     25.1.5 Editing the Definition Listî     25.1.5 Editing the Definition List


       M-X  Edit Word Abbrevs places you in a recursive editing level,
     editing the current word abbrev definition  list.    The  abbrevs
     appear  in  the  same format used by M-X List Word Abbrevs.  When
     you exit (via C-M-C), the current word abbrevs are redefined from
     the edited definition list: any abbrevs that  have  been  deleted
     from the list are killed, new ones added to the list are defined,
     and  old ones changed are modified.  In effect, after exiting the
     Edit Word  Abbrev  editing  level,  all  previously-defined  word
     abbrevs  are  killed,  and  the edited list is used to define new
     abbrevs.  Typing C-] (Abort  Recursive  Edit)  aborts  Edit  Word
     Abbrevs, without killing or redefining any abbrevs.


     25.1.6 Saving Abbrev Definitionsî     25.1.6 Saving Abbrev Definitionsî     25.1.6 Saving Abbrev Definitions


       M-X  Write  Word  Abbrev  File$<filename><cr> writes an "abbrev
     definition file"  which  contains  the  definitions  of  all  the
     abbrevs   in   your   EMACS   now.      M-X   Read   Word  Abbrevî     177                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     File$<filename><cr> reads in such a file and defines the abbrevs.
     (Other  abbrevs  already defined are not affected unless the file
     redefines them.)  If you don't supply a filename, the  last  file
     you  used  in  either of these commands is used again, originally
     defaulting to WORDAB DEFNS.  With these  two  commands,  you  can
     save  the  abbrevs  you  defined in one EMACS and restore them in
     another  EMACS  another  day.    If  you  want  abbrevs   to   be
     automatically  saved when you exit EMACS (with C-X C-C (^R Return
     to Superior)), set the option variable Save Word  Abbrevs  to  1.
     (They are saved only if the definitions have changed.)

       The format of the definition file is designed for fast loading,
     not  ease  of  human  readability.   (But if you have to, you can
     figure it out enough to read or even edit it.)  If you  want  M-X
     Write Word Abbrev File to write a human-readable version instead,
     set  the  option Readable Word Abbrev Files to 1.  (M-X Read Word
     Abbrev File will be able to read this format, but not as fast.)

       If you have an EVARS file, you might want to put the  following
     lines  into  it  in  order to turn on Word Abbrev mode, have your
     abbrev definition file automatically read when EMACS  starts  up,
     and enable automatic exit-saving:


         *: 1 MM Word Abbrev Mode$
         *: MM Read Word Abbrev File$WORDAB DEFNS$

         Save Word Abbrevs:1


       Or if you have an init file, use the following Teco code:


         1 MM Word Abbrev Mode$
         MM Read Word Abbrev File$WORDAB DEFNS$

         1u$Save Word Abbrevs$



     25.2 Advanced Usageî     25.2 Advanced Usageî     25.2 Advanced Usage


       The  use  of  Word  Abbrev  mode  as  discussed in the previous
     section suffices for most users.  However,  some  users  who  use
     Word  Abbrev  mode a lot or have highly tailored environments may
     desire more flexibility or need  more  power  to  handle  extreme
     situations than the basic commands provide.î     178                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     25.2.1 Alternatives and Customizationsî     25.2.1 Alternatives and Customizationsî     25.2.1 Alternatives and Customizations


     M-X Make Word Abbrev$<abbrev>$<expansion>$<mode><cr>

     M-X Kill All Word Abbrevs<cr>

     M-X Make These Characters Expand$<characters><cr>

     M-X Attach Word Abbrev Keyboard Macro

     ^R Kill Mode Word Abbrev

     ^R Kill Global Word Abbrev

     Only Global Abbrevs
                     Set this option if you only use globals.

     Additional Abbrev Expanders
                     Variable for adding a few more expanders.

     WORDAB Ins Chars
                     Variable for replacing entire set of expanders.  


       The  basic commands for defining a new mode abbrev, C-X C-A (^R
     Add Mode Word Abbrev) and C-X  C-H  (^R  Inverse  Add  Mode  Word
     Abbrev),  work  only in the current mode.  A more general command
     is M-X Make Word Abbrev which takes three string arguments:   the
     first  is  the abbrev, the second is the expansion, and the third
     is the mode (such as "Text").    This  command  can  also  define
     global abbrevs, by providing "*" as the mode name.

       M-X  Kill  All  Word Abbrevs<cr> is a very quick way of killing
     every abbrev currently defined.  After this  command,  no  abbrev
     will  expand.    (A  slower but more careful way is with M-X Edit
     Word Abbrevs.)

       The functions ^R Kill Mode Word Abbrev and ^R Kill Global  Word
     Abbrev  exist,  but are not connected to any commands by default.
     If you find having to  specify  negative  arguments  to  C-X  C-A
     (^R  Add  Mode Word Abbrev) and C-X + (^R Add Global Word Abbrev)
     inconvenient, you should connect  these  functions  to  commands.
     (See section 5.2 [Set Key], page 24.  Or See section 22.6 [Init],
     page 143.)

       If  you  prefer  to use only global abbrevs then you should set
     the option variable Only Global Abbrevs to 1.  You  can  do  this
     after  or  before  turning  on  Word  Abbrev  mode;  it  makes noî     179                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     difference.    This causes the global abbrev definers which would
     otherwise be on C-X + (^R Add  Global  Word  Abbrev)  and  C-X  -
     (^R  Inverse  Add Global Word Abbrev) to be on the easier to type
     characters C-X C-A and C-X C-H.  In addition, the  checking  done
     whenever you type an expander character (a punctuation character)
     is  about  three times faster for the no-expansion case, which is
     what happens most of the time.

       Normally, the following characters cause expansion (followed by
     whatever they would normally do were Word Abbrev mode  off;  such
     as,   insert  themselves):  !~@#;$%^&*-_=+[]()\|:`"{},<.>'/?  and
     Space, Return, Linefeed, and Tab.    You  can,  however,  specify
     additional  characters  to cause expansion (digits, for instance,
     or greek letters on keyboards with Top-keys).    M-X  Make  These
     Characters  Expand$<characters><cr>  adds  the  characters in the
     string argument to the list of expanders.  Alternatively, you can
     set the variable  Additional  Abbrev  Expanders  to  contain  the
     string of characters.  (This is particularly useful in an init or
     EVARS  file.)    If  you  wish  to  completely replace the set of
     characters that cause expansion,  set  the  variable  WORDAB  Ins
     Chars  in your init file.  See section 22.6 [init], page 143, for
     details on setting variables in init and EVARS files.


     25.2.2 Manipulating Definition Listsî     25.2.2 Manipulating Definition Listsî     25.2.2 Manipulating Definition Lists


       One reason you might want to manipulate the definition lists is
     to provide more structure to the definition environment than just
     the mode vs. global structure provided normally, such as to group
     together in a file those abbrevs pertaining to one topic.

       M-X Insert Word Abbrevs<cr> inserts into the buffer a  list  of
     the  current word abbrev definitions, in the format that M-X List
     Word Abbrevs uses.  M-X Insert Word Abbrevs$<string><cr>  inserts
     some  of  the  abbrevs'  definitions;  See  section  25.2.3 [Many
     Abbrevs], page 180, for details.

       M-X Define Word Abbrevs<cr> defines a set of word abbrevs  from
     a  definition  list  in the buffer.  There should be nothing else
     besides the definition list in the buffer; or, if there  is,  you
     must  narrow  the  buffer  to  just  the  definition  list.   See
     section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.î     180                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     25.2.3 Dealing with Many Abbrevsî     25.2.3 Dealing with Many Abbrevsî     25.2.3 Dealing with Many Abbrevs


       Some  users  build  up  a  very  large number of abbrevs.  This
     causes a couple of problems:  First, defining all  those  abbrevs
     when  EMACS  starts  up  can  become  too  slow;  this problem is
     discussed in the next section.  Second, the  commands  that  deal
     with the entire definition list become unwieldy.

       M-X List Word Abbrevs$<string><cr> shows you the definitions of
     just  the  abbrev definitions containing <string> (in the abbrev,
     in the mode, or in the expansion).  The argument  is  actually  a
     TECO  search  string  (See  section  19.3  [TECO search strings],
     page 101.).  If you want to see the abbrevs which contain  either
                                                            ^î     <string1>  or  <string2>,  separate the strings with a |O; to see
     abbrev definitions containing either "defn" or "wab", do M-X List
                      ^î     Word Abbrevs$defn|Owab<cr>.

       You can provide M-X List  Word  Abbrevs  with  an  argument  to
     control  whether  the filtering string applies to just the abbrev
     (C-U 1), just the expansion (C-U 2), just the mode  (C-U  4),  or
     any  combination (the sum).  C-U 3 M-X List Word Abbrevs$lisp<cr>
     will match "lisp" against abbrevs and expansions, but not modes.

       M-X  Insert  Word  Abbrevs$<string><cr>  works  similarly,  but
     inserts the list into the buffer instead of typing it out.


     25.2.4 Dumped EMACS Environmentsî     25.2.4 Dumped EMACS Environmentsî     25.2.4 Dumped EMACS Environments


     M-X Write Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Writes  a  file of all abbrev definitions, before
                     dumping.

     M-X Read Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Reads file of abbrev definitions at init-time.

     M-X Write Incremental Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Writes a file of abbrev definitions changed since
                     dumping.

     M-X Read Incremental Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
                     Reads  file  of  changed  abbrev  definitions  at
                     startup-time.  


       Some  users  with  highly  customized EMACS environments (their
     init  files  take  a  long  time  to  run)   "dump   out"   theirî     181                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     environments,  in effect creating another EMACS-like program (the
     "dump") which starts up much faster.    (For  instance,  1.7  cpu
     seconds  instead  of 70.5 cpu seconds.  See the file INFO;MKDUMP,
     for details about a simple method of dumping environments.    See
     the  file  INFO;CONV,  for details about more general environment
     dumping.)  Since the  dumped  environment  contains  word  abbrev
     definitions,  a  dumped  environment with hundreds of abbrevs can
     start just as quickly as if it had none.  (But reading all  these
     abbrevs  with  M-X  Read  Word  Abbrev  File  in  the  init  file
     originally took a long time.)  For these users it  is  important,
     at  dump-startup  time,  to read in only those abbrevs which were
                        _____î     changed or defined since the environment was dumped out.  A  file
     which  contains  only these new abbrev's definitions is called an
     ___________ ____ ______ ____î     incremental word abbrev file.  (It also can specify that  certain
     abbrevs   are  to  be  killed  if  they  were  defined  when  the
     environment was dumped out, but subsequently killed.)

       The startup for the dump should use the Read  Incremental  Word
     Abbrev  File function instead of Read Word Abbrev File.  It takes
     the filename as a string argument, which defaults  to  INCABS  >.
     The command M-X Write Incremental Word Abbrev File$<filename><cr>
     writes  such  a  file, writing out those abbrevs more recent than
     the dump (ones read by Read Incremental Word Abbrev File and ones
     defined in the current editing session).

       Setting Save Word Abbrevs  to  -1  will  cause  an  incremental
     abbrev file to be automatically written, if necessary, when EMACS
     is exited.

       When  you  want  to  dump  out a new EMACS, first create a new,
     complete word abbrev definition file using M-X Write Word  Abbrev
                                   ___î     File.    This  file  now  has all abbrevs in it, and you can thus
     delete any incremental definition files you have.  Then start  up
     the  new  EMACS  from  scratch, using the init file, and dump it.
     (The init file in general should call Read Word Abbrev  File  and
     then  also  call  Read Incremental Word Abbrev File, just in case
     there are both kinds of files around.   The  startup  calls  only
     Read  Incremental  Word  Abbrev File.)  Note that these functions
     will return without error  if  their  files  don't  exist,  as  a
     convenience.



     25.3 Teco Details for Extension Writersî     25.3 Teco Details for Extension Writersî     25.3 Teco Details for Extension Writers


       This  section  documents  some  details  that users programming
     extensions may need to know, in order to interact  properly  with
     Word Abbrev mode operation or to build upon it.î     182                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       The  variable WORDAB Setup Hook, if non-0, is executed when the
     WORDAB library is loaded and sets itself up.   (M-X  Word  Abbrev
     Mode<cr>  in  the default EMACS environment auto-loads the WORDAB
     library.)  If there is no hook, the normal key  connections  (C-X
     C-A,  C-X  U,  etc.) are made; if there is a hook, it must do the
     connections.

       The  variable  Word  Abbrevs  Modified  is  non-0  when  abbrev
     definitions   have   changed.     This  is  used  to  signal  the
     abbrev-saving mechanism.

       The abbrev definers, such as C-X C-A (^R Add Mode Word Abbrev),
     check to see if the volatile TECO mark, FS ^R Mark$, is  set;  if
     it  is,  then the region between point and FS ^R Mark$ is used as
     the expansion.  The intention  is  to  provide  a  mechanism  for
     simple  but safe expansion marking.  See section 22.5 [FS Flags],
     page 142.

       Finally, the general way that Word Abbrev mode works  is  this:
     at  certain  times,  when  characters  are  likely  to  have been
     reconnected, a Word Abbrev mode subroutine looks at each  of  the
     expander  characters  to  see  if they are running an expander or
     have been reconnected.  If they don't have  expanders,  they  are
     connected  to  an  expander  function  (which  first  checks  for
     expansion and then calls the "old" function, what  the  character
     was  connected  to before).  The problem is that it is not really
     possible to efficiently catch all the times  that  characters  of
     interest  are reconnected.  So, as a good guess, Word Abbrev mode
     looks at these characters when the & Set Mode  Line  function  is
     called.    This  happens  when  major or minor modes change, when
     buffer switching happens, and when Set Key is used.    These  are
     the  standard  times  that connections are changed.  However, the
     extension writer must  be  careful  about  reconnecting  expander
     characters.  If an extension might do this, it should do 1FS Mode
     Change$ to cause expansions to be redefined.î     183                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            CHAPTER TWENTY-SIXî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-SIXî                            CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
            THE PICTURE SUBSYSTEM, AN EDITOR FOR TEXT PICTURESî            THE PICTURE SUBSYSTEM, AN EDITOR FOR TEXT PICTURESî            THE PICTURE SUBSYSTEM, AN EDITOR FOR TEXT PICTURES



       If  you  want  to  create a picture made out of text characters
     (for example, a picture  of  the  division  of  a  register  into
     fields,  as a comment in a program), the PICTURE package can make
     it easier.

       Do M-X Load Lib$PICTURE<cr>,  and  then  M-X  Edit  Picture  is
     available.    Do M-X Edit Picture with point and mark surrounding
     the picture to be  edited.    Edit  Picture  enters  a  recursive
     editing  level  (which  you  exit  with C-M-C, as usual) in which
     certain commands are  redefined  to  make  picture  editing  more
     convenient.

       While you are inside Edit Picture, all the lines of the picture
     are   padded   out  to  the  margin  with  spaces.    This  makes
     two-dimensional  motion  very  convenient;  C-B  and   C-F   move
     horizontally,  and  C-N  and  C-P  move  vertically  without  the
     inaccuracy of a ragged right margin.  When  you  exit  from  Edit
     Picture,  spaces at the ends of lines are removed.  Nothing stops
     you from moving outside the bounds of the  picture,  but  if  you
     make any changes there slightly random things may happen.

       Edit  Picture  makes  alteration  of  the picture convenient by
     redefining the way printing characters and Rubout work.  Printing
     characters  are  defined  to  replace  (overwrite)  rather   than
     inserting  themselves.    Rubout  is  defined  to undo a printing
     character:  it replaces the previous character with a space,  and
     moves back to it.

       Return  is  defined  to move to the beginning of the next line.
     This makes it usable for moving to the next apparently blank (but
     actually filled with nothing but spaces) line, just  as  you  use
     Return  normally  with  lines that are really empty.  C-O creates
     new blank lines after point, but they are created full of spaces.

       Tab  is  redefined  to  indent  (by  moving  over  spaces,  not
     inserting  them)  to  under  the  first non-space on the previous
     line.  Linefeed is as usual equivalent to Return followed by Tab.

       Four movement-control commands exist to aid in drawing vertical
     or horizontal lines: If you  give  the  command  M-X  Up  Picture
     Movement,  each  character  you  type  thereafter  will cause the
     cursor to move up instead of to the right.  Thus if you  want  to
     draw  a line of dashes up to some point, you can give the command
     Up Picture Movement, type enough dashes to  make  the  line,  andî     184                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     then  give  the command Right Picture Movement to put things back
     to normal.  Similarly, there are functions to cause downward  and
     leftward   movement:  Down  Picture  Movement  and  Left  Picture
     Movement.  These commands remain in effect only  until  you  exit
     the  Edit  Picture  function,  (One final note: you can use these
     cursor movement commands outside of Edit Picture too,  even  when
     not in Overwrite mode.  You have to be somewhat careful though.)

       Possible  future  extensions include alteration of the kill and
     un-kill commands to replace instead of  deleting  and  inserting,
     and to handle rectangles if two corners are specified using point
     and the mark.

       The DRAW library is a user-contributed library containing other
     commands useful for editing pictures.î     185                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                           CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVENî                           CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVENî                           CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
                             SORTING FUNCTIONSî                             SORTING FUNCTIONSî                             SORTING FUNCTIONS



       The  SORT  library  contains  functions called Sort Lines, Sort
     Paragraphs and Sort Pages, to sort the region alphabetically line
     by line, paragraph by paragraph or page by page.    For  example,
     Sort Lines rearranges the lines in the region so that they are in
     alphabetical order.

       Paragraphs   are   defined   in   the   same  way  as  for  the
     paragraph-motion  functions  (See  section   11.2   [Paragraphs],
     page  52.)  and pages are defined as for the page motion commands
     (See section 18 [Pages], page 94.).  All of these  functions  can
     be   undone  by  the  Undo  command  (See  section  24.3  [Undo],
     page 163.).  A numeric argument tells them to sort  into  reverse
     alphabetical order.

       You can rearrange pages to any way you like using the functions
     Make  Page  Permutation Table and Permute Pages From Table.  Make
     Page Permutation Table starts you editing a table containing  the
     first  line  of  each page.  This table is kept in a buffer named
     *Permutation Table*.  You specify the new ordering for the  pages
     by  rearranging  the first lines into the desired order.  You can
     also omit or duplicate  pages  by  omitting  or  duplicating  the
     lines.

       When  you are finished rearranging the lines, use Permute Pages
     From Table to rearrange the entire original file  the  same  way.
     Reselect  the  original  buffer  first.   The permuted version is
     constructed in a buffer named  *Permuted  File*.    The  original
     buffer  is  not  changed.   You can use Insert Buffer to copy the
     data into the original buffer.î     186                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                APPENDIX Iî                                APPENDIX Iî                                APPENDIX I
                       PARTICULAR TYPES OF TERMINALSî                       PARTICULAR TYPES OF TERMINALSî                       PARTICULAR TYPES OF TERMINALS



     I.1 Ideal Keyboardsî     I.1 Ideal Keyboardsî     I.1 Ideal Keyboards


       An  ideal  EMACS  keyboard  can  be recognized because it has a
     Control key and a Meta key on each side, with another key labeled
     Top above them.

       On an ideal keyboard,  to  type  any  character  in  the  9-bit
     character  set,  hold  down  Control or Meta as appropriate while
     typing the key for the rest of the character.    To  type  C-M-K,
     type K while holding down Control and Meta.

       You  will notice that there is a key labeled "Escape" and a key
     labeled "Alt".  The Altmode character is the one  labeled  "Alt".
     "Escape"  has  other functions entirely; it is handled by ITS and
     has nothing to do with EMACS.  While we are  talking  about  keys
     handled  by ITS, on Meta keyboards the way to interrupt a program
     is CALL, rather than Control-Z,  and  entering  communicate  mode
                                                                   ^î     uses the BACK-NEXT key rather than Control-_.  CALL echoes as |Z,
     but  if  you  type  C-Z  it  is  just an ordinary character which
     happens to be  an  EMACS  command  to  return  to  the  superior.
                                      ^                  ^î     Similarly,  BACK-NEXT  echoes as |_ but if you type |_ it is just
     an EMACS command which happens not to be defined.

       The key labeled "Top" is an extra shift key.   It  is  used  to
     produce  the  peculiar "SAIL" graphics characters which appear on
     the same  keys  as  the  letters.    The  "Shift"  key  gets  you
     upper-case  letters,  but "Top" gets you the SAIL characters.  As
     EMACS commands, these  characters  are  normally  self-inserting,
     like all printing characters.  But once inserted, SAIL characters
     are  really  the  same  as  ASCII  control  characters, and since
     characters in files are just 7 bits there is no way to tell  them
     apart.      EMACS  can  display  them  either  as  ASCII  control
     characters, using an uparrow or caret to indicate them, or it can
     display them as SAIL characters, whichever you like.  The command
     Control-Alpha (SAIL Character Mode) toggles the choice.  Alpha is
     a SAIL character and you can only type it on a  terminal  with  a
     Top key, but only those terminals can display the SAIL characters
     anyway.    SAIL  characters  are  displayed  if the variable SAIL
     Character Mode is nonzero.

       One other thing you can do with the Top key is  type  the  Help
     character,  which  is Top-H on these keyboards.  BACK-NEXT H also
     works, though.î     187                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       For  inserting  an  Altmode,  on an ideal keyboard you can type
     C-M-Altmode.  C-Altmode is a synonym for C-M-C (^R Exit).

       The  "bit  prefix"  characters  that  you  must  use  on  other
     terminals are also available on terminals with Meta keys, in case
     you  find  them more convenient or get into habits on those other
     terminals.

       To type numeric arguments on these keyboards, type  the  digits
     or minus sign while holding down either Control or Meta.



     I.2 Keyboards with an "Edit" keyî     I.2 Keyboards with an "Edit" keyî     I.2 Keyboards with an "Edit" key


       Keyboards  with  Edit  keys  probably  belong  to  Datamedia or
     Teleray terminals.  The Edit and Control keys are a pair of shift
     keys.  Use the Control key to type  Control  characters  and  the
     Edit  key  to  type  Meta  characters.    Thus,  the  9-bit EMACS
     character C-M-Q is typed by striking the "Q"  key  while  holding
     down "Edit" and "Control".

       While  the  Edit  key  is  a  true independent bit which can be
     combined with anything else you can type, the Control key  really
     means "ASCII control".  Thus, the only Control characters you can
     type  are  those which exist in ASCII.  This includes C-A through
     C-Y, C-], C-@, C-\, and C-^.  C-Z and C-_ can  be  typed  on  the
     terminal  but  they  are  intercepted by the operating system and
     therefore unavailable as EMACS commands.  C-[  is  not  available
     because  its  spot  in  ASCII  is  pre-empted  by  Altmode.   The
     corresponding Control-Meta commands are also hard to  type.    If
     you  can't  type  C-;  directly,  then  you also can't type C-M-;
     directly.

       Though you can't type C-; directly, you can use the bit  prefix
     character  C-^  and  type C-^ ;.  Similarly, while you can't type
     C-M-;, you can use the Control-Meta prefix C-C and  type  C-C  ;.
     Because C-^ is itself awkward, we have designed the EMACS command
     set  so  that  the hard-to-type Control (non-Meta) characters are
     rarely needed.

       In order to type the Help character you must actually type  two
     characters,  C-_  and  H.    C-_  is  an escape character for ITS
     itself, and C-_ followed  by  H  causes  ITS  to  give  the  Help
     character as input to EMACS.

       To  type  numeric  arguments,  it is best to type the digits or
     minus sign while holding down the Edit key.î     188                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     I.3 ASCII Keyboardsî     I.3 ASCII Keyboardsî     I.3 ASCII Keyboards


       An  ASCII keyboard allows you to type in one keystroke only the
     command characters with equivalents in ASCII.  No Meta characters
     are possible, and not all Control characters are possible either.
     The  Control  characters  which  you  can   type   directly   are
     C-A  through  C-Y,  C-],  C-@,  C-\, and C-^.  C-Z and C-_ can be
     typed on the terminal but they are intercepted by  the  operating
     system  and  therefore unavailable as EMACS commands.  C-[ is not
     available because its spot in ASCII is pre-empted by Altmode.

       Those characters which you can't type directly can be typed  as
     two  character sequences using the bit prefix characters Altmode,
     C-C and C-^.  Altmode turns on the Meta bit of the character that
     follows it.  Thus, M-A can be typed as Altmode A,  and  C-M-A  as
     Altmode  C-A.    Altmode  can  be  used  to get almost all of the
     characters that can't be typed directly.  C-C can be used to type
     any Control-Meta character, including a few that Altmode can't be
     used for because the corresponding non-Meta  character  isn't  on
     the  keyboard.    Thus,  while  you  can't  type C-M-; as Altmode
     Control-;, since there is no Control-; in  ASCII,  you  can  type
     C-M-; as C-C ;.  The Control (non-Meta) characters which can't be
     typed  directly  require  the  use of C-^, as in C-^ < to get the
     effect of C-<.  Because C-^ by itself is hard to type, the  EMACS
     command  set  is arranged so that most of these non-ASCII Control
     characters are not very important.  Usually  they  have  synonyms
     which  are  easier  to  type.    In fact, in this manual only the
     easier-to-type forms are usually mentioned.

       In order to type the Help character you must actually type  two
     characters,  C-_  and  H.    C-_  is  an escape character for ITS
     itself, and C-_ followed  by  H  causes  ITS  to  give  the  Help
     character as input to EMACS.

       On  ASCII  keyboards, you can type a numeric argument by typing
     an Altmode followed by the minus sign and/or digits.  Then  comes
     the  command  for  which  the argument is intended.  For example,
     type Altmode 5 C-N to move down five lines.  If the command is  a
     Meta command, it must have an Altmode of its own, as in Altmode 5
     Altmode F to move forward five words.

       Note  to  customizers:  this  effect  requires  redefining  the
     Meta-digit commands, since the Altmode and the first digit amount
     to a Meta-digit character.  The new definition is ^R Autoarg, and
     the redefinition is done by the default init file.

       If you use numeric arguments very often, and you dislike having
     to start one with an Altmode, you might enjoy using Autoarg mode,î     189                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     in  which  you  can specify a numeric argument by just typing the
     digits.  See section 4 [Arguments], page 19, for details.



     I.4 Upper-case-only Terminalsî     I.4 Upper-case-only Terminalsî     I.4 Upper-case-only Terminals


       On terminals lacking the ability to display or enter lower case
     characters, a special input and output  case-flagging  convention
     has  been  defined  for  editing  files  which contain lower case
     characters.

       The customary escape convention is that a  slash  prefixes  any
     upper case letter; all unprefixed letters are lower case (but see
     below  for  the  "lower  case  punctuation  characters").    This
     convention is chosen because lower case is usually more  frequent
     in  files  containing  any lower case at all.  Upper case letters
     are displayed with a slash  ("/")  in  front.    Typing  a  slash
     followed  by  a  letter  is  a  good  way to insert an upper case
     letter.  Typing a letter without a slash  inserts  a  lower  case
     letter.    For  the  most  part, the buffer will appear as if the
     slashes had simply been inserted (type /A and it inserts an upper
     case A, which displays as /A), but  cursor-motion  commands  will
     reveal  that  the  slash and the A are really just one character.
     Another way to insert an upper-case letter is to  quote  it  with
     C-Q.

       Note that this escape convention applies only to display of the
     buffer  and  insertion  in  the  buffer.    It  does not apply to
     arguments of commands (it is hardly ever useful for  them,  since
     case  is  ignored in command names and most commands' arguments).
     Case conversion is performed when  you  type  commands  into  the
     minibuffer, but not when the commands are actually executed.

       The ASCII character set includes several punctuation characters
     whose  codes  fall  in  the  lower case range and which cannot be
     typed or displayed on terminals that  cannot  handle  lower  case
     letters.   These are the curly braces ("{" and "}"), the vertical
     bar ("|"), the tilde ("~"), and the accent grave  ("`").    Their
     upper  case  equivalents  are,  respectively, the square brackets
     ("[" and "]"), the backslash ("\"),  the  caret  ("^"),  and  the
     atsign  ("@").   For these punctuation characters, EMACS uses the
     opposite convention of that used for letters: the ordinary, upper
     case punctuations display as and are entered as themselves, while
     the lower case forms are prefixed by slashes.   This  is  because
     the "lower case" punctuations are much less frequently used.  So,
     to insert an accent grave, type "/@".î     190                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       When  the  slash  escape  convention  is  in effect, a slash is
     displayed and entered as two slashes.

       This slash-escape convention is not normally  in  effect.    To
     turn  it  on,  the  TECO  command -1$ (minus one dollar sign, not
     Altmode!) must be executed.  The easiest way to do this is to use
     the minibuffer:  Altmode Altmode -1$ Altmode Altmode.    To  turn
     off the escape convention (for editing a file of all upper case),
     the  command  is  0$  (zero  dollar  sign), or Altmode Altmode 0$
     Altmode Altmode.  If you use such a bad terminal frequently,  you
     can  define  yourself  an  EMACS  extension,  a  command  to turn
     slash-escape on and off.

       The lower case editing feature is actually more  flexible  than
     described  here.  Refer to the TECO commands F$ (dollar sign) and
     FS CASE$, using M-X TECDOC, for full details.  See  section  22.5
     [FS Flags], page 142.



     I.5 The SLOWLY Package for Slow Terminalsî     I.5 The SLOWLY Package for Slow Terminalsî     I.5 The SLOWLY Package for Slow Terminals


       The  SLOWLY  library  is  intended  as  an aid for people using
     display terminals at slow speeds.  It provides means of  limiting
     redisplay  to  smaller  parts  of the screen, and for turning off
     redisplay for a time while you edit.

       To use SLOWLY, do M-X  Load  Library$SLOWLY<cr>,  and  if  your
     terminal  is  a display operating at 1200 baud or less (or if its
     speed is unknown) SLOWLY will set up the commands described here.

       Comments, bugs, and suggestions via Arpanet mail to RWK@MIT-MC,
     or by US mail or phone to the author of this manual.


     I.5.1. Brief Descriptionî     I.5.1. Brief Descriptionî     I.5.1. Brief Description


       SLOWLY  provides  an  alternate  version  of  the   incremental
     searching  commands  on  C-S and C-R, ^R Edit Quietly on C-X Q, a
     way to shrink the screen at either the top or the bottom on  M-O,
     and  more  flexibility  in  where  minibuffers get displayed.  If
     SLOWLY is  loaded,  it  redefines  these  commands  only  if  the
     terminal speed is 1200 baud or less.î     191                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     I.5.2. SLOWLY Commandsî     I.5.2. SLOWLY Commandsî     I.5.2. SLOWLY Commands


       The commands provided are:


     M-O  (^R Set Screen Size) 
                     This  function  reduces  the amount of the screen
                     used for displaying your  text,  down  to  a  few
                     lines  at  the  top  or  the  bottom.   If called
                     without an argument, it will use the same size as
                     last time (or 3 if it hasn't been called before).
                     If given a positive argument, that is taken to be
                     the number of lines to use  at  the  top  of  the
                     screen.    If  given  a  negative argument, it is
                     taken to be the number of lines at the bottom  of
                     the  screen.    If  given  an  argument  of 0, it
                     returns to the use of the  entire  screen.    The
                     section   of   the  screen  that  is  in  use  is
                     (defaultly) delimited by  a  line  of  6  dashes.
                     This  command  sets  the  variable  Short Display
                     Size.

     C-S  (^R Slow Display I-Search) 
                     This function is just like the usual  incremental
                     search,  except  if  the search would run off the
                     screen and cause  a  redisplay,  it  narrows  the
                     screen  to  use  only  a  few lines at the top or
                     bottom of the screen  to  do  the  redisplay  in.
                     When the search is exited, use of the full screen
                     resumes.    The  size  of the window used for the
                     search is the value of the variable  Slow  Search
                     Lines.    If  it is positive, it is the number of
                     lines at top of screen; if negative,  it  is  the
                     number of lines at bottom of screen.  The default
                     is   1.    The  variable  Slow  Search  Separator
                     contains the string used to show the end  of  the
                     search window.  By default it is six dashes.  See
                     section 10 [Search], page 46.

     C-R  (^R Slow Reverse Display I-Search) 
                     This  searches  in  backwards  in the style of ^R
                     Slow Display I-Search.

     C-X Q  (^R Edit Quietly) 
                     This function enters a  recursive  editing  level
                     with  redisplay  inhibited.  This means that your
                     commands are carried out but the screen does  not
                     change.  C-L with no argument redisplays.  So youî     192                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     can  update  the  screen  when  you want to.  Two
                     C-L's in a row clear the  screen  and  redisplay.
                     C-L  with  an argument repositions the window, as
                     usual (See section 15 [C-L], page 87.).  To  exit
                     and resume continuous redisplay, use C-M-C.


     I.5.3. Minibuffersî     I.5.3. Minibuffersî     I.5.3. Minibuffers


       SLOWLY  provides  control  over how minibuffers display on your
     screen.  The variable Minibuffer Size specifies how many lines it
     takes up.  If this is made negative, the minibuffer  will  appear
     at the bottom of the screen instead of the top.  Thus one mode of
     operation  which some people like is to use ^R Set Screen Size to
     set up to not use the bottom 3  lines  of  the  screen,  and  set
     Minibuffer  Size to -3.  This will permanently reserve 3 lines at
     the bottom of the screen for the  minibuffer.    See  section  23
     [Minibuffer], page 156.

       The  variable  Minibuffer  Separator  holds  the string used to
     separate the minibuffer area from the rest of  the  screen.    By
     default, this is six dashes.

       SLOWLY  installs  its  minibuffer by defining the variable MM &
     Minibuffer.


     I.5.4. SLOWLY Optionsî     I.5.4. SLOWLY Optionsî     I.5.4. SLOWLY Options


       The simplest way to run SLOWLY is to simply load  it,  and  use
     the  default  key  assignments,  etc.    SLOWLY sets up those key
     assignments only if your terminal is no faster than 1200 baud.

       If you want SLOWLY to not  set  up  these  things  unless  your
     terminal  is  running  at  300  baud  or  slower  (ugh!), set the
     variable SLOWLY Maximum Speed  to  the  highest  speed  at  which
     SLOWLY is desired.  Put the following in your EMACS init file:  


         300 M.VSLOWLY Maximum Speed$


       If you don't like the command assignments set up by SLOWLY, you
     can  override  them  by  defining  the variable SLOWLY Setup Hook
     before loading SLOWLY.  The value  should  be  TECO  commands  to
     define the command assignments you wish.î     193                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       SLOWLY  normally  uses lines of six dashes to separate areas of
     the screen.  You can tell  it  to  use  something  else  instead.
     Minibuffers  use  the value of Minibuffer Separator, searches use
     the value  of  Slow  Search  Separator.    If  one  of  these  is
     unspecified  (the  variable does not exist), the value of Default
     Separator is used.  The separator for small screen mode is always
     the value of Default Separator.  If the value  specified  is  the
     null  string,  a  blank  line is used.  If the value specified is
     zero, nothing (not even a blank line) is used.   This  is  useful
     for  searches,  since you aren't going to be doing any editing in
     the search window.

       Even though SLOWLY does not redefine the  commands  on  a  fast
     terminal,  you  might  wish  to load it only on slow terminals to
     save address space the rest of the time.  This can be done in  an
     init file with 


         fsospeed$-1200:"g m(m.mLoad Library$)SLOWLY$'î     194                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                APPENDIX IIî                                APPENDIX IIî                                APPENDIX II
                   USE OF EMACS FROM PRINTING TERMINALSî                   USE OF EMACS FROM PRINTING TERMINALSî                   USE OF EMACS FROM PRINTING TERMINALS



       While  EMACS  was  designed to be used from a display terminal,
     you can use it effectively from a printing terminal.  You cannot,
     however, learn EMACS using one.

       All EMACS commands have the same editing effect from a printing
     terminal as they do from a display.  All that is different is how
     they try to show what they have done.  EMACS attempts to make the
     same commands that you would use on a display terminal  act  like
     an  interactive  line-editor.    It  does not do as good a job as
     editors designed originally for that  purpose,  but  it  succeeds
     well  enough  to  keep  you  informed  of  what your commands are
     accomplishing, provided you know what they are supposed to do and
     know how they would look on a display.

       The usual buffer display convention for  EMACS  on  a  printing
     terminal  is  that the part of the current line before the cursor
     is printed out, with the cursor following (at the right  position
     in  the  line).    What  follows  the  cursor  on the line is not
     immediately visible, but normally you will have a printout of the
     original contents of the line a little ways back  up  the  paper.
     For  example, if the current line contains the word "FOOBAR", and
     the cursor is after the "FOO", just "FOO"  would  appear  on  the
     paper,  with  the cursor following it.  Typing the C-F command to
     move over the "B" would cause "B" to  be  printed,  so  that  you
     would  now  see  "FOOB"  with  the  cursor  following  it.    All
     forward-motion commands  that  move  reasonably  short  distances
     print out what they move over.

       Backward  motion  is handled in a complicated way.  As you move
     back, the terminal backspaces to the correct  place.    When  you
     stop  moving  back  and  do something else, a linefeed is printed
     first thing so that  the  printing  done  to  reflect  subsequent
     commands  does  not  overwrite  the  text you moved back over and
     become garbled by it.  The  Rubout  command  acts  like  backward
     motion,  but  also  prints a slash over the character rubbed out.
     Other backwards deletion commands act like backward motion;  they
     do not print slashes (it would be an improvement if they did).

       One  command  is  different  on a printing terminal: C-L, which
     normally means  "clear  the  screen  and  redisplay".    With  no
     argument,  it retypes the entire current line.  An argument tells
     it to retype the specified number of  lines  around  the  current
     line.î     195                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



       On  printing  terminals,  C-S  (^R Incremental Search) does not
     print out the context automatically.  To see what you have  found
     at any stage, type C-L.  This types out the current line but does
     not  exit  the  search.  All the normal facilities of incremental
     searching are available for finding something else if you had not
     found the right place initially.

       Unfortunately, EMACS cannot perfectly attain its goal of making
     the text printed on the current line reflect the current line  in
     the  buffer,  and  keeping  the horizontal position of the cursor
     correct.  One reason is that  it  is  necessary  for  complicated
     commands  to echo, but echoing them screws up the "display".  The
     only solution  is  to  type  a  C-L  whenever  you  have  trouble
     following  things  in your mind.  The need to keep a mental model
     of the text being edited is, of course, the fundamental defect of
     all printing terminal editors.

       Note:  it is possible to make a specific  command  print  on  a
     printing  terminal  in  whatever way is desired, if that is worth
     while.  For example, Linefeed knows  explicitly  how  to  display
     itself,  since the general TECO redisplay mechanism isn't able to
     handle it.  Suggestions for how individual commands  can  display
     themselves  are  welcome,  as long as they are algorithmic rather
     than simply of the form "please do the right thing".î     196                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                 GLOSSARYî                                 GLOSSARYî                                 GLOSSARY



     Aborting        Aborting  a  recursive editing level (q.v.) means
                     canceling the command which invoked the recursive
                     editing.  For example, if  you  abort  editing  a
                     message  to  be  sent,  the  message is not sent.
                     Aborting is done  with  the  command  C-].    See
                     section 24.1 [Aborting], page 159.

     Altmode         Altmode  is  a character, labelled Escape on some
                     keyboards.  It is the bit prefix character (q.v.)
                     used to enter Meta-characters when  the  keyboard
                     does  not  have a Meta (q.v.) key.  See section 2
                     [Characters], page 10.  Also, it delimits  string
                     arguments  to  extended  commands.  See section 5
                     [Extended Commands], page 21.

     Balance Parentheses 
                     EMACS  can  balance   parentheses   manually   or
                     automatically.    You  can  ask  to move from one
                     parenthesis   to   the   matching   one.      See
                     section  20.6.1  [Lists],  page  111.    When you
                     insert a close parenthesis, EMACS  can  show  the
                     matching  open.    See  section  20.4 [Matching],
                     page 105.

     Bit Prefix Character 
                     A  bit  prefix  character  is  a  command   which
                     combines  with  the  next character typed to make
                     one character.  They  are  used  for  effectively
                     typing  commands which the keyboard being used is
                     not  able  to  send.    For  example,  to  use  a
                     Meta-character  when  there is no Meta key on the
                     keyboard, the bit prefix character Altmode (q.v.)
                     is needed.  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     Buffer          The buffer is the basic editing unit; one  buffer
                     corresponds  to  one  piece of text being edited.
                     You can have several buffers, but at any time you
                     are editing  only  one,  the  "selected"  buffer,
                     though  two can be visible when you are using two
                     windows.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     C-              C is an abbreviation for Control, in the name  of
                     a   character.     See  section  2  [Characters],
                     page 10.î     197                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     C-M-            C-M-  is an abbreviation for Control-Meta, in the
                     name of a character.  See section 2 [Characters],
                     page 10.

     Comment         A comment is text in a program which is  intended
                     only  for  humans  reading  the  program,  and is
                     marked specially so that the compiler will ignore
                     it.  EMACS offers special commands  for  creating
                     and   killing   comments.      See  section  20.5
                     [Comments], page 107.

     Command         A  command  is  a  character   or   sequence   of
                     characters  which,  when typed by the user, fully
                     specifies one action to be  performed  by  EMACS.
                     For example, "X" and "Control-F" and "Meta-X Text
                     Mode<cr>"   are   commands.      See   section  2
                     [Characters],  page  10.    Sometimes  the  first
                     character  of  a  multi-character command is also
                     considered a command:  M-X  Text  Mode<cr>  is  a
                     command  (an extended command), and M-X is also a
                     command (a command to read a  function  name  and
                     invoke  the  function).   See section 5 [Extended
                     Commands], page 21.

     Completion      Completion   is   what   EMACS   does   when   it
                     automatically  fills  out  the  beginning  of  an
                     extended command name into the full name,  or  as
                     much  of  it  as  can  be  deduced  for  certain.
                     Completion occurs when Altmode, Space  or  Return
                     is  typed.    See  section 5 [Extended Commands],
                     page 21.

     Connected       A character command in EMACS works by  calling  a
                     function    which    it    is   "connected"   to.
                     Customization   often   involves   connecting   a
                     character to a different function.  See "Dispatch
                     table".  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     Continuation Line 
                     When  a  line of text is longer than the width of
                     the screen, it is displayed on more than one line
                     of screen.  We say that the  line  is  continued,
                     and  that all screen lines used but the first are
                     called continuation lines.  See section 3  [Basic
                     Editing], page 15.

     Control         Control  is  the name of a bit which each command
                     character  does  or  does   not   contain.      A
                     character's name includes the word Control if theî     198                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Control  bit is part of that character.  Ideally,
                     this means that the character is typed using  the
                     Control  key:  Control-A  is  typed by typing "A"
                     while holding down Control.   On  most  keyboards
                     the  Control  key  works  in only some cases; the
                     rest of the time, a bit prefix  character  (q.v.)
                     must  be  used.    See  section  2  [Characters],
                     page 10.

     Control-Character 
                     A Control character is a character which includes
                     the Control bit.

     Control-X Command 
                     A Control-X command is  a  two-character  command
                     whose  first  character  is  the prefix character
                     Control-X.  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     <cr>            <cr> stands for the carriage return character, in
                     contexts  where  the  word  "Return"   might   be
                     confusing.  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     CRLF            CRLF  stands  for the sequence of two characters,
                     carriage return followed by  linefeed,  which  is
                     used to separate lines in files and in text being
                     edited  in  EMACS.    See section 2 [Characters],
                     page 10.

     Cursor          The cursor is the  object  on  the  screen  which
                     indicates  the  position  called  point (q.v.) at
                     which insertion and deletion takes  place.    The
                     cursor  is part of the terminal, and often blinks
                     or underlines the character where it is  located.
                     See section 1 [Screen], page 5.

     Customization   Customization  is making minor changes in the way
                     EMACS  works.    It  is  often  done  by  setting
                     variables    (See   section   22.3   [Variables],
                     page  137.)  or  by  reconnecting  commands  (See
                     section 5.2 [Functions], page 24.).

     Defun           A  defun  is  a  list  at  the  top level of list
                     structure in a Lisp program.    It  is  so  named
                     because  most  such  lists  are calls to the Lisp
                     function defun.   See  section  20.6.2  [Defuns],
                     page 114.

     Delete          This  is the label used on some keyboards for the
                     Rubout character.î     199                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Deletion        Deletion  means  erasing  text without saving it.
                     EMACS deletes text only when it is  expected  not
                     to  be  worth saving (all whitespace, or only one
                     character).  The alternative is  killing  (q.v.).
                     See section 9.1 [Killing], page 39.

     Dispatch Table  The   dispatch   table   is   what   records  the
                     connections (q.v.)  from  command  characters  to
                     functions.    Think  of  a  telephone switchboard
                     connecting   incoming   lines    (commands)    to
                     telephones (functions).  A standard EMACS has one
                     set  of  connections; a customized EMACS may have
                     different   connections.      See   section   5.2
                     [Functions], page 24.

     Echo Area       The  echo  area  is the bottom three lines of the
                     screen,  used  for  echoing  the   arguments   to
                     commands,  for  asking  questions,  and  printing
                     brief messages.  See section 1 [Screen], page 5.

     Echoing         Echoing is acknowledging the receipt of  commands
                     by  displaying  them  (in  the  echo area).  Most
                     programs  other  than  EMACS   echo   all   their
                     commands.    EMACS  never echoes single-character
                     commands; longer commands echo only if you  pause
                     while typing them.

     Error Messages  Error messages are single lines of output printed
                     by EMACS when the user or a TECO program asks for
                     something  impossible.  They appear at the top of
                     the screen and end with a question mark.

     Escape          Escape is the label used on  some  keyboards  for
                     the Altmode character.

     Exiting         Exiting   EMACS   means   returning   to  EMACS's
                     superior,  normally  HACTRN.    See  section  6.4
                     [Exiting],  page 31.  Exiting a recursive editing
                     level (q.v.) means  allowing  the  command  which
                     invoked   the   recursive   editing  to  complete
                     normally.  For example,  if  you  are  editing  a
                     message  to be sent, and you exit, the message is
                     sent.

     Extended Command 
                     An extended command is a command  which  consists
                     of  the  character Meta-X followed by the command
                     name (really, the name of a function (q.v.)).  An
                     extended command requires several  characters  ofî     200                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     input,  but its name is made up of English words,
                     so it  is  easy  to  remember.    See  section  5
                     [Extended Commands], page 21.

     Extension       Extension  means making changes to EMACS which go
                     beyond the bounds  of  mere  customization.    If
                     customization is moving the furniture around in a
                     room,  extension  is building new furniture.  See
                     the file INFO;CONV.

     Filling         Filling text means moving text from line to  line
                     so  that all the lines are approximately the same
                     length.  See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Function        A function is a named subroutine of EMACS.   When
                     you  type  a  command,  EMACS executes a function
                     which  corresponds  to  the  command,   and   the
                     function  does  the work.  Character commands are
                     connected to functions through the dispatch table
                     (q.v.).  Extended commands contain  the  name  of
                     the  function  to  be  called; this allows you to
                     call any  function.    See  section  5  [Extended
                     Commands], page 21.

     Global          The  global  value  of a variable or of a command
                     character definition applies to all  buffers  and
                     all  files  (except  those  which  have their own
                     local values of the variable or definition).  See
                     section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.

     Grinding        Grinding means reformatting a program so that  it
                     is  indented  according  to  its  structure.  See
                     section 20.7 [Grinding], page 115.

     Help            You can type the Help character at  any  time  to
                     ask  what  options  you  have, or to ask what any
                     command does.  See section 7 [Help], page 33.

     Home Directory  Your home directory is the one on which your mail
                     and your init files are stored.

     INFO            INFO    is    the    subsystem    for    perusing
                     tree-structured   documentation   files.      The
                     documentation in INFO includes a version  of  the
                     EMACS manual.

     ITS             ITS   is   the  Incompatible  Timesharing  System
                     written at the MIT Artificial  Intelligence  Lab.
                     EMACS  was  first developed on this system.  Justî     201                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     what  it  is  incompatible  with has changed from
                     year to year.

     Kill Ring       The kill ring is where killed text is saved.   It
                     holds  the last nine or so blocks of killed text.
                     It is called a ring because you can bring any  of
                     the  saved  blocks  to  the front by rotating the
                     ring.  See section 9.2 [Un-Killing], page 41.

     Killing         Killing means erasing text and saving  it  inside
                     EMACS  to  be  recovered  later if desired.  Most
                     EMACS commands  to  erase  text  do  killing,  as
                     opposed  to  deletion  (q.v.).    See section 9.1
                     [Killing], page 39.

     List            A list is, approximately, a text string beginning
                     with an open  parenthesis  and  ending  with  the
                     matching  close  parenthesis.  See section 20.6.1
                     [Lists], page 111.   Actually  there  are  a  few
                     complications  to the syntax, which is controlled
                     by the syntax table (See section  22.4  [Syntax],
                     page 139.).

     Local           A  local  value  of  a  variable  or of a command
                     character definition applies to only  one  buffer
                     or file.  See section 22.7 [Locals], page 150.

     Local Modes List 
                     A  local  modes list appears in a file to specify
                     local values for variables or  command  character
                     definitions,  to be in effect while visiting that
                     file.

     M-              M- in the name of a character is an  abbreviation
                     for Meta.

     M-X             M-X  is  the  character  which begins an extended
                     command (q.v.).  Extended commands have  come  to
                     be   known   also   as  "M-X  commands",  and  an
                     individual extended command is often referred  to
                     as  "M-X  such-and  such".   See section 5 [M-X],
                     page 21.

     Major Mode      The major modes are a mutually exclusive  set  of
                     options  which  configure  EMACS  for  editing  a
                     certain sort of text.  Ideally, each  programming
                     language   has   its   own   major   mode.    See
                     section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 102.î     202                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Mark            The  mark points, invisibly, to a position in the
                     text.  Many commands operate on the text  between
                     point  and  the mark (known as the region, q.v.).
                     See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Meta            Meta refers to the Meta key.  A character's  name
                     includes  the  word  Meta if the Meta key must be
                     held down in order to type  the  character.    If
                     there  is no Meta key, then the Altmode character
                     is used as a  prefix  instead.    See  section  2
                     [Characters], page 10.

     Meta Character  A  Meta  character  is  one  whose character code
                     includes the Meta bit.  These characters  can  be
                     typed  only by means of a Meta key or by means of
                     the metizer command (q.v.).

     Metizer         The metizer is another term for  the  bit  prefix
                     character  for  the  Meta  bit;  namely,  Altmode
                     (q.v.).

     Minibuffer      The minibuffer is a facility for editing and then
                     executing  a  TECO  program.    See  section   23
                     [Minibuffer], page 156.

     Minor mode      A  minor  mode  is  an  optional feature of EMACS
                     which can be switched on or off independently  of
                     all  other features.  Each minor mode is both the
                     name of an option  (q.v.)  and  the  name  of  an
                     extended   command   to  set  the  option.    See
                     section 22.1 [Minor Modes], page 133.

     MM-command      This  is  an  obsolete  synonym   for   "extended
                     command".

     Mode line       The  mode line is a line just above the echo area
                     (q.v.),  used  for  status  information.      See
                     section 1.1 [Mode Line], page 6.

     Narrowing       Narrowing  means  limiting editing to only a part
                     of the text in the buffer.    Text  outside  that
                     part  is  inaccessible  to  the  user  until  the
                     boundaries are widened again,  but  it  is  still
                     there,  and  saving  the  file saves it all.  See
                     section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

     Node            The node is the unit of structure of INFO  (q.v.)
                     files.  When referring to documentation contained
                     only  in INFO files, we sometimes refer to a nodeî     203                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     of  a  specific  name,  in a specific file, as in
                     "See the file INFO;CONV, node Hooks".

     Numeric Argument
                     A numeric argument is a number specified before a
                     command to change  the  effect  of  the  command.
                     Often  the  numeric  argument  serves as a repeat
                     count.    See  section  4  [Numeric   Arguments],
                     page 19.

     Option          An option is a variable which exists to be set by
                     the   user   to  change  the  behavior  of  EMACS
                     commands.    This  is  an  important  method   of
                     customization.    See  section  22.3 [Variables],
                     page 137.

     Parse           We say that EMACS parses words or expressions  in
                     the  text being edited.  Really, all it knows how
                     to do  is  find  the  other  end  of  a  word  or
                     expression.  See section 22.4 [Syntax], page 139.

     Point           Point  is  the  place  in  the  buffer  at  which
                     insertion  and  deletion   occur.      Point   is
                     considered  to  be between two characters, not at
                     one character.    The  terminal's  cursor  (q.v.)
                     indicates  the  location of point.  See section 3
                     [Basic], page 15.

     Prefix Character 
                     A  prefix  character  is  a  command  whose  sole
                     function is to introduce a set of multi-character
                     commands.      Control-X   (q.v.)   is  a  prefix
                     character.  The bit prefix characters (q.v.)  are
                     other examples.

     Prompt          A  prompt is text printed in the echo area to ask
                     the user for input.  Printing a prompt is  called
                     "prompting".    EMACS  can  prompt when a command
                     requires an argument, or  when  only  part  of  a
                     command has been typed.  However, the prompt will
                     not  appear unless you pause in your typing.  See
                     section 5 [Extended Commands], page 21.

     Q-Registers     Q-registers are internal TECO variables which can
                     be used by EMACS or by the user to store text  or
                     numbers.      See  section  9.3.2  [Q-Registers],
                     page 45.

     Quitting        Quitting means interrupting a  command  which  isî     204                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     partially  typed  in or already executing.  It is
                     done  with   Control-G.      See   section   24.1
                     [Quitting], page 159.

     Quoting         Quoting  means depriving a character of its usual
                     special significance.  It is  usually  done  with
                     Control-Q.  What constitutes special significance
                     depends  on  the  context and on convention.  For
                     example, an  "ordinary"  character  as  an  EMACS
                     command  inserts  itself;  so  you can insert any
                     other character, such as Rubout, by quoting it as
                     in Control-Q Rubout.    Not  all  contexts  allow
                     quoting.  See section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Recursive Editing Level 
                     A  recursive  editing  level  is a state in which
                     part of  the  execution  of  a  command  involves
                     asking the user to edit some text.  This text may
                     or  may  not be the same as the text to which the
                     command was applied.   The  mode  line  indicates
                     recursive  editing  levels  with  square brackets
                     ("["  and  "]").    See  section  6.3  [Recursive
                     Editing Level], page 30.

     Redisplay       Redisplay  is the process of correcting the image
                     on the screen to correspond to changes that  have
                     been   made  in  the  text  being  edited.    See
                     section 1 [Screen], page 5.

     Region          The region is the text between point  (q.v.)  and
                     the mark (q.v.).  The terminal's cursor indicates
                     the location of point, but the mark is invisible.
                     Many  commands operate on the text of the region.
                     See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Return          Return is the carriage return character, used  as
                     input  to  EMACS.  Return is used as a command in
                     itself to insert  a  line  separator.    It  also
                     terminates  arguments  for  most  commands.   See
                     section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     Rubout          Rubout  is  a   character,   sometimes   labelled
                     "Delete".   It is used as a command to delete one
                     character of text.  It also deletes one character
                     when an EMACS command is reading an argument.

     S-expression    An s-expression is the basic  syntactic  unit  of
                     Lisp:    either a list, or a symbol containing no
                     parentheses (actually, there are a few exceptionsî     205                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     to  the  rule, based on the syntax of Lisp).  See
                     section 20.6.1 [Lists], page 111.

     Selecting       Selecting a buffer (q.v.)  means  making  editing
                     commands  apply  to that buffer as opposed to any
                     other.  At all times one buffer is  selected  and
                     editing   takes   place  in  that  buffer.    See
                     section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     Self-documentation 
                     Self-documentation is the feature of EMACS  which
                     can tell you what any command does, or give you a
                     list  of  all  commands  related  to  a topic you
                     specify.  You ask for self-documentation with the
                     Help character.  See section 7 [Help], page 33.

     String Argument 
                     A string argument is an  argument  which  follows
                     the command name in an extended command.  In "M-X
                     Apropos$word<cr>", "Word" is a string argument to
                     the  Apropos  command.    See section 5 [Extended
                     Commands], page 21.

     Subsystem       A subsystem of EMACS is an EMACS  command  which,
                     itself,  reads commands and displays the results.
                     Examples  are  INFO,  which   is   for   perusing
                     documentation;   DIRED,   which  is  for  editing
                     directories;  RMAIL  and  BABYL,  which  are  for
                     reading  and  editing mail.  The word "subsystem"
                     implies that it offers many independent  commands
                     which  can  be used freely.  If an EMACS function
                     asks specific questions, we  do  not  call  it  a
                     subsystem.

                     Usually  the  subsystem  continues  in  operation
                     until a specific command to exit (usually "Q") is
                     typed.  The  commands  for  a  subsystem  do  not
                     usually  resemble  ordinary EMACS commands, since
                     editing text is not  their  purpose.    The  Help
                     character    should    elicit   the   subsystem's
                     documentation.   See  section  6.1  [Subsystems],
                     page 28.

     Syntax Table    The syntax table tells EMACS which characters are
                     part  of  a  word,  which characters balance each
                     other like parentheses, etc.   See  section  22.4
                     [Syntax], page 139.

     Tailoring       This is a synonym for customization (q.v.).î     206                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     TECO Search String 
                     A TECO search string is a sort of pattern used by
                     the  TECO  search  command,  and  also by various
                     EMACS commands which use the TECO search command.
                     See section 19.3 [TECO search strings], page 101.

     Top Level       Top level is the normal state of EMACS, in  which
                     you  are  editing  the  text of the file you have
                     visited.  You are at top level whenever  you  are
                     not  in  a recursive editing level or a subsystem
                     (q.v.).

     Twenex          Twenex is the operating system which DEC likes to
                     call "TOPS-20".  However, a person should not  be
                     forced  to  call a system "tops" unless he really
                     thinks so.  Come now, DEC, don't you think people
                     will praise your products voluntarily?  The  name
                     "Twenex"  is also more appropriate because Twenex
                     was developed from the Tenex system, and  has  no
                     relationship  to  "TOPS-10".    What's more, it's
                     very euphonious.

     Typeout         Typeout  is  a  message,  printed  by  an   EMACS
                     command,  which overwrites the area normally used
                     for displaying the text being edited,  but  which
                     does  not  become  part  of the text.  Typeout is
                     used for messages which might be too long to  fit
                     in the echo area (q.v.).  See section 1 [Screen],
                     page 5.

     Undo            Undo  is a command which undoes the effect on the
                     buffer of a previous command.  Only some commands
                     are undoable and only the  most  recent  undoable
                     command  can be undone.  See section 24.3 [Undo],
                     page 163.

     Un-killing      Un-killing  means  reinserting  text   previously
                     killed.   It can be used to undo a mistaken kill,
                     or for copying or moving text.  See  section  9.2
                     [Un-killing], page 41.

     User Name       Your user name is the name you use to log in.  It
                     identifies you as opposed to all the other users.
                     It may be the same as your home directory's name.

     Variable        A  variable is a name with which EMACS associates
                     a value, which can be a number or a string.   See
                     section   22.3   [Variables],  page  137.    Some
                     variables ("options") are intended to be used  orî     207                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     set  by  the user; others are for purely internal
                     purposes.

     Virtual Boundaries
                     The virtual  boundaries  delimit  the  accessible
                     part  of  the buffer, when narrowing (q.v.) is in
                     effect.  See section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

     Visiting        Visiting a file means loading its contents into a
                     buffer (q.v.) where they  can  be  edited.    See
                     section 13.1 [Visiting], page 69.

     Wall Chart      The  wall  chart  is a very brief EMACS reference
                     sheet giving one line of information  about  each
                     short command.

     Whitespace      Whitespace  is  any run of consecutive formatting
                     characters   (space,   tab,   carriage    return,
                     linefeed, and backspace).

     Widening        Widening  is the operation which undoes narrowing
                     (q.v.).  See section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

     Window          A window is a region of the screen in which  text
                     being  edited is displayed.  EMACS can divide the
                     screen  into  two  windows.    See   section   16
                     [Windows],  page 90.  "The window" also means the
                     position in the buffer which is at the top of the
                     screen.  See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Working Directory 
                     This is the directory which  you  have  told  the
                     system  you  wish  to operate on primarily at the
                     moment.  This is usually the same  as  your  home
                     directory  (q.v.).   It is specified with the DDT
                     command :CWD <directory>.

     Yanking         This is a synonym for un-killing (q.v.).

     ^R              The string "^R" is the beginning of many function
                     names.  See section 5.2 [Functions], page 24.

     ^R Mode         ^R mode is the real time editing  mode  of  TECO.
                     EMACS always operates in this mode.î     208                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                              COMMAND SUMMARYî                              COMMAND SUMMARYî                              COMMAND SUMMARY



       This  summary contains brief descriptions with cross references
     for all commands, grouped by topic.  Within each topic, they  are
     in  alphabetical order.  Our version of alphabetical order places
     non-control non-meta characters first, then  control  characters,
     then  meta  characters,  then control-meta characters.  Control-X
     and Meta-X commands come last.    Not  all  Meta-X  commands  are
     included.



     Prefix Charactersî     Prefix Charactersî     Prefix Characters


     Altmode   (^R Prefix Meta) 
                     Altmode  is a bit prefix character which turns on
                     the Meta  bit  in  the  next  character.    Thus,
                     Altmode  F  is equivalent to the single character
                     Meta-F, which is useful if your keyboard  has  no
                     Meta key.  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     Control-^   (^R Prefix Control) 
                     Control-^  is  a bit prefix character which turns
                     on the Control bit in  the  following  character.
                     Thus,  Control-^  <  is  equivalent to the single
                     character Control-<.  See section 2 [Characters],
                     page 10.

     Control-C   (^R Prefix Control-Meta) 
                     Control-C is a bit prefix character  which  turns
                     on  the  Control  bit  and  the  Meta  bit in the
                     following  character.    Thus,  Control-C  ;   is
                     equivalent to the single character Control-Meta-;
                     .  See section 2 [Characters], page 10.

     Control-Q   (^R Quoted Insert) 
                     Control-Q  inserts the following character.  This
                     is a way of inserting control  characters.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-U   (^R Universal Argument) 
                     Control-U is a prefix for numeric arguments which
                     works  the  same on all terminals.  See section 4
                     [Arguments], page 19.

     Control-X î     209                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Control-X  is  a  prefix character which begins a
                     two-character  command.    Each  combination   of
                     Control-X  and  another character is a "Control-X
                     command".  Individual Control-X  commands  appear
                     in this summary according to their uses.

     Meta-X   (^R Extended Command) 
                     Meta-X  is a prefix character which introduces an
                     extended command name.  See section  5  [Meta-X],
                     page 21.

     Control-Meta-X   (^R Instant Extended Command) 
                     Control-Meta-X  is  another  way  of  invoking an
                     extended  command.    Instead  of   putting   the
                     arguments  in  the same line as the command name,
                     the command reads  the  arguments  itself.    See
                     section 5 [Meta-X], page 21.

     Control-digits, Meta-digits, Control-Meta-digits 
                     These all specify a numeric argument for the next
                     command.  See section 4 [Arguments], page 19.

     Control-Minus, Meta-Minus, Control-Meta-Minus 
                     These  all  begin a negative numeric argument for
                     the next command.   See  section  4  [Arguments],
                     page 19.



     Simple Cursor Motionî     Simple Cursor Motionî     Simple Cursor Motion


     Control-A   (^R Beginning of Line, built-in function) 
                     Control-A  moves  to  the  beginning of the line.
                     See section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-B   (^R Backward Character, built-in function) 
                     Control-B moves  backward  one  character.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-E   (^R End of Line, built-in function) 
                     Control-E  moves  to  the  end  of the line.  See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-F   (^R Forward Character, built-in function) 
                     Control-F  moves  forward  one  character.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-H   (^R Backward Character, built-in function) î     210                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Control-H  moves  backward  one  character.   See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-N   (^R Down Real Line) 
                     Control-N moves vertically straight  down.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-P   (^R Up Real Line) 
                     Control-P  moves  vertically  straight  up.   See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-R   (^R Reverse Search) 
                     Control-R  is   like   Control-S   but   searches
                     backward.  See section 10 [Search], page 46.

     Control-S   (^R Incremental Search) 
                     Control-S  searches  for  a string, terminated by
                     Altmode.    It  searches  as  you  type.      See
                     section 10 [Search], page 46.

     Meta-<   (^R Goto Beginning) 
                     Meta-< moves to the beginning of the buffer.  See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Meta->   (^R Goto End) 
                     Meta->  moves  to  the  end  of  the buffer.  See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-X Control-N   (^R Set Goal Column) 
                     Control-X Control-N sets a  horizontal  goal  for
                     the Control-N and Control-P commands.  When there
                     is a goal, those commands try to move to the goal
                     column instead of straight up or down.



     Linesî     Linesî     Lines


     Return   (^R CRLF) 
                     Return inserts a line separator, or advances onto
                     a  following  blank  line.   See section 3 [Basic
                     Editing], page 15.

     Control-O   (^R Open Line, built-in function) 
                     Control-O inserts a  line  separator,  but  point
                     stays  before it.  See section 3 [Basic Editing],
                     page 15.î     211                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Meta-=   (^R Count Lines Region) 
                     Meta-=  prints  the number of lines between point
                     and mark.  See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Control-X Control-O   (^R Delete Blank Lines) 
                     Control-X Control-O deletes all but  one  of  the
                     blank lines around point.  If the current line is
                     not  blank,  all  blank  lines  following  it are
                     deleted.  See section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-X Control-T   (^R Transpose Lines) 
                     Control-X Control-T transposes  the  contents  of
                     two  lines.    See  section  12  [Fixing  Typos],
                     page 65.



     Killing and Un-killingî     Killing and Un-killingî     Killing and Un-killing


     Rubout   (^R Backward Delete Character, built-in function) 
                     Rubout  deletes  the  previous  character.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-Rubout   (^R   Backward  Delete  Hacking  Tabs,  built-in
                     function) 
                     Control-Rubout deletes  the  previous  character,
                     but converts a tab character into several spaces.
                     See section 20.6 [Lisp], page 110.

     Control-D   (^R Delete Character, built-in function) 
                     Control-D   deletes  the  next  character.    See
                     section 3 [Basic Editing], page 15.

     Control-K   (^R Kill Line) 
                     Control-K kills to the end of the  line,  or,  at
                     the end of a line, kills the line separator.  See
                     section 9.1 [Killing], page 39.

     Control-W   (^R Kill Region) 
                     Control-W  kills  the  region,  the  text between
                     point and the mark.  See section  9.1  [Killing],
                     page 39.  See section 8 [Region], page 36.

     Control-Y   (^R Un-kill) 
                     Control-Y  reinserts  the  last  saved  block  of
                     killed  text.    See  section  9.2  [Un-Killing],
                     page 41.î     212                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Meta-W   (^R Copy Region) 
                     Meta-W  saves  the  region  as  if it were killed
                     without  removing  it  from  the  buffer.     See
                     section 9.2 [Un-Killing], page 41.

     Meta-Y   (^R Un-kill Pop) 
                     Meta-Y  rolls  the  kill  ring  to reinsert saved
                     killed text older than the most recent kill.  See
                     section 9.2 [Un-Killing], page 41.

     Control-Meta-W   (^R Append Next Kill) 
                     Control-Meta-W causes  an  immediately  following
                     kill command to append its text to the last saved
                     block   of   killed   text.     See  section  9.2
                     [Un-Killing], page 41.

     Control-X G   (^R Get Q-reg) 
                     Control-X G inserts in the buffer the contents of
                     a q-register.  See section  9.3.2  [Q-registers],
                     page 45.

     Control-X T   (^R Transpose Regions) 
                     Control-X  T  transposes  two  arbitrary  regions
                     defined by point and the last three marks.    See
                     section 12 [Fixing Typos], page 65.

     Control-X X   (^R Put Q-reg) 
                     Control-X X inserts in the buffer the contents of
                     a  q-register.   See section 9.3.2 [Q-registers],
                     page 45.

     M-X Overwrite Mode 
                     M-X Overwrite Mode turns  Overwrite  mode  on  or
                     off.    In  Overwrite  mode,  printing characters
                     overwrite existing text instead of pushing it  to
                     the  right.    See  section  22.1  [Minor Modes],
                     page 133.



     Scrolling and Display Controlî     Scrolling and Display Controlî     Scrolling and Display Control


     Control-Alpha   (SAIL Character Mode) 
                     Control-Alpha toggles SAIL Character mode.   When
                     this mode is on, control characters in the buffer
                     are  displayed  as  themselves.    See  section 1
                     [Screen], page 5.î     213                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-L   (^R New Window) 
                     Control-L  clears the screen and centers point in
                     it.  With an argument, it  can  put  point  on  a
                     specific  line  of  the  screen.   See section 15
                     [Display], page 87.

     Control-V   (^R Next Screen) 
                     Control-V scrolls the text upward by a  screenful
                     or  several  lines.    See  section 15 [Display],
                     page 87.

     Meta-R   (^R Move to Screen Edge) 
                     Meta-R moves point to beginning of the text on  a
                     specified  line  of  the  screen.  See section 15
                     [Display], page 87.

     Meta-V   (^R Previous Screen) 
                     Meta-V scrolls downward by a screenful or several
                     lines.  See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Control-Meta-R   (^R Reposition Window) 
                     Control-Meta-R tries to center on the screen  the
                     function  or  paragraph  you are looking at.  See
                     section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Control-Meta-V   (^R Scroll Other Window) 
                     Control-Meta-V scrolls the  other  window  up  or
                     down,  when  you  are  in  two  window mode.  See
                     section 16 [Windows], page 90.

     M-X View Buffer 
                     M-X  View  Buffer  skips  through  a  buffer   by
                     screenfuls.  See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     M-X View File 
                     M-X  View  File  lets  you  move  through  a file
                     sequentially by screenfuls forward and back.  See
                     section 13.7 [View File], page 79.



     The Mark and the Regionî     The Mark and the Regionî     The Mark and the Region


     Control-Space   (^R Set/Pop Mark) 
                     Control-Space sets  the  mark  or  moves  to  the
                     location  of  the  mark.    See section 8 [Mark],
                     page 36.î     214                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-<   (^R Mark Beginning) 
                     Control-<  sets  the mark at the beginning of the
                     buffer.  See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Control->   (^R Mark End) 
                     Control-> sets the mark at the end of the buffer.
                     See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Control-@   (^R Set/Pop Mark) 
                     Control-@ sets the mark or moves to the  location
                     of the mark.  See section 8 [Mark], page 36.

     Meta-@   (^R Mark Word) 
                     Meta-@ puts the mark at the end of the next word.
                     See section 11.1 [Words], page 50.

     Meta-H   (^R Mark Paragraph) 
                     Meta-H   puts  point  at  the  beginning  of  the
                     paragraph  and  the  mark  at  the  end.      See
                     section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Control-Meta-@   (^R Mark Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-@  puts  the  mark at the end of the
                     next s-expression.  See section  20.6.1  [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-H   (^R Mark Defun) 
                     Control-Meta-H puts point at the beginning of the
                     current  Defun  and  the  mark  at  the end.  See
                     section 20.6.2 [Defuns], page 114.

     Control-X H   (^R Mark Whole Buffer) 
                     Control-X H puts point at the  beginning  of  the
                     buffer  and  the  mark at the end.  See section 8
                     [Mark], page 36.

     Control-X Control-P   (^R Mark Page) 
                     Control-X Control-P puts point at  the  beginning
                     of the current page and the mark at the end.  See
                     section 18 [Pages], page 94.

     Control-X Control-X   (^R Exchange Point and Mark) 
                     Control-X Control-X sets point where the mark was
                     and  the  mark  where  point  was.  See section 8
                     [Mark], page 36.î     215                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Whitespace and Indentationî     Whitespace and Indentationî     Whitespace and Indentation


     Tab   (^R Indent According to Mode) 
                     Tab either adjusts the indentation of the current
                     line  or  inserts some indentation, in a way that
                     depends on the major  mode.    See  section  20.3
                     [Indenting Programs], page 104.  See section 11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Linefeed   (^R Indent New Line) 
                     Linefeed is equivalent to Return followed by Tab.
                     It moves to a new line and indents that line.  If
                     done  in the middle of a line, it breaks the line
                     and  indents  the   new   second   line.      See
                     section 11.3 [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Meta-Tab   (^R Tab to Tab Stop) 
                     Meta-Tab  indents  to  the next EMACS-defined tab
                     stop.    See  section  11.3   [Indenting   Text],
                     page 54.

     Meta-M   (^R Back to Indentation) 
                     Meta-M  positions  the cursor on the current line
                     after  any  indentation.     See   section   11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Meta-\   (^R Delete Horizontal Space) 
                     Meta-\  deletes  all  spaces  and  tab characters
                     around point.  See section 11.3 [Indenting Text],
                     page 54.

     Meta-^   (^R Delete Indentation) 
                     Meta-^ joins two lines, replacing the indentation
                     of the  second  line  with  zero  or  one  space,
                     according  to  the  context.    See  section 11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Control-Meta-O   (^R Split Line) 
                     Control-Meta-O  breaks  a  line,  preserving  the
                     horizontal   position   of  the  second  half  by
                     indenting it to its old starting position.    See
                     section 11.3 [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Control-Meta-\   (^R Indent Region) 
                     Control-Meta-\  indents  each line in the region,
                     either by applying Tab to each line, or by giving
                     each the same specified  amount  of  indentation.
                     See section 11.3 [Indenting Text], page 54.î     216                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-X Tab   (^R Indent Rigidly) 
                     Control-X  Tab shifts all the lines in the region
                     right or left the same number of  columns.    See
                     section 11.3 [Indenting Text], page 54.

     M-X Edit Indented Text 
                     M-X Edit Indented Text enters a recursive editing
                     level  designed  for  editing  text in which each
                     line is indented.  See  section  11.4  [Filling],
                     page 56.

     M-X Edit Tab Stops 
                     M-X  Edit  Tab  Stops lets you edit the tab stops
                     used by ^R Tab to Tab Stop.    See  section  11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.

     M-X Edit Tabular Text 
                     M-X  Edit Tabular Text enters a recursive editing
                     level designed for editing  text  arranged  in  a
                     table.  See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     M-X Indent Tabs Mode 
                     M-X Indent Tabs Mode turns Indent Tabs mode on or
                     off.      When   Indent  Tabs  mode  is  on,  the
                     indentation  commands  use  tab  characters   for
                     indentation  whenever  possible.   Otherwise they
                     use only spaces.  See section 22.1 [Minor Modes],
                     page 133.

     M-X Tabify 
                     M-X Tabify converts spaces after  point  to  tabs
                     when  that  can  be  done  without  changing  the
                     appearance.  See section 11.3  [Indenting  Text],
                     page 54.

     M-X Untabify 
                     M-X  Untabify  converts  all  tabs after point to
                     spaces.  A numeric argument says  how  far  apart
                     the  tab  stops are, which is good for converting
                     files brought from  systems  with  tab  stops  at
                     intervals   other  than  8.    See  section  11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.î     217                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Words, Sentences and Paragraphsî     Words, Sentences and Paragraphsî     Words, Sentences and Paragraphs


     Meta-A   (^R Backward Sentence) 
                     Meta-A  moves  to  the beginning of the sentence.
                     See section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-B   (^R Backward Word) 
                     Meta-B moves backward one word.  See section 11.1
                     [Words], page 50.

     Meta-D   (^R Kill Word) 
                     Meta-D kills one word forward.  See section  11.1
                     [Words], page 50.

     Meta-E   (^R Forward Sentence) 
                     Meta-E  moves  to  the  end of the sentence.  See
                     section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-F   (^R Forward Word) 
                     Meta-F moves forward one word.  See section  11.1
                     [Words], page 50.

     Meta-H   (^R Mark Paragraph) 
                     Meta-H  puts  point  at  the front of the current
                     paragraph  and  the  mark  at  the  end.      See
                     section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-K   (^R Kill Sentence) 
                     Meta-K  kills  to  the  end of the sentence.  See
                     section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-T   (^R Transpose Words) 
                     Meta-T transposes two  consecutive  words.    See
                     section 11.1 [Words], page 50.

     Meta-[   (^R Backward Paragraph) 
                     Meta-[  moves  to the beginning of the paragraph.
                     See section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-]   (^R Forward Paragraph) 
                     Meta-] moves to the end of the  paragraph.    See
                     section 11.2 [Sentences], page 52.

     Meta-Rubout   (^R Backward Kill Word) 
                     Meta-Rubout   kills   the  previous  word.    See
                     section 11.1 [Words], page 50.

     Control-X Rubout   (^R Backward Kill Sentence) î     218                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Control-X  Rubout  kills back to the beginning of
                     the sentence.    See  section  11.2  [Sentences],
                     page 52.

     M-X Atom Word Mode 
                     M-X  Atom  Word  Mode  turns Atom Word mode on or
                     off.   In  Atom  Word  mode,  the  word  commands
                     consider  an  entire  Lisp atom as one word.  See
                     section 22.1 [Minor Modes], page 133.

     M-X Edit Syntax Table 
                     M-X Edit Syntax Table  allows  you  to  edit  the
                     syntax  table  for word and list delimiters.  See
                     section 22.4 [Syntax Table], page 139.



     Filling Textî     Filling Textî     Filling Text


     Meta-G   (^R Fill Region) 
                     Meta-G fills the region, treating it (usually) as
                     one  paragraph.    See  section  11.4  [Filling],
                     page 56.

     Meta-Q   (^R Fill Paragraph) 
                     Meta-Q  fills the current or next paragraph.  See
                     section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Meta-S   (^R Center Line) 
                     Meta-S   centers   the   current   line.      See
                     section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Control-X .   (^R Set Fill Prefix) 
                     Control-X  .  specifies the fill prefix, which is
                     used for filling indented text.  See section 11.4
                     [Filling], page 56.

     Control-X F   (^R Set Fill Column) 
                     Control-X F sets the variable Fill  Column  which
                     controls  the  margin  for filling and centering.
                     See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     M-X Auto Fill Mode 
                     M-X Auto Fill Mode turns Auto  Fill  mode  on  or
                     off.    In  Auto Fill mode, long lines are broken
                     between words automatically.   See  section  11.4
                     [Filling], page 56.î     219                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Exiting, Quittingî     Exiting, Quittingî     Exiting, Quitting


     Control-G 
                     Control-G  quits, interrupting a running command,
                     or discarding any partially typed command.    See
                     section 24.1 [Quitting], page 159.

     Control-]   (Abort Recursive Edit) 
                     Control-]  aborts a recursive editing level; that
                     is to say, exits it without allowing the  command
                     which  invoked  it  to  finish.  See section 24.1
                     [Quitting], page 159.

     Control-Meta-C   (^R Exit, built-in function) 
                     Control-Meta-C exits  from  a  recursive  editing
                     level  and  allows  the command which invoked the
                     recursive editing level to finish.  At top level,
                     it exits from EMACS to its  superior  job.    See
                     section 6.4 [Exiting], page 31.

     Control-X Control-C   (^R Return to Superior) 
                     Control-X  Control-C  returns  from  EMACS to its
                     superior job, even if EMACS is currently inside a
                     recursive  editing  level.      In   that   case,
                     re-entering  EMACS  will find it still within the
                     recursive  editing  level.    See   section   6.4
                     [Exiting], page 31.

     M-X Compile 
                     M-X Compile recompiles the file you are visiting,
                     in  a manner that depends on the major mode.  See
                     section 20.2 [Compile], page 103.

     M-X Top Level 
                     M-X Top Level returns  to  the  top  level  EMACS
                     command  loop  or  to  TECO.    See  section 24.1
                     [Quitting], page 159.

     M-X Undo 
                     M-X Undo retracts the last undoable change to the
                     buffer.  See section 24.2 [Lossage], page 160.î     220                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Pagesî     Pagesî     Pages


     Control-X L   (^R Count Lines Page) 
                     Control-X  L  prints  the  number of lines on the
                     current page, and how many come before point  and
                     how  many  come  after.   See section 18 [Pages],
                     page 94.

     Control-X P   (^R Narrow Bounds to Page) 
                     Control-X P narrows the virtual boundaries to the
                     current  page.    See  section  17   [Narrowing],
                     page 93.

     Control-X [   (^R Previous Page) 
                     Control-X  [  moves backward to the previous page
                     boundary.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.

     Control-X ]   (^R Next Page) 
                     Control-X  ]  moves  forward  to  the  next  page
                     boundary.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.

     Control-X Control-P   (^R Mark Page) 
                     Control-X  Control-P  puts point at the beginning
                     and the mark at the end of the current page.  See
                     section 18 [Pages], page 94.

     M-X View Page Directory (in PAGE) 
                     M-X View Page Directory prints a directory of the
                     pages of the file.    See  section  18.1  [PAGE],
                     page 96.

     M-X What Page 
                     M-X  What  Page  prints the current page and line
                     number in the file.    See  section  18  [Pages],
                     page 94.



     Lispî     Lispî     Lisp


     Meta-(   (^R Make ()) 
                     Meta-(  places  a  pair of parentheses around the
                     next several s-expressions.  See  section  20.6.1
                     [Lists], page 111.

     Meta-)   (^R Move Over )) 
                     Meta-)  moves past the next close parenthesis andî     221                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     adjusts  the  indentation  of the following line.
                     See section 20.6.1 [Lists], page 111.

     Control-Meta-Tab   (^R Indent for Lisp) 
                     Control-Meta-Tab adjusts the indentation  of  the
                     current   line   for  proper  Lisp  style.    See
                     section 20.3 [Indenting], page 104.

     Control-Meta-(   (^R Backward Up List) 
                     Control-Meta-( moves backward  up  one  level  of
                     list  structure.    See  section  20.6.1 [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-)   (^R Up List) 
                     Control-Meta-) moves forward up one level of list
                     structure.  See section 20.6.1 [Lists], page 111.

     Control-Meta-@   (^R Mark Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-@ puts the mark at the  end  of  the
                     next   s-expression.     See  section  8  [Mark],
                     page 36.

     Control-Meta-A   (^R Beginning of Defun) 
                     Control-Meta-A moves  to  the  beginning  of  the
                     current  Defun.    See  section  20.6.2 [Defuns],
                     page 114.

     Control-Meta-B   (^R Backward Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-B   moves    backward    over    one
                     s-expression.      See  section  20.6.1  [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-D   (^R Down List) 
                     Control-Meta-D moves forward and down a level  in
                     list  structure.    See  section  20.6.1 [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-E   (^R End of Defun) 
                     Control-Meta-E moves to the end  of  the  current
                     Defun.  See section 20.6.2 [Defuns], page 114.

     Control-Meta-F   (^R Forward Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-F    moves    forward    over    one
                     s-expression.    See  section   20.6.1   [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-G   (^R Format Code) 
                     Control-Meta-G   grinds  the  s-expression  after
                     point.  See section 20.7 [Grinding], page 115.î     222                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-Meta-H   (^R Mark Defun) 
                     Control-Meta-H  puts  point  before  and the mark
                     after  the  current   or   next   Defun.      See
                     section 20.6.2 [Defuns], page 114.

     Control-Meta-K   (^R Kill Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-K  kills the following s-expression.
                     See section 20.6.1 [Lists], page 111.

     Control-Meta-N   (^R Next List) 
                     Control-Meta-N  moves  forward  over  one   list,
                     ignoring atoms before the first open parenthesis.
                     See section 20.6.1 [Lists], page 111.

     Control-Meta-P   (^R Previous List) 
                     Control-Meta-P  moves  backward  over  one  list,
                     ignoring atoms reached  before  the  first  close
                     parenthesis.      See   section  20.6.1  [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-Q   (^R Indent Sexp) 
                     Control-Meta-Q adjusts the indentation of each of
                     the lines in the following s-expression, but  not
                     the  current line.  See section 20.3 [Indenting],
                     page 104.

     Control-Meta-T   (^R Transpose Sexps) 
                     Control-Meta-T   transposes    two    consecutive
                     s-expressions.     See  section  20.6.1  [Lists],
                     page 111.

     Control-Meta-U   (^R Backward Up List) 
                     Control-Meta-U moves backward  up  one  level  of
                     list  structure.    See  section  20.6.1 [Lists],
                     page 111.



     Filesî     Filesî     Files


     Meta-.   (^R Find Tag) 
                     Meta-. moves to  the  definition  of  a  specific
                     function,  switching  files  if  necessary.   See
                     section 21 [TAGS], page 122.

     Meta-~   (^R Buffer Not Modified) 
                     Meta-~ clears the flag which says that the buffer
                     contains changes that have not been saved.    See
                     section 13.1 [Visiting], page 69.î     223                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-X Control-F   (Find File) 
                     Control-X  Control-F  visits  a  file  in its own
                     buffer.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     Control-X Control-Q   (^R Set File Read Only) 
                     Control-X Control-Q makes the  visited  fie  read
                     only,  or  no longer read only.  See section 13.1
                     [Visiting], page 69.

     Control-X Control-S   (^R Save File) 
                     Control-X Control-S saves the visited file.   See
                     section 13.1 [Visiting], page 69.

     Control-X Control-V   (^R Visit File) 
                     Control-X   Control-V   visits   a   file.    See
                     section 13.1 [Visiting], page 69.

     Control-X Control-W   (Write File) 
                     Control-X Control-W saves the  file,  asking  for
                     names  to  save  it  under.    See  section  13.7
                     [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Append to File 
                     M-X Append to File appends the  contents  of  the
                     region  to  the  end  of  a  specified file.  See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Auto Save Mode 
                     M-X Auto Save Mode turns Auto  Save  mode  on  or
                     off.  See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     M-X Copy File 
                     M-X  Copy  File copies a file to a new name.  See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Delete File 
                     M-X Delete File deletes a file.  See section 13.7
                     [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Insert File 
                     M-X Insert File inserts the contents  of  a  file
                     into  the buffer (within the existing text).  See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Prepend to File 
                     M-X Prepend to File appends the contents  of  the
                     region  to  the  start  of a specified file.  See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.î     224                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     M-X Rename File 
                     M-X  Rename File changes the name of a file.  See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Revert File 
                     M-X Revert File  undoes  changes  to  a  file  by
                     reading   in   the   previous   version.      See
                     section 13.2 [Revert File], page 72.

     M-X Save All Files 
                     M-X Save All Files offers to write  back  buffers
                     which  may  need  it.   See section 14 [Buffers],
                     page 83.

     M-X Set Visited Filename 
                     M-X Set  Visited  Filename  changes  the  visited
                     filename,   without   writing   a   file.     See
                     section 13.7 [Advanced File Commands], page 79.

     M-X Write Region 
                     M-X Write  Region  writes  the  contents  of  the
                     region  into  a file.  See section 13.7 [Advanced
                     File Commands], page 79.



     File Directoriesî     File Directoriesî     File Directories


     Control-X D   (^R DIRED) 
                     Control-X D invokes the directory  editor  DIRED,
                     useful for deleting many files.  See section 13.6
                     [DIRED], page 76.

     Control-X Control-D   (^R Directory Display) 
                     Control-X   Control-D  displays  a  subset  of  a
                     directory.    See  section  13.4   [Directories],
                     page 75.

     M-X Clean Directory 
                     M-X  Clean  Directory  deletes  all  but the most
                     recent versions of every  file  in  a  directory.
                     See section 13.5 [Cleaning Directories], page 75.

     M-X Compare Directories 
                     M-X  Compare  Directories compare two directories
                     with the same name on different  machines.    See
                     section 13.8 [Compare Directories], page 81.î     225                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     M-X List Directories 
                     M-X  List  Directories list the names of all disk
                     directories.   See  section  13.4  [Directories],
                     page 75.

     M-X List Files 
                     M-X  List  Files prints a very brief listing of a
                     directory, listing only  the  filenames,  several
                     files  per line.  See section 13.4 [Directories],
                     page 75.

     M-X Reap File 
                     M-X Reap File deletes all  but  the  most  recent
                     versions  of  a file.  See section 13.5 [Cleaning
                     Directories], page 75.

     M-X View Directory 
                     M-X View Directory prints a file directory.   See
                     section 13.4 [Directories], page 75.



     Buffersî     Buffersî     Buffers


     Control-X Control-B   (List Buffers) 
                     Control-X Control-B prints a list of all buffers,
                     their   major   modes  and  the  files  they  are
                     visiting.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     Control-X A   (^R Append to Buffer) 
                     Control-X A adds the text of region into  another
                     buffer.  See section 9.3 [Copying], page 44.

     Control-X B   (Select Buffer) 
                     Control-X  B  is  the  command  for  switching to
                     another  buffer.    See  section  14   [Buffers],
                     page 83.

     Control-X K   (Kill Buffer) 
                     Control-X  K  kills  a  buffer.    See section 14
                     [Buffers], page 83.

     M-X Insert Buffer 
                     M-X Insert Buffer inserts the contents of another
                     buffer into the existing  text  of  this  buffer.
                     See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     M-X Kill Some Buffers î     226                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     M-X Kill Some Buffers offers to kill each buffer.
                     See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     M-X Make Space 
                     M-X  Make  Space  tries  to  free up space inside
                     EMACS  for  more  libraries  or  buffers.     See
                     section 24.2.5 [Storage Exhausted], page 161.

     M-X Rename Buffer 
                     M-X Rename Buffer changes the name of the current
                     buffer.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     M-X What Available Space 
                     M-X  What  Available  Space  prints the amount of
                     space left inside EMACS  for  more  libraries  or
                     buffers.  See section 24.2.5 [Storage Exhausted],
                     page 161.



     Commentsî     Commentsî     Comments


     Meta-Linefeed   (^R Indent New Comment Line) 
                     Meta-Linefeed moves to a new line and indents it.
                     If  point  had  been  within a comment on the old
                     line, a new comment is started on  the  new  line
                     and indented under the old one.  See section 20.5
                     [Comments], page 107.

     Meta-;   (^R Indent for Comment) 
                     Meta-; inserts a properly indented comment at the
                     end   of   the   current  line,  or  adjusts  the
                     indentation  of  an  existing   comment.      See
                     section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Meta-N   (^R Down Comment Line) 
                     Meta-N  moves  down  a line and starts a comment.
                     See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Meta-P   (^R Up Comment Line) 
                     Meta-P moves down a line and  starts  a  comment.
                     See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Control-Meta-;   (^R Kill Comment) 
                     Control-Meta-;  kills  any comment on the current
                     line.  See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Control-X ;   (^R Set Comment Column) î     227                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Control-X ; sets the column at which comments are
                     indented,  from  an argument, the current column,
                     or  the  previous  comment.    See  section  20.5
                     [Comments], page 107.



     Case Conversionî     Case Conversionî     Case Conversion


     Meta-C   (^R Uppercase Initial) 
                     Meta-C  makes  the  next  word  lower case with a
                     capital initial.  It moves over the  word.    See
                     section 11.5 [Case], page 58.

     Meta-L   (^R Lowercase Word) 
                     Meta-L  moves  over a word converting it to lower
                     case.  See section 11.5 [Case], page 58.

     Meta-U   (^R Uppercase Word) 
                     Meta-U moves over a word converting it  to  upper
                     case.  See section 11.5 [Case], page 58.

     Control-X Control-L   (^R Lowercase Region) 
                     Control-X  Control-L  converts  the  text  of the
                     region to lower case.  See section  11.5  [Case],
                     page 58.

     Control-X Control-U   (^R Uppercase Region) 
                     Control-X  Control-U  converts  the  text  of the
                     region to upper case.  See section  11.5  [Case],
                     page 58.



     Minor Correctionsî     Minor Correctionsî     Minor Corrections


     Meta-#   (^R Change Font Region) 
                     Meta-#  inserts  a  font-change  command good for
                     certain text  justifiers  around  a  word.    See
                     section 11.6 [Fonts], page 59.

     Meta-$   (^R Correct Word Spelling) 
                     Meta-$ (Dollar sign, not Altmode) passes the word
                     before  point to the SPELL program.  If it is not
                     a  correct  spelling,  you  have  the  option  of
                     replacing  it  with  a  corrected  spelling.  See
                     section 12 [Fixing Typos], page 65.î     228                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Meta-'   (^R Upcase Digit) 
                     Meta-'  converts a digit before point on the same
                     or previous  line  to  a  punctuation  character,
                     assuming  that  you  failed to type the shift key
                     and  thus  typed  the  digit  by  mistake.    See
                     section 12 [Fixing Typos], page 65.

     Meta-_   (^R Underline Word) 
                     Meta-_  inserts  underlining  commands  good  for
                     certain text  justifiers  around  a  word.    See
                     section 11.7 [Underlining], page 60.

     Control-X #   (^R Change Font Region) 
                     Control-X # inserts font change commands good for
                     certain  text  justifiers around the region.  See
                     section 11.6 [Fonts], page 59.

     Control-X _   (^R Underline Region) 
                     Control-X _ inserts underlining commands good for
                     certain text justifiers around the region.    See
                     section 11.7 [Underlining], page 60.



     Windowsî     Windowsî     Windows


     Control-Meta-V   (^R Scroll Other Window) 
                     Control-Meta-V  scrolls  the  other  window up or
                     down.  See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Control-X 1   (^R One Window) 
                     Control-X 1 returns  to  one-window  mode.    See
                     section 16 [Windows], page 90.

     Control-X 2   (^R Two Windows) 
                     Control-X  2  splits the screen into two windows.
                     See section 16 [Windows], page 90.

     Control-X 3   (^R View Two Windows) 
                     Control-X 3 splits the screen  into  two  windows
                     but   stays  in  window  one.    See  section  16
                     [Windows], page 90.

     Control-X 4   (^R Visit in Other Window) 
                     Control-X 4 displays two windows  and  selects  a
                     buffer or visits a file in the other window.  See
                     section 16 [Windows], page 90.î     229                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Control-X O   (^R Other Window) 
                     Control-X  O  switches  from  one  window  to the
                     other.  See section 16 [Windows], page 90.

     Control-X ^   (^R Grow Window) 
                     Control-X ^  changes  the  allocation  of  screen
                     space  to  the  two  windows.    See  section  16
                     [Windows], page 90.

     M-X Compare Windows 
                     M-X Compare Windows compares the text  in  window
                     one  after  point  with  that in window two after
                     point.  It advances point in both windows to  the
                     first   non-matching   text.     See  section  16
                     [Windows], page 90.



     Narrowingî     Narrowingî     Narrowing


     Control-X N   (^R Narrow Bounds to Region) 
                     Control-X N narrows the virtual boundaries to the
                     region.  See section 17 [Narrowing], page 93.

     Control-X P   (^R Narrow Bounds to Page) 
                     Control-X P narrows the virtual boundaries to the
                     current page.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.

     Control-X W   (^R Widen Bounds) 
                     Control-X W widens the virtual boundaries back to
                     the entire buffer.  See section  17  [Narrowing],
                     page 93.



     Status Informationî     Status Informationî     Status Information


     Control-X =   (What Cursor Position) 
                     Control-X  =  prints  information  on  the screen
                     position and character position  of  the  cursor,
                     the size of the file, and the character after the
                     cursor.  See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Control-X L   (^R Count Lines Page) 
                     Control-X  L  prints  the  number of lines in the
                     current page, and how many come before  or  after
                     point.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.î     230                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     M-X List Loaded Libraries 
                     M-X  List Loaded Libraries lists the names of all
                     loaded libraries.  See section 22.2  [Libraries],
                     page 135.

     M-X List Variables 
                     M-X  List Variables lists the names and values of
                     all variables, or of those whose names contain  a
                     specified  string.  See section 22.3 [Variables],
                     page 137.

     M-X List Redefinitions 
                     M-X List Redefinitions  describes  all  the  ways
                     which  the  major  mode  and  local  modes of the
                     selected buffer modify the standard EMACS.    See
                     section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 102.

     M-X What Page 
                     M-X  What Page prints the page and line number of
                     point.  See section 18 [Pages], page 94.



     Keyboard Macrosî     Keyboard Macrosî     Keyboard Macros


     Control-X (   (^R Start Kbd Macro) 
                     Control-X ( begins  defining  a  keyboard  macro.
                     See section 22.8 [KBDMAC], page 152.

     Control-X )   (^R End Kbd Macro) 
                     Control-X   )  terminates  the  definition  of  a
                     keyboard  macro.    See  section  22.8  [KBDMAC],
                     page 152.

     Control-X E   (^R Call Last Kbd Macro) 
                     Control-X  E  executes  the most recently defined
                     keyboard  macro.    See  section  22.8  [KBDMAC],
                     page 152.

     Control-X Q   (^R Kbd Macro Query) 
                     Control-X  Q in a keyboard macro can ask the user
                     whether to continue  or  allow  him  to  do  some
                     editing   before  continuing  with  the  keyboard
                     macro.  See section 22.8 [KBDMAC], page 152.

     M-X Name Kbd Macro 
                     M-X Name Kbd Macro gives a permanent name to  the
                     last  keyboard  macro  defined.  See section 22.8
                     [KBDMAC], page 152.î     231                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     M-X View Kbd Macro 
                     M-X  View  Kbd  Macro  prints the definition of a
                     keyboard  macro.    See  section  22.8  [KBDMAC],
                     page 152.



     Librariesî     Librariesî     Libraries


     M-X Kill Libraries 
                     M-X Kill Libraries discards one or more libraries
                     from   core.     See  section  22.2  [Libraries],
                     page 135.

     M-X List Library 
                     M-X  List  Library  describes  briefly  all   the
                     functions   in  a  library.    See  section  22.2
                     [Libraries], page 135.

     M-X Load Library 
                     M-X Load Library loads one library,  permanently.
                     See section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.

     M-X Run Library 
                     M-X  Run  Library  loads  a  library temporarily,
                     invokes a function in it, and then  discards  the
                     library.  See section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.



     Variablesî     Variablesî     Variables


     M-X Edit Options 
                     M-X  Edit  Options  lets you edit, in a recursive
                     editing level, the values of many variables.  See
                     section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.

     M-X Kill Local Q-register 
                     M-X Kill Local Q-register makes a  q-register  or
                     command  character  definition no longer local to
                     the selected buffer.   See  the  file  INFO;CONV,
                     node Vars.

     M-X  Kill Local Variable M-X Kill Local Variable makes a variable
                     value no longer local  to  the  selected  buffer.
                     See the file INFO;CONV, node Vars.î     232                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     M-X Kill Variable 
                     M-X   Kill   Variable   eliminates  a  particular
                     variable.     See   section   22.3   [Variables],
                     page 137.

     M-X  Make  Local  Q-register  M-X  Make  Local Q-register makes a
                     q-register or command character definition  local
                     to  the selected buffer.  See the file INFO;CONV,
                     node Vars.

     M-X Make Local Variable M-X Make Local Variable makes a  variable
                     value local to the selected buffer.  See the file
                     INFO;CONV, node Vars.

     M-X Set Key 
                     M-X  Set  Key  connects  a  function to a command
                     character.    See  section  5.2  [M-X  Commands],
                     page 24.

     M-X Set Variable 
                     M-X  Set  Variable  sets the value of a variable.
                     See section 22.3 [Variables], page 137.

     M-X View Variable 
                     M-X View Variable displays the value and  comment
                     of  a  variable.    See section 22.3 [Variables],
                     page 137.



     Mailî     Mailî     Mail


     Control-X M   (Send Mail) 
                     Control-X M allows you to edit and send a message
                     using your favorite mail-reading  program.    The
                     default   is   RMAIL.  See  section  6.2  [Mail],
                     page 29.

     Control-X R   (Read Mail) 
                     Control-X R  runs  your  choice  of  mail-reading
                     program  to read and edit your mail.  The default
                     is RMAIL. See section 6.2 [Mail], page 29.

     M-X View Mail 
                     M-X View Mail displays your own or another user's
                     mail file using  View  File.    See  section  6.2
                     [Mail], page 29.î     233                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Minibufferî     Minibufferî     Minibuffer


     Control-%   (^R Replace String) 
                     Control-%  invokes a minibuffer containing a call
                     to Replace String.  You fill  in  the  arguments.
                     See section 19 [Replace], page 98.

     Meta-Altmode   (^R Execute Minibuffer) 
                     Meta-Altmode  invokes  an  empty minibuffer which
                     you can  fill  in  with  a  TECO  program  to  be
                     executed.  See section 23 [Minibuffer], page 156.

     Meta-%   (^R Query Replace) 
                     Meta-%  invokes a minibuffer containing a call to
                     Query Replace.  You fill in the arguments.    See
                     section 19 [Replace], page 98.

     Control-X Altmode   (^R Re-execute Minibuffer) 
                     Control-X  Altmode  re-executes  a  TECO  program
                     previously executed in the minibuffer.    It  can
                     also   re-execute   an  extended  command.    See
                     section 23 [Minibuffer], page 156.î     234                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                           CATALOG OF LIBRARIESî                           CATALOG OF LIBRARIESî                           CATALOG OF LIBRARIES



     Libraries Used Explicitlyî     Libraries Used Explicitlyî     Libraries Used Explicitly


       These   are  libraries  which  you  must  load  with  M-X  Load
     Library$<libname><cr> to use.  If no  cross-reference  is  given,
     the  only documentation for the library is the self-documentation
     contained in it.  Use M-X List Library$<libname><cr> to  print  a
     brief  description  of  each  function  in the library.  For more
     detailed information, load the library and use  M-X  Describe  on
     individual functions.


     ABSTR           contains commands for making documentation files:
                     wall charts, and abstracts of libraries.  See the
                     file INFO;CONV.

     BABYL           is  a  subsystem for reading, sending and editing
                     mail.  See the file INFO;BABYL.

     BSHACK          has functions for operating on  lines  containing
                     overprinting.

     BUGHUNT         contains commands for putting your name into each
                     comment  you edit.  This is to record who changed
                     what.

     CACHE           implements  a  cache  for   speeding   up   EMACS
                     subroutine calls.

     CHESS           implements commands for editing pictures of chess
                     boards.

     CLU             implements CLU mode.  See the file INFO;ECLU.

     COLUMNS         implements  commands for converting single-column
                     text into double-column text and vice versa.

     COMPLT          provides completion for buffer names and variable
                     names.

     DELIM           implements  commands  for  moving  over  balanced
                     groupings of various kinds of parentheses.  There
                     are  a  pair  of  commands for square brackets, a
                     pair for angle brackets, etc.î     235                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     DOCLSP          prints documentation from the MacLisp manual on a
                     specified Lisp function.

     DOCIX           constructs  indexes  of  Lisp  manual  files  for
                     DOCLSP.

     DOCOND          is a macro processor and conditionalizer for text
                     files, useful for maintaining  multiple  versions
                     of documents with one source.

     DOCTOR          contains DOCTOR mode, a psychiatrist.

     DRAW            offers  functions  for  editing  pictures made of
                     characters.    These  partially   duplicate   the
                     facilities  of  the  PICTURE library, but contain
                     other distinct features.

     FIXLIB          has functions for examining  and  patching  EMACS
                     functions.

     FORTRAN         implements  FORTRAN  mode.    See  the file INFO;
                     EFORTRAN.

     HAZ1510         redefines commands to be convenient on  Hazeltine
                     1510 terminals.

     IBM370          implements IBM370 mode, for editing 370 assembler
                     code.

     INFO            peruses tree-structured documentation files.

     IVORY           is  EAK  and  ECC's alternate generator for EMACS
                     libraries,  which  uses  a  slightly  nonstandard
                     input  format.    The  libraries  BABYL,  BABYLM,
                     CACHE, FIXLIB, IVORY, MKDUMP, OUTLINE-MODE,  PL1,
                     TEACH-C100,  TMACS  and WORDAB are generated with
                     IVORY.  See the file INFO;IVORY.

     JOURNAL         implements  journal  files.    See  section  24.4
                     [Journals], page 164.

     JUSTIFY         implements  an  auto-justfy  mode similar to auto
                     fill mode.

     LABELS          has functions for arranging a file  of  addresses
                     for printing mailing labels.

     LEDIT           is   the   EMACS  side  of  the  EMACS-to-MacLisp
                     interface.  See the file INFO;LEDIT.î     236                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     LISPT           is  the  EMACS  side  of another EMACS-to-MacLisp
                     interface.  See the file INFO;LISPT.

     LSPUTL          contains  a  couple  of  useful   functions   for
                     searching and manipulating Lisp code.

     LUNAR           is  Moon's  personal library, which contains some
                     useful commands.

     MACCNV          does part of the work of converting MACRO-10 code
                     to MIDAS code.

     MAZLIB          is a game for solving mazes.  It's fun to play.

     MKDUMP          aids in dumping your own customized  environment.
                     See the file INFO;MKDUMP.

     MODE2           implements  a  second  additional  mode line with
                     additional information.

     MODLIN          implements a fancier mode line display.

     MOVE            provides  commands  specially  for  copying   and
                     moving  many  pieces  of  text  from  one file to
                     another.

     MQREPL          works with TAGS to perform several Query Replaces
                     on each of the files in a tag table.

     NEWS            is for reading the latest AP or  New  York  Times
                     news summary.

     NCOLUMNS        has functions for turning single-column text into
                     many columns, but not vice-versa.

     NOVICE          implements   restricted  subsets  of  EMACS,  for
                     beginners.  The beginner can turn  commands  back
                     on  when he feels ready.  See the file INFO;CONV,
                     node Novice.

     OUTLINE         implements Outline Mode, for editing outlines.

     PAGE            defines commands for viewing only one page of the
                     file  at  a  time.    See  section  18.1  [PAGE],
                     page 96.

     PASCAL          implements PASCAL mode.  See the file INFO;EPASC.

     PERSONAL        has  functions  for keeping notes on your current
                     projects.î     237                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     PHRASE          has  commands for moving over and killing phrases
                     of text.

     PICTURE         contains Edit Picture, the  command  for  editing
                     text   pictures.     See  section  26  [PICTURE],
                     page 183.

     PURIFY          generates libraries from EMACS source files,  and
                     contains  other  functions useful for editing the
                     source files.  See the file INFO;CONV.

     QSEND           sends a message to another logged-in  user,  like
                     :QSEND.

     RENUM           renumbers   figures,   equations,   theorems   or
                     chapters.

     RMAIL           is for reading, editing and sending  mail.    See
                     the file INFO;RMAIL.

     RUNOFF          is  for  text-justified  documents  divided  into
                     separate source files.  It rejustifies the  files
                     which  have  changed,  then runs :@ to print only
                     the pages which have changed.

     SAIL            implements SAIL mode.

     SCHEME          implements SCHEME mode.

     SCRLIN          contains alternative definitions of C-N  and  C-P
                     which  move  by  screen  lines instead of by real
                     lines.

     SLOWLY          redefines  commands  and  options  to  suit  slow
                     terminals.

     SORT            implements the sorting commands.

     SPLIT           contains the commands Split File and Unsplit File
                     for  breaking  up large files into subfiles small
                     enough to be edited.  See section  24.2  [Split],
                     page 160.

     TDEBUG          is a debugger for TECO programs.  It displays the
                     buffer  in  one  window  and  the  program in the
                     other,  while  stepping  by  lines   or   setting
                     breakpoints.  See the file INFO;TDEBUG.

     TIME            causes the current time of day to be displayed in
                     the mode line.î     238                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     TMACS           contains miscellaneous useful functions

     VT100           defines  the arrow keys and numeric keypad of the
                     VT-100 terminal to move  the  cursor  and  supply
                     numeric arguments.

     VT52            defines  the numeric keypad of the VT-52 terminal
                     to supply numeric arguments.

     XLISP           contains   functions   for    global    stylistic
                     transformations  of  Lisp code.  See section 20.6
                     [Lisp], page 110.



     Automatically Loaded Librariesî     Automatically Loaded Librariesî     Automatically Loaded Libraries


       These are libraries which the user need not know about to use.


     AUX             implements  several  commands  described  in  the
                     manual  as  part  of  the standard EMACS.  Loaded
                     automatically when needed.

     BABYLM          contains the part of Babyl that  implements  mail
                     sending.

     BARE            contains   the   definitions   of   all  built-in
                     functions.  These definitions are not needed  for
                     executing  the  built-in  functions, only so that
                     Help  can  describe  them   properly.      Loaded
                     automatically   by  documentation  commands  when
                     needed.  See section 5.2 [BARE], page 24.

     DIRED           implements the commands for editing  and  listing
                     directories.    Loaded automatically when needed.
                     See section 13.6 [DIRED], page 76.

     EINIT           is used in building and dumping EMACS.   See  the
                     file INFO;CONV.

     EMACS           is  the  main  body  of  standard  EMACS.  Always
                     loaded.

     GRIND           implements  C-M-G.    Loaded  automatically  when
                     needed.  See section 20.7 [Grinding], page 115.

     KBDMAC          implements keyboard macros.  Loaded automaticallyî     239                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     when needed.  See section 22.8 [Keyboard Macros],
                     page 152.

     MUDDLE          implements Muddle mode.

     PL1             implements PL1 mode.  See the file INFO;EPL1.

     SCRIBE          implements   SCRIBE   mode.    See  section  11.8
                     [SCRIBE], page 61.    Loaded  automatically  when
                     needed.

     TAGS            implements  the  TAGS  package.    See section 21
                     [TAGS], page  122.    Loaded  automatically  when
                     needed.

     TEX             implements  TEX  mode.    See the file INFO;ETEX.
                     Loaded automatically when needed.

     WORDAB          implements   Word   Abbrev    mode.        Loaded
                     automatically   when  needed.    See  section  25
                     [WORDAB], page 172.î     240                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                            INDEX OF VARIABLESî                            INDEX OF VARIABLESî                            INDEX OF VARIABLES



       An  option  is  a  variable whose value Edit Options offers for
     editing.  A hook variable is a variable  which  is  normally  not
     defined,  but which you can define if you wish for customization.
     Most hook variables require TECO programs as their values.

       The default value of the variable is given in parentheses after
     its name.  If no value is given, the default value is zero.    If
     the  word "nonexistent" appears, then the variable does not exist
     unless you create it.


     Abort Resumption Message 
                     This is the message to be printed by C-] to  tell
                     you  how  to resume the aborted command.  If this
                     variable is zero, there is no way to  resume,  so
                     C-]  asks  for  confirmation.    See section 24.1
                     [Quitting], page 159.

     Additional Abbrev Expanders (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists when Word Abbrev mode  is
                     turned  on,  it  is  a string of characters which
                     should  terminate  and  expand  an   abbrev,   in
                     addition  to  the  punctuation  characters  which
                     normally do so.  See also WORDAB Ins Chars.

     After Compilation Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero,  then  it
                     is  executed as a TECO expression by the function
                     Compile, after compilation  itself  is  finished.
                     Exception:  If  the  variable  Compile Command is
                     also  nonzero,  it  overrides  this  hook.    See
                     section 20.2 [Compile], page 103.

     Atom Word Mode  The  minor  mode  Atom  Word  mode  is on if this
                     variable is nonzero.   See  section  22.1  [Minor
                     Modes], page 133.

     Auto Directory Display 
                     If  this  is  nonzero,  certain  file  operations
                     automatically display the file  directory.    See
                     section 13.4 [Directories], page 75.

     Auto Fill Mode  The  minor  mode  Auto  Fill  mode  is on if this
                     variable is nonzero.  See section 11.4 [Filling],
                     page 56.î     241                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Auto Push Point Notification 
                     The  value of this variable is the string printed
                     in the echo area by some commands to  notify  you
                     that the mark has been set to the old location of
                     point.  See section 10 [Search], page 46.

     Auto Push Point Option (500)
                     Searches  set the mark if they move at least this
                     many  characters.    See  section  10   [Search],
                     page 46.

     Auto Save All Buffers 
                     If  this  is nonzero, auto save saves all buffers
                     that are modified, not just the selected  buffer.
                     See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Default 
                     The  minor  mode  Auto Save mode is on by default
                     for newly  visited  files  if  this  variable  is
                     nonzero.  See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Filenames (DSK:<working directory>;_SAV00 >) 
                     These  are  the filenames used for auto saving if
                     the visited filenames are not used.  If the  last
                     two characters of the first filename are "00", as
                     they  are  by  default, then they are replaced by
                     the last two characters of the buffer  number  to
                     get  the  filename actually used for saving.  See
                     section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Interval (500) 
                     This is the number  of  characters  between  auto
                     saves.  See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Max (2) 
                     This is the maximum number of auto saves to keep.
                     See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Mode  If  this  is  nonzero, Auto Save mode is enabled.
                     See section 13.3 [Auto Save], page 72.

     Auto Save Visited File 
                     If this is nonzero,  auto  saving  saves  as  the
                     visited  filenames.  If this is zero, auto saving
                     saves as the names which are the  value  of  Auto
                     Save  Filenames  (q.v.).   See section 13.3 [Auto
                     Save], page 72.

     Autoarg Mode    When Autoarg Mode is nonzero,  numeric  argumentsî     242                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     can  be specified just by typing the digits.  See
                     section 4 [Arguments], page 19.

     Bottom Display Margin 
                     This controls the  size  of  the  region  at  the
                     bottom  of  the  screen  which  the cursor is not
                     allowed to be in.  If the cursor  would  normally
                     move  there,  the  window  is recentered instead.
                     The value is represented as a percentage  of  the
                     screen  size,  and  must  not be negative or more
                     than 99.  It controls the TECO flag FS  %BOTTOM$.
                     See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Buffer Creation Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a TECO program to be executed whenever
                     a newly created buffer is selected for the  first
                     time.  See section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     Buffer Deselection Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a TECO program to be executed whenever
                     a  buffer  is  about  to  be  deselected.     The
                     difference between this and Buffer Selection Hook
                     is  that, while both are executed (if they exist)
                     when you switch buffers, this is executed  before
                     the switch, and Buffer Selection Hook is executed
                     after  the  switch.    See  section 14 [Buffers],
                     page 83.

     Buffer Selection Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should be a TECO program to be executed  whenever
                     a  buffer is selected.  See section 14 [Buffers],
                     page 83.

     Case Replace (1) 
                     When Case Replace is nonzero, Replace String  and
                     Query  Replace attempt to preserve case when they
                     replace.  See section 19 [Replace], page 98.

     Case Search (1) 
                     If Case Search is nonzero, searches of all  sorts
                     allow  upper  case letters and lower case letters
                     to match each other.  It controls the  TECO  flag
                     FS BOTH CASE$.  See section 10 [Search], page 46.

     Collapse in Comparison (nonexistent) 
                     If  this  variable  exists  and  is  not zero, itî     243                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     should  be a string of characters for M-X Compare
                     Windows  to  regard  as   insignificant.      See
                     section 16 [Windows], page 90.

     Comment Begin   This  is  the  string used to start new comments.
                     If it is zero, the  value  of  Comment  Start  is
                     used.  See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Comment Column  This is the column at which comments are aligned.
                     See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Comment End     This is the string which is used to end comments.
                     It is often empty for languages in which comments
                     end  at  the  end  of the line.  See section 20.5
                     [Comments], page 107.

     Comment Multi Line (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, then when
                     Auto Fill mode breaks a comment line, it does not
                     insert a new comment starter  on  the  new  line.
                     This is for use with languages that have explicit
                     comment   terminators,   if   you   want   single
                     multi-line  comments   instead   of   single-line
                     comments  on consecutive lines.  See section 20.5
                     [Comments], page 107.

     Comment Rounding (/8+1*8) 
                     This is the TECO  program  used  to  decide  what
                     column to start a comment in when the text of the
                     line  goes past the comment column.  The argument
                     to the program is the column at which text  ends.
                     See section 20.5 [Comments], page 107.

     Comment Start   This  is the string used for recognizing existing
                     comments, and for starting new  ones  if  Comment
                     Begin  is  zero.    If  Comment  Start  is  zero,
                     semicolon is used.  See section 20.5  [Comments],
                     page 107.

     Compile Command (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be  a  TECO program to be used by the M-X
                     Compile  command  to  compile  the  file.     See
                     section 20.2 [Compile], page 103.

     Compiler Filename (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be  the  name  of  the  compiler  to use,
                     suitable for a colon command.   By  default,  theî     244                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     name of the major mode is used as the name of the
                     compiler.  See section 20.2 [Compile], page 103.

     Compiler Switches (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     is   used  as  switches  for  compilation.    See
                     section 20.2 [Compile], page 103.

     Cursor Centering Point (40) 
                     This specifies how far from the top of the screen
                     point ought to appear when a new window  position
                     is  chosen.    The  value  of the variable is the
                     percentage of the screen size.  It  must  not  be
                     negative  or  more than 99.  It controls the TECO
                     flag FS %CENTER$.    See  section  15  [Display],
                     page 87.

     Default Major Mode (Fundamental) 
                     This  is  the major mode in which new buffers are
                     created.  If it is the null string,  new  buffers
                     are  created  in  the same mode as the previously
                     selected  buffer.    See  section  14  [Buffers],
                     page 83.

     Digit Shift Table (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a string containing the ten characters
                     which are  the  upper  case  equivalents  of  the
                     digits  0  through  9 on the keyboard being used.
                     Meta-' (^R Upcase Digit)  uses  this  table,  and
                     reads  it  from the user if the variable does not
                     exist.  See section 12 [Fixing Typos], page 65.

     Directory Lister (& Subset Directory Listing) 
                     This is the  TECO  program  used  for  listing  a
                     directory  for  C-X  C-D  and  the Auto Directory
                     Display  option.    The  default  value  is   the
                     definition  of  the  function  & Subset Directory
                     Listing.  Another useful value is the  definition
                     of the function & Rotated Directory Listing.  See
                     section 13.4 [Directories], page 75.

     Display Matching Paren (-1) 
                     This  variable  controls automatic display of the
                     matching   open   parenthesis   when   a    close
                     parenthesis   is  inserted.    See  section  20.4
                     [Matching], page 105.

     Display Mode Line Inverse î     245                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     If this is nonzero, the mode line is displayed in
                     inverse   video   or  otherwise  highlighted,  on
                     terminals which can support it.    This  controls
                     the  TECO flag FS INVMOD$.  See section 1.1 [Mode
                     Line], page 6.

     Display Overprinting 
                     If this  is  nonzero,  backspace  characters  and
                     stray  carriage  return  characters in the buffer
                     display as actual overprinting rather than as  ^H
                     and ^M.  This variable controls the TECO flags FS
                     ^H  PRINT$  and  FS  ^M  PRINT$.    See section 2
                     [Characters], page 10.

     Echo Area Height (3) 
                     This is the number of lines  in  the  echo  area.
                     Its  value  should  be at least one.  It controls
                     the TECO flag FS ECHO  LINES$.    See  section  1
                     [Screen], page 5.

     EMACS Version   This   variable's  value  is  the  EMACS  version
                     number.

     End of Buffer Display Margin (35) 
                     This specifies how far up the screen the  end  of
                     the  buffer is placed, if it is on screen at all,
                     when a new window position  is  chosen.    It  is
                     represented  as  a percentage of the screen size,
                     and must not be negative or more than  99.    Its
                     value  controls  the  TECO  flag  FS  %END$.  See
                     section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Error Messages in Echo Area 
                     If this is nonzero, error messages are printed in
                     the echo area  instead  of  at  the  top  of  the
                     screen.    It  controls  the  TECO  flag  FS ECHO
                     ERRORS$.  See section 24.2 [Lossage], page 160.

     Exit Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     is a TECO program to be executed  whenever  EMACS
                     is  exited, instead of the normal action of doing
                     an auto save.  The subroutine  &  Exit  EMACS  is
                     responsible  for  executing  it.  See section 6.4
                     [Exiting], page 31.

     Exit to Superior Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     is a TECO program to be executed  whenever  EMACSî     246                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     is  about  to  return  to  its  superior  job, in
                     addition to all normal actions.

     Fill Column (70) 
                     The value of Fill Column is the  width  used  for
                     filling  text.    It  controls  the  TECO flag FS
                     ADLINE$.  See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Fill Extra Space List (.?!) 
                     The characters in this string are the ones  which
                     ought  to  be followed by two spaces when text is
                     filled.  See section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Fill Prefix     The value of this variable is the prefix expected
                     on every line of text before filling  and  placed
                     at  the front of every line after filling.  It is
                     usually empty, for filling nonindented text.  See
                     section 11.4 [Filling], page 56.

     Indent Tabs Mode (-1) 
                     If  Indent  Tabs  Mode  is  nonzero,   then   tab
                     characters  are  used  by  the  indent  commands.
                     Otherwise,   only   spaces   are   used.      See
                     section 11.3 [Indenting Text], page 54.

     <libname> Setup Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a TECO program to be executed when the
                     library  <libname>  is  loaded.    The  library's
                     &  Setup  function is responsible for doing this.
                     If the library has no & Setup function,  it  will
                     not handle a setup hook either.  See section 22.2
                     [Libraries], page 135.

     <libname> Kill Hook (nonexistent) 
                     Some  libraries  may  execute  the  value of this
                     variable, if it exists and is nonzero,  when  the
                     library  is  being  removed  from  core with Kill
                     Libraries.  This is done by the library's &  Kill
                     function;  if the library has no & Kill <libname>
                     Library function, it will not handle a kill hook.
                     See section 22.2 [Libraries], page 135.

     Lisp <function> Indent 
                     This variable  controls  the  indentation  within
                     calls  to the function <function>.  Actually, the
                     variable  used  is  not  always  Lisp  <function>
                     Indent,  but rather <language> <function> Indent,
                     where <language> is  the  value  of  Lisp  Indentî     247                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     Language.      See   section   20.3  [Indenting],
                     page 104.

     Lisp Indent DEFanything (1) 
                     The value of this variable  controls  indentation
                     within  calls to functions whose names start with
                     "def".  Actually, the variable used is not always
                     Lisp Indent DEFanything,  but  rather  <language>
                     Indent DEFanything, where <language> is the value
                     of  Lisp  Indent  Language.    See  section  20.3
                     [Indenting], page 104.

     Lisp Indent Language (Lisp) 
                     The value of this variable is the string used  as
                     the  language  name  when  looking for <language>
                     <function> Indent variables.   See  section  20.3
                     [Indenting], page 104.

     Lisp Indent Offset 
                     If  nonzero,  this selects an alternative default
                     style of indentation for  Lisp.    Actually,  the
                     variable  used  is not always Lisp Indent Offset,
                     but  rather  <language>  Indent   Offset,   where
                     <language>  is the value of Lisp Indent Language.
                     See section 20.3 [Indenting], page 104.

     Mail Reader Library (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, it is the
                     name of the library to be used by M-X  Read  Mail
                     for reading mail and by M-X Send Mail for sending
                     mail.  The former calls the function "<entry>" in
                     the  library,  and  the latter calls the function
                     "& Mail Message".    If  the  variable  does  not
                     exist,   the   library   RMAIL   is  used.    See
                     section 6.2 [Mail], page 29.

     Mail Sender Library (nonexistent) 
                     If  this  variable  exists  and  is  nonzero,  it
                     specifies the library to be used by M-X Send Mail
                     only,   overriding  Mail  Reader  Library.    See
                     section 6.2 [Mail], page 29.

     <mode> ..D (nonexistent) 
                     This variable is used by the major mode <mode> to
                     record the syntax table for that  mode.    It  is
                     created  by the first use of the mode, and if you
                     supply your value, that value  will  be  accepted
                     instead.    For example, Text mode uses Text ..D.
                     Not all major modes have their own syntax tables.
                     See section 22.4 [Syntax], page 139.î     248                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     <mode> Mode Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     is  a  TECO program to be executed when the major
                     mode <mode> is entered.  For example,  Text  Mode
                     Hook  is executed when Text mode is entered.  See
                     section 20.1 [Major Modes], page 102.

     Next Screen Context Lines (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists, its value specifies  the
                     number  of lines of overlap between one screenful
                     and the next, when scrolling by screens with  C-V
                     and M-V.  See section 15 [Display], page 87.

     Only Global Abbrevs (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and its value is nonzero,
                     then  Word  Abbrev  Mode assumes that you are not
                     using   any   mode-specific   abbrevs.        See
                     section 25.2.1 [Customizing WORDAB], page 178.

     Overwrite Mode  If this is nonzero, the minor mode Overwrite mode
                     is  in  effect.   It controls the TECO flag FS ^R
                     REPLACE$.    See  section  22.1  [Minor   Modes],
                     page 133.

                     ^î     Page Delimiter (|L)
                     This  is the TECO search string used to recognize
                     page  boundaries.    See  section   18   [Pages],
                     page 94.

     PAGE Flush CRLF 
                     If  this variable exists and is nonzero, the PAGE
                     library expects every page to start with a  blank
                     line,   which  is  not  considered  part  of  the
                     contents of the page.  See section  18.1  [PAGE],
                     page 96.

                           ^ ^ ^  ^î     Paragraph Delimiter (.|O|I|O |O')
                     This  is the TECO search string used to recognize
                     beginnings  of  paragraphs.    See  section  11.2
                     [Sentences], page 52.

     Permit Unmatched Paren (-1) 
                     Controls whether the bell is run if you insert an
                     unmatched  close  parenthesis.   See section 20.4
                     [Matching], page 105.

     Prefix Char List 
                     This variable's value is a string which lists all
                     the   prefix   characters   defined,   so    thatî     249                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     self-documentation   facilities   can   find  any
                     subcommands of prefix  characters  which  call  a
                     given  function.    See  the file INFO;CONV, node
                     Prefix.

     Quote Execute Command (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and  is  zero,  then  M-X
                                     ^î                     does  not quote |] characters which appear in the
                     string arguments of the command.  See section 5.2
                     [Extended Commands], page 24.

     Read Line Delay 
                     This is the  amount  of  time,  in  30'ths  of  a
                     second, which EMACS should wait after starting to
                     read  a  line  of  input,  before  it prompts and
                     starts echoing the input.

     Readable Word Abbrev Files (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable  exists  and  is  nonzero,  word
                     abbrev  files  will be written in the format that
                     M-X List Word Abbrevs uses, instead of in a  less
                     readable   but   faster   loading  format.    See
                     section 25.1.6 [Saving Abbrevs], page 176.

     Region Query Size (5000) 
                     Many commands which act  on  the  region  require
                     confirmation  if  the  region  contains more than
                     this many characters.    See  section  8  [Mark],
                     page 36.

     Return from Superior Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a TECO program to be executed whenever
                     EMACS  is  resumed  after  being  exited.     See
                     section 6.4 [Exiting], page 31.

     SAIL Character Mode 
                     If this is nonzero, characters in the buffer with
                     ASCII  codes  0  through 37 are displayed without
                     conversion.  Do  not  try  to  use  this  feature
                     except  on terminals specially equipped to handle
                     it.  The  variable  controls  the  TECO  flag  FS
                     SAIL$.     See  section  I.1  [Ideal  Keyboards],
                     page 186.

     Save Word Abbrevs (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable  exists,  its  value  determines
                     which  abbrevs will be saved upon exit from EMACS
                     when abbrevs have been modified.  Setting it to 1î     250                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     causes   all   abbrevs   to   be   saved.     See
                     section  25.1.6  [Saving  Abbrevs],   page   176.
                     Setting  it  to  -1  causes  just the incremental
                     abbrevs to be saved.  See section 25.2.4  [Dumped
                     Environments], page 180.

     Search Exit Char (27) 
                     This  is the numeric code for the 9-bit character
                     which should exit incremental search and not have
                     its normal command meaning in  that  case.    The
                     default, 27, is the code for Altmode.

     Search Exit Option (nonexistent) 
                     If   this   variable   is  0,  Control  and  Meta
                     characters without special meanings do  not  exit
                     incrementatl  search;  instead,  they are part of
                     the string to be searched for.  If this  variable
                     does   not  exist,  or  is  nonzero,  then  those
                     characters exit the search and  then  have  their
                     normal function.

     Set Mode Line Hook 
                     This  is  a hook which is executed every time the
                     mode line is recomputed.  It can insert  text  in
                     the  buffer  to put it in the mode line after the
                     minor  modes.    See  section  1.1  [Mode  Line],
                     page 6.

     SLOWLY Maximum Speed (nonexistent) 
                     If  this  variable  is defined, it is the maximum
                     output speed for which SLOWLY, if loaded,  should
                     define its commands.  See section I.5.4 [SLOWLY],
                     page 192.

     Space Indent Flag 
                     If  this  flag is nonzero, then Auto Fill indents
                     the new lines which it creates, by  performing  a
                     Tab.   Most major modes for programming languages
                     set this nonzero.  See  section  11.4  [Filling],
                     page 56.

     Tab Stop Definitions (a string) 
                     The  value  of  Tab  Stop Definitions is a string
                     defining the tab stops to be used by the  command
                     M-I  (^R  Tab  to  Tab  Stop).   See section 11.3
                     [Indenting Text], page 54.

     Tags Find File (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and  is  not  zero,  TAGSî     251                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     uses  C-X  C-F  to switch files.  Otherwise, TAGS
                     uses C-X C-V.  See section 21 [TAGS],  page  122.
                     Some  other  things  may  decide  to use multiple
                     buffers  if  this  variable  is  nonzero.     See
                     section 14 [Buffers], page 83.

     Tags Search Verbose (nonexistent) 
                     If  this variable exists and is zero, Tags Search
                     does not print out the name of each file that  it
                     begins   to   search.      If   the  variable  is
                     nonexistent, that is equivalent to a value of  1.
                     See section 21.4.3 [Tags Search], page 127.

                             ^    ^î     Temp File FN2 List (MEMO|OXGP|O ...)
                     This is a TECO search string which recognizes the
                     filenames   which   indicate  that  the  file  is
                     probably temporary.    See  section  13.5  [Clean
                     Directory], page 75.

     Top Display Margin 
                     This  controls  the size of the region at the top
                     of the screen which the cursor is not allowed  to
                     be  in.  If the cursor would normally move there,
                     the window is recentered instead.  The  value  is
                     represented  as  a percentage of the screen size,
                     and must not be negative or more  than  99.    It
                     controls  the TECO flag FS %TOP$.  See section 15
                     [Display], page 87.

     Underline Begin (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists, its value should be  the
                     character  or  string  to use to begin underlines
                     for  the  M-_  command.      See   section   11.7
                     [Underlining], page 60.

     Underline End (nonexistent) 
                     If  this variable exists, its value should be the
                     character or string to use to end underlines  for
                     the M-_ command.  See section 11.7 [Underlining],
                     page 60.

     Visit File Hook (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, its value
                     should  be a TECO program to be executed whenever
                     a file is visited.  See section 13.1  [Visiting],
                     page 69.

     Visit File Save Old (1) 
                     This  variable  controls  whether visiting a fileî     252                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                     offers to save the file previously visited in the
                     same buffer, if it has changes.  See section 13.1
                     [Visiting], page 69.

     WORDAB All Caps (nonexistent) 
                     If this variable exists and is nonzero, expanding
                     an   all-upper-case   abbrev   to   a  multi-word
                     expansion will cause the words in  the  expansion
                     to  be  all-upper-case,  instead  of  just having
                     their   first   letters    uppercased.        See
                     section 25.1.2 [Controlling Expansion], page 175.

     WORDAB Ins Chars (nonexistent) 
                     If  this variable exists when Word Abbrev Mode is
                     turned on,  it  should  be  a  string  containing
                     precisely those characters which should terminate
                     and  expand  an  abbrev.  This variable overrides
                     Additional  Abbrev   Expanders   (q.v.).      See
                     section 25.2.1 [Customizing WORDAB], page 178.î     253                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                                   INDEXî                                   INDEXî                                   INDEX



                                                133, 134, 150
     !   15, 99                       Auto Push Point Notification   38
                                      Auto Push Point Option   38
     %   67                           Auto Save All Buffers   74
                                      Auto Save Default   72, 133
     & (in function names)   26       Auto Save Filenames   73
     & Alter ..D   142                Auto Save Interval   74
     & Exit EMACS   32                Auto Save Max   74
     & Mail Message   29              Auto Save mode   7, 72, 133
                                      Auto Save Visited File   73
     *Permutation    Table*   (buffer)Autoarg mode   20, 188
               185                    Autoloading   136
     *Permuted File* (buffer)   185
     *Tags Search* (buffer)   127     Backspace   13
     *TAGS* (buffer)   124, 126       BARE library   27
                                      Bit prefix characters   188
     --MORE--   8                     Blank lines   18,  40,  53,  108,
                                                110
     .   99                           BOLIO   59
                                      Bottom Display Margin   87
     <cr>   11                        Buffers      7, 83, 92, 124, 127,
                                                150
     @Begin   62                      Buggestion   64
     @End   62                        Bugs   168
                                      Built-in functions   27
     Abbrev definition files      176,
               180                    C-   10
     Abbrev  definition  lists    173,C-.   127
               176, 179, 180          C-;   107
     Abbrevs   172                    C-<   37
     Abort Recursive Edit   137, 159  C->   37
     Aborting   159                   C-@   36
     Accumulator   119                C-A   16, 52, 105
     Additional Abbrev Expanders   179C-B   16, 101
     Address   119                    C-C   11, 157
     Altmode   11,  13,  14,  22,  99,C-C C-Y   158
               100, 141, 154, 157     C-D   16, 22, 39
     Append to File   44, 79          C-E   16, 52, 105
     Apropos   34                     C-F   16
     Argument   174, 180              C-G     22, 31, 47, 69, 157, 159,
     ASCII   10, 13                             164
     Atom Word mode   7, 51, 133      C-K   16, 39, 52
     Auto Directory Display   75      C-L   16, 87, 154, 194
     Auto Fill   110                  C-M-(   112
     Auto Fill mode   7, 54, 56,  108,C-M-)   112î     254                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     C-M-;   108                      C-X .   57
     C-M-@   37, 112                  C-X 1   90
     C-M-A   114, 119                 C-X   145, 150
     C-M-B   62, 111                  C-X 2   90
     C-M-C   31, 76, 137              C-X 3   91
     C-M-D   62, 112, 119             C-X 4   92
     C-M-E   62, 114, 119             C-X ;   109
     C-M-F   62, 111                  C-X =   58
     C-M-G   62, 116, 120             C-X A   44
     C-M-H   37, 62, 114              C-X Altmode   24, 99, 157
     C-M-K   39, 62, 112              C-X B   83
     C-M-L   94                       C-X C-A   174, 178, 181
     C-M-M   54, 105                  C-X C-B   85
     C-M-N   62, 112, 119             C-X C-C   31, 176
     C-M-P   62, 112, 119             C-X C-D   75
     C-M-Q   62, 116                  C-X C-F   84
     C-M-R   89                       C-X C-H   174, 181
     C-M-Rubout   39, 62, 112         C-X C-L   59
     C-M-Space   175, 181             C-X C-O   18, 40
     C-M-T   112                      C-X C-P   37, 94, 96
     C-M-Tab   115                    C-X C-Q   70
     C-M-U   62, 112                  C-X C-S   17, 70, 74, 85
     C-M-V   91                       C-X C-T   66
     C-M-W   42                       C-X C-U   36, 59
     C-M-X   23                       C-X C-V   17, 69
     C-M-[   114                      C-X C-W   74
     C-M-\   55, 116                  C-X C-X   37
     C-M-]   114                      C-X D   79
     C-M-^   105, 115                 C-X E   153
     C-N   16, 101                    C-X F   57, 133
     C-O   18, 19, 101, 105           C-X G   45
     C-P   16                         C-X H   37
     C-Q   15, 54, 94, 101, 175, 180  C-X J   97
     C-R   46, 96, 99, 154, 191       C-X K   85
     C-Rubout   110                   C-X L   95
     C-S   46, 96, 191                C-X M   29
     C-Space   36                     C-X N   93
     C-T   16, 66                     C-X O   90
     C-U   19, 22, 69, 180            C-X P   93, 95, 97
     C-U C-@   38, 53                 C-X Q   154, 191
     C-U C-Space   38                 C-X R   29
     C-V   88                         C-X Rubout   39, 52, 65
     C-W   39, 53, 94, 99             C-X T   66
     C-X   11, 101                    C-X Tab   55
     C-X #   60                       C-X U   181
     C-X (   153                      C-X W   93, 95, 96
     C-X )   153                      C-X X   45
     C-X +   174, 178, 181            C-X [   94, 96
     C-X -   174, 178, 181            C-X ]   94, 96î     255                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     C-X ^   91, 158                  CRLF   13, 15
     C-X _   61                       Cursor   5, 15
     C-Y   41                         Cursor Centering Point   87
     C-\   157                        Customization   12, 26, 116, 143,
     C-]   76, 100, 137, 141, 159               150, 178
     C-^   11
     C-_   33                         Default Major Mode   83
     Capitalization   175             Default Separator   192
     Caret   13                       Define Word Abbrevs   179
     Case  conversion      58, 66, 98,Defining abbrevs   174, 176
               172, 189               Defuns   37, 114
     Case Replace   98                Delete File   80
     Case Search   47, 98             Delete Matching Lines   100
     Centering   57                   Delete Non-Matching Lines     79,
     Character Search   48                      100
     Character set   10               Deletion   15, 39, 65, 100, 163
     Clean Directory   76             Describe   33, 138
     Clear screen   87                Digit Shift Table   66
     Collapse in Comparison   91      Directory   75, 79, 81
     Comma   99                       Directory Lister   75
     Command completion   22, 26      DIRED   76, 136
     Commands   21                    Disasters   72
     Comment Begin   109, 140         Display Matching Paren   106
     Comment Column   109, 151        Display Mode Line Inverse   8
     Comment End   109, 140           Display Overprinting   13
     Comment Start   109, 140, 151    Dissociated Press   63
     Comments   50, 97, 102, 107, 110,Documentation   35
               111, 119, 140          Dollar Sign   14
     Compare Directories   81         Down Picture Movement   183
     Compare Windows   91             Drastic Changes   72
     Compile   103                    Dumped environments   180
     Compile Command   104
     Compiler Filename   104          Echo area   5, 22, 58, 94, 174
     Compiler Switches   104          Echo Area Height   5
     Confirmation      59, 71, 72, 77,Edit Indented Text   54
               157, 174               Edit key   187, 188
     Connected   12, 26               Edit Options   30, 137
     Continuation line   15           Edit Picture   30, 183
     Control   10, 13, 165            Edit Syntax Table   141
     Control  characters,  display  ofEdit Tab Stops   50, 55
               13                     Edit Word Abbrevs   176
     Control   characters,   insertingEditor Type   6
               15                     End of Buffer Display Margin   87
     Control-Meta   111               Environments   61
     Copy File   80                   Error handler   5
     Correct Spelling   67            Error message   5
     Count Matching Lines   100       Error Messages in Echo Area   160
     Crashes   72                     Escape key   186
     Create File   70                 EVARS   134, 143, 150î     256                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     EVARS files   177, 178           Insertion   15, 79, 94
     Exit Hook   32                   Instant Command Prompt   23
     Exit to Superior Hook   32       INTER   110
     Exiting   31
     Exiting EMACS   176, 181         Join pages   97
     Expand  Word  Abbrevs  in  RegionJournal files   164
               175                    Justification   57
     Expander characters   179
     Expanding abbrevs   175          Keyboard macros   7, 152
     Extended commands   21           Kill All Word Abbrevs   178
                                      Kill Buffer   85
     FAIL   118                       Kill Libraries   136, 161
     File dates   71                  Kill ring   41, 161
     File deletion   75, 76           Kill Some Buffers   85, 161
     File directory   75              Killing   39,  41,  51,  52,  65,
     File Versions Kept   76                    112, 163
     Files      7, 17, 69, 72, 79, 92,Killing abbrevs   174, 176, 178
               150
     Fill Column   57, 133, 137       Labels   119
     Fill Prefix   53, 57             LEDIT   6, 110
     Filling   56                     Left Picture Movement   183
     Find File   84, 124              Libraries   96, 135, 172, 183
     Find Pat   113                   Line noise   34
     FLUSHED   8                      Line separator   13, 15
     Fonts   59                       Linefeed   13, 54, 102, 105, 115
     Formatting   54, 115             Linefeed, stray   13
     Formfeed   94                    Lines   39, 185
     FS Flags   55, 87, 107, 120, 142,Lisp   104, 133
               170, 190               Lisp FOO Indent   117
     Functions   12, 21, 26           Lisp Indent DEFAnything   116
                                      Lisp Indent Language   118
     Global abbrevs   172, 178        Lisp Indent Offset   117
     Grinding   115                   Lisp Indentation Hook   117
                                      Lisp mode   110
     Help   11, 33, 166               Lisp PROG Indent   117
     Home Directory   144, 164        Lisp Special Indent Offset   116
     Hooks   181                      List Buffers   85
                                      List Directories   75
     Ignoriginal   64                 List Files   75
     Incremental   abbrev   definitionList Library   136
               files   180            List Loaded Libraries   136
     Indent Tabs Mode   55, 134       List Matching Lines   100
     Indentation   54, 104, 107, 115  List Redefinitions   103, 138
     Init file   188                  List Tags   127
     Init files   143, 177, 178       List Variables   138
     Insert Buffer   185              List Word Abbrevs   176, 179, 180
     Insert File   79                 Lists   37, 111, 140
     Insert Page Directory   97       Load Library   135
     Insert Word Abbrevs   179, 180   Loading   135î     257                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Local modes lists   134          M-W   42
     Local  variables    83, 138, 139,M-X   21, 24
               150                    M-Y   43
     Lowercase Lisp Buffer   113      M-[   53, 62, 119
     Lowercase Lisp Region   113      M-\   40, 54, 105
     LSPUTL   113                     M-]   53, 119
                                      M-^   40, 54, 105, 115
     M-   10                          M-_   60
     M-"   120                        M-~   71
     M-#   59                         M.L   138
     M-$   67                         Macro-10   118
     M-%   100, 157                   Macsyma   116
     M-'   66, 120, 175, 181          Macsyma mode   120
     M-(   112                        Mail   29
     M-)   112                        Mail Reader Library   29
     M-- M-C   66                     Mail Sender Library   29
     M-- M-L   66                     MAILT   6
     M-- M-U   66                     Major modes   7,  83,  102,  103,
     M-.   124                                  109, 141, 150, 172
     M-;   107                        Make Page Permutation Table   185
     M-<   16                         Make Space   161
     M->   16                         Make   These   Characters  Expand
     M-@   37, 51                               179
     M-A   52                         Make Word Abbrev   178
     M-Altmode   156                  Mark   36, 41, 42,  51,  53,  80,
     M-B   50                                   94, 112, 114, 124
     M-C   58                         Markov Chain   64
     M-D   39, 51                     Matching   105, 140
     M-E   52                         Meta   10, 50, 165, 186, 187, 188
     M-F   50                         Metizer   11, 157, 188
     M-G   57                         MIDAS   104, 118
     M-H   37, 53, 57                 MIDAS mode   118
     M-I   55                         Minibuffer     6, 15, 24, 31, 79,
     M-J   108                                  87, 100, 156, 170
     M-K   39, 52                     Minibuffer Separator   192
     M-L   58                         Minor modes   7, 55, 133, 172
     M-Linefeed   108                 MM   24, 45
     M-M   54, 105                    MM Commands   21
     M-N   108                        Mode abbrevs   172, 178
     M-O   191                        Mode line   6, 30, 83,  96,  103,
     M-P   108                                  133, 156
     M-Q   57                         Motion   50, 52, 94, 111, 114
     M-R   89                         Moving text   41
     M-Rubout   39, 51, 65            MQREPL   127
     M-S   57                         Muddle mode   110
     M-T   51
     M-Tab   54                       Name Kbd Macro   153
     M-U   58                         Narrowing   58, 93, 95, 98
     M-V   88                         Next File   126î     258                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Next Screen Context Lines   88   Reap File   76
     Numeric argument   174, 180      Recursive  editing level   6, 30,
     Numeric arguments   19,  23,  25,          76,  85, 141, 159, 165,
               41, 43, 51, 55, 56, 59,          176
               61, 72, 75, 88, 91, 92,Redefining abbrevs   174
               98, 108, 116, 133, 137,Redefining commands   144, 150
               158, 187, 188          Region   36, 41, 42, 53, 59,  60,
                                                61,  80,  93,  94, 114,
     Only Global Abbrevs   178                  116, 174, 185
     Options   137                    Region Query Size   59
     Outragedy   64                   Rename Buffer   85
     Overprinting   13                Rename File   80
     Overwrite mode   7, 134          Replace String   98
                                      Replacement   98, 100
     PAGE   96                        Replay Journal File   164
     Page Delimiter   53, 95          Restarting   162
     PAGE Flush CRLF   97             Return   11, 13, 15, 69
     Pages   37, 53, 94, 96, 185      Return from Superior Hook   32
     Paragraph Delimiter   53, 120    Return, stray   13
     Paragraphs   37, 52, 57, 62, 110,Revert File   72, 74
               119, 185               Right Picture Movement   183
     Parentheses   50, 105, 140       RMAIL   6, 29
     Permit Unmatched Paren   106     Rubout   11, 13, 15, 16, 22,  39,
     Permute Pages From Table   185             65,  99, 102, 110, 134,
     Pictures   183                             154
     Point   5, 15                    Run Library   136
     Prefix characters   11, 145, 150
     Prepend to File   44, 79         S-expressions   111, 140
     Preventing abbrev expansion   175SAIL Character Mode   134, 186
     Printing characters   15         SAIL characters   186
     Printing terminal   194          Save All Files   85
     Prompting   5, 22                Save Word Abbrevs   176, 181
     PURIFY library   120             Saving   69, 72
                                      Saving abbrevs   176
     Q-registers   45                 Screen   5, 87
     Query Replace   68, 99, 154, 157 SCRIBE   61
     Quit   164                       Scrolling   87, 88, 91
     Quitting   47, 159               Search Exit Char   47
     Quote Execute Command   25       Search Exit Option   47
     Quoting   15, 180                Searching   46, 96, 98
                                      Select Buffer   83
     R   59, 60                       Send Mail   29
     Read Command Prompt   22         Sentences   52, 65
     Read Incremental Word Abbrev FileSet Key   26, 178
               180                    Set Variable   137
     Read Mail   29                   Set Visited Filename   70, 80
     Read Word Abbrev File   176, 180 Short Display Size   191
     Read-Only Visiting   70          Slow Search Lines   191
     Readable Word Abbrev Files   177 Slow Search Separator   192î     259                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     SLOWLY Maximum Speed   192       Text mode   50, 106
     Sort Lines   185                 Text Mode Hook   106
     Sort Pages   185                 TJ6   59
     Sort Paragraphs   185            TMACS   29
     Sorting   185                    Toggling   133
     Space     11, 13, 22, 56, 67, 99,Top Display Margin   87
               154                    Top level   6, 159, 162
     Space Indent Flag   54           Transposition   51, 66, 112
     Spell Program   67               Two window mode   90
     SPLIT   162                      Type Mailing List   29
     Split File   162                 Typeout   5
     Split pages   97                 Typos   65, 66
     SRCCOM   71, 78
     Start Journal File   164         Underline Begin   61
     String arguments    23,  25,  75,Underline End   61
               137                    Underlining   60
     String Search   48               Undo   41, 59, 72, 161, 163
     Submode   7                      Unexpanding abbrevs   175
     Subroutines   26                 Unsplit File   162
     Subsystem   6                    Untabify   56
     Syntax  table   50, 51, 106, 110,Up Picture Movement   183
               114, 139               Uparrow   13
                                      Uppercase Lisp Buffer   113
     Tab   13, 50, 54, 102, 104,  110,Uppercase Lisp Region   113
               115                    URK   85, 161
     Tab Stop Definitions   55        User Name   144
     Tabify   56
     Tag Table Filenames   125        Variables   13, 137, 144
     TAGGEN   123                     View Arglist   128
     TAGS   84, 92, 136               View Buffer   88
     Tags Apropos   127               View Directory   75
     Tags File List   128             View File   79, 89
     TAGS Find File   84, 124, 127    View Kbd Macro   154
     Tags Query Replace   127         View Mail   29
     Tags Rescan   128                View Page Directory   97
     Tags Search   127                Visit File   81
     TCTYP   161                      Visit File Save Old   70
     Techniquitous   64               Visit Tag Table   123
     TECO      22, 24, 27, 45, 53, 58,Visiting   17, 69, 72, 84, 92
               80, 87, 101, 104,  106,
               118,   136,  138,  142,W2   90
               144, 152, 162, 190     What Available Space   162
     TECO default filenames   80      What Cursor Position   58
     TECO mode   120                  What Page   94
     TECO search string   127         What Tag?   128
     TECO search strings   76, 98, 101Windows   90
     Temp File FN2 List   76          Word Abbrev Hook   181
     Terminal type   161              Word abbrev mode   7,  134,  172,
     Text justifiers   59, 60                   173, 178î     260                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Word Search   48                 ^R Beginning of Line   16
     WORDAB   172                     ^R Buffer Not Modified   71
     WORDAB All Caps   175            ^R Center Line   57
     WORDAB DEFNS   176               ^R Change Environment Name   62
     WORDAB Ins Chars   179           ^R Change Font Region   60
     WORDAB Setup Hook   181          ^R Change Font Word   59
     Words     37, 50, 58, 59, 60, 65,^R Change Form   62
               66, 139                ^R Commands   21
     Write File   74, 79              ^R Copy Region   42
     Write  Incremental  Word   Abbrev^R Correct Word Spelling   67
               File   180             ^R Count Lines Page   95
     Write Kbd Macro   154            ^R CRLF   15
     Write Word Abbrev File   176, 180^R Delete Blank Lines   18, 40
                                      ^R Delete Character   39
     XLISP   113                      ^R  Delete Horizontal Space   40,
                                                54, 105
     ^   13, 99                       ^R Delete Indentation    40,  54,
     ^R (in function names)   12                105, 115
     ^R Abbrev Expand Only   175      ^R Directory Display   75
     ^R  Add Global Word Abbrev   174,^R DIRED   79
               178                    ^R Down Comment Line   108
     ^R Add Mode Word Abbrev      174,^R Down Environment   62
               178                    ^R Down List   112
     ^R Add Tag   125                 ^R Down Real Line   16
     ^R Append Next Kill   42         ^R Edit Quietly   191
     ^R Append to Buffer   44         ^R End Kbd Macro   153
     ^R Back to Indentation   54      ^R End of Defun   114
     ^R Backward Character   16       ^R End of Environment   62
     ^R   Backward   Delete  Character^R End of Line   16
               15, 39, 65, 110        ^R Exchange Point and Mark   37
     ^R Backward Delete  Hacking  Tabs^R Execute Kbd Macro   153
               110                    ^R Execute Minibuffer   156
     ^R Backward Environment   62     ^R Exit   31, 137
     ^R  Backward  Kill Sentence   39,^R Extract Sublist   113
               52, 65                 ^R Fill Paragraph   57
     ^R Backward Kill Sexp   39, 112  ^R Fill Region   57
     ^R Backward Kill Word    39,  51,^R Format Code   116
               65                     ^R Forward Character   16
     ^R Backward List   112           ^R Forward Environment   62
     ^R Backward Paragraph   53, 119  ^R Forward List   112
     ^R Backward SCRIBE Paragraph   62^R Forward Paragraph   53, 119
     ^R Backward Sentence   52        ^R Forward Sentence   52
     ^R Backward Sexp   111           ^R Forward Sexp   111
     ^R   Backward   TECO  Conditional^R Forward TECO Conditional   120
               120                    ^R Forward Up List   112
     ^R Backward Up Environment   62  ^R Forward Word   50
     ^R Backward Up List   112        ^R Get Q-reg   45
     ^R Backward Word   50            ^R Go to AC Field   119
     ^R Beginning of Defun   114      ^R Go to Address Field   119î     261                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     ^R Go to Next Label   119        ^R Narrow Bounds to Page   93, 95
     ^R Go to Previous Label   119    ^R Narrow Bounds to Region   93
     ^R Goto Beginning   16           ^R New Window   16, 87, 194
     ^R Goto End   16                 ^R Next Page   94
     ^R Goto Next Page   96           ^R Next Screen   88
     ^R Goto Page   96                ^R One Window   90
     ^R Goto Previous Page   96       ^R Open Line   18, 19
     ^R Grow Window   91, 158         ^R Other Window   90
     ^R Incremental Search   46, 96   ^R PAGE Widen Bounds   96
     ^R Indent for Comment   107      ^R Prefix Control   11
     ^R Indent for Lisp   110, 115    ^R Prefix Control-Meta   11
     ^R Indent Nested   120           ^R Prefix Meta   11
     ^R Indent New Comment Line   108 ^R Previous Page   94
     ^R  Indent  New  Line    54, 102,^R Previous Screen   88
               105, 115               ^R Put Q-reg   45
     ^R Indent Region   55, 116       ^R Query Replace   100, 157
     ^R Indent Rigidly   55           ^R Quoted Insert   15
     ^R Indent Sexp   116             ^R Re-execute Minibuffer      24,
     ^R Insert ()   112                         99, 157
     ^R Insert Pagemark   97          ^R Reposition Window   89
     ^R Instant Extended Command   23 ^R Return to Superior   31
     ^R Inverse Add Global Word Abbrev^R Reverse Search   46, 96
               174, 178               ^R Save File   17, 70, 85
     ^R  Inverse  Add Mode Word Abbrev^R Scroll Other Window   91
               174, 178               ^R Set Comment Column   109
     ^R Join Next Page   97           ^R Set File Read-Only   70
     ^R Kbd Macro Query   154         ^R Set Fill Column   57, 133
     ^R Kill Comment   108            ^R Set Fill Prefix   57
     ^R Kill Global Word Abbrev   178 ^R Set Screen Size   191
     ^R Kill Line   39                ^R Set/Pop Mark   36
     ^R Kill Mode Word Abbrev   178   ^R Slow Display I-Search   191
     ^R Kill Region   39              ^R Slow Reverse Display  I-search
     ^R Kill Sentence   39, 52                  191
     ^R Kill Sexp   39, 112           ^R Start Kbd Macro   153
     ^R Kill Terminated Word   119    ^R Tab to Tab Stop   50, 55
     ^R Kill Word   39, 51            ^R Transpose Characters   16, 66
     ^R Lowercase Region   59         ^R Transpose Lines   66
     ^R Lowercase Word   58, 66       ^R Transpose Regions   66
     ^R Mark Beginning   37           ^R Transpose Sexps   112
     ^R Mark Defun   37, 114          ^R Transpose Words   51
     ^R Mark End   37                 ^R Two Windows   90
     ^R Mark Environment   62         ^R Un-kill   41
     ^R Mark Page   37, 94            ^R Un-kill Pop   43
     ^R Mark Paragraph   37, 53       ^R Underline Region   61
     ^R Mark Sexp   37, 112           ^R Underline Word   60
     ^R Mark Whole Buffer   37        ^R Universal Argument   19
     ^R Mark Word   37, 51            ^R Up Comment Line   108
     ^R Move Over )   112             ^R Up Real Line   16
     ^R Move to Screen Edge   89      ^R Upcase Digit   66î     262                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     ^R Uppercase Initial   58, 66
     ^R Uppercase Region   36, 59
     ^R Uppercase Word   58, 66
     ^R View Two Windows   91
     ^R Visit File   17, 69
     ^R Visit in Other Window   92
     ^R Widen Bounds   93, 95
     ^R Word Abbrev Prefix Mark   175î     i                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



                             TABLE OF CONTENTSî                             TABLE OF CONTENTSî                             TABLE OF CONTENTS



     Introductionî     Introductionî     Introduction                                                    3


     1.  The Organization of the Screenî     1.  The Organization of the Screenî     1.  The Organization of the Screen                              5

        1.1 The Mode Line                                            6


     2.  Character Sets and Command Input Conventionsî     2.  Character Sets and Command Input Conventionsî     2.  Character Sets and Command Input Conventions               10

        2.1 The 9-bit Command Character Set                         10
        2.2 Prefix Characters                                       11
        2.3 Commands, Functions, and Variables                      12
        2.4 Notational Conventions for ASCII Characters             13


     3.  Basic Editing Commandsî     3.  Basic Editing Commandsî     3.  Basic Editing Commands                                     15

        3.1 Inserting Text                                          15
        3.2 Moving The Cursor                                       16
        3.3 Erasing Text                                            16
        3.4 Files                                                   17
        3.5 Help                                                    17
        3.6 Using Blank Lines Can Make Editing Faster               18


     4.  Giving Numeric Arguments to EMACS Commandsî     4.  Giving Numeric Arguments to EMACS Commandsî     4.  Giving Numeric Arguments to EMACS Commands                 19

        4.1 Autoarg Mode                                            20


     5.  Extended (Meta-X) Commands and Functionsî     5.  Extended (Meta-X) Commands and Functionsî     5.  Extended (Meta-X) Commands and Functions                   21

        5.1 Issuing Extended Commands                               21
        5.2 Arcane Information about M-X Commands                   24


     6.  Moving Up And Down Levelsî     6.  Moving Up And Down Levelsî     6.  Moving Up And Down Levels                                  28

        6.1 Subsystems                                              28
        6.2 Reading Mail                                            29
        6.3 Recursive Editing Levels                                30
        6.4 Exiting Levels; Exiting EMACS                           31î     ii                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     7.  Self-Documentation Commandsî     7.  Self-Documentation Commandsî     7.  Self-Documentation Commands                                33


     8.  The Mark and the Regionî     8.  The Mark and the Regionî     8.  The Mark and the Region                                    36

        8.1 Commands to Mark Textual Objects                        37
        8.2 The Ring of Marks                                       38


     9.  Killing and Moving Textî     9.  Killing and Moving Textî     9.  Killing and Moving Text                                    39

        9.1 Deletion and Killing                                    39
        9.2 Un-Killing                                              41
        9.3 Other Ways of Copying Text                              44


     10.  Searchingî     10.  Searchingî     10.  Searching                                                 46


     11.  Commands for English Textî     11.  Commands for English Textî     11.  Commands for English Text                                 50

        11.1 Word Commands                                          50
        11.2 Sentence and Paragraph Commands                        52
        11.3 Indentation Commands for Text                          54
        11.4 Text Filling                                           56
        11.5 Case Conversion Commands                               58
        11.6 Font-Changing                                          59
        11.7 Underlining                                            60
        11.8 SCRIBE Mode                                            61
        11.9 Dissociated Press                                      63


     12.  Commands for Fixing Typosî     12.  Commands for Fixing Typosî     12.  Commands for Fixing Typos                                 65

        12.1 Killing Your Mistakes                                  65
        12.2 Transposition                                          66
        12.3 Case Conversion                                        66
        12.4 Checking and Correcting Spelling                       67


     13.  File Handlingî     13.  File Handlingî     13.  File Handling                                             69

        13.1 Visiting Files                                         69
        13.2 How to Undo Drastic Changes to a File                  72
        13.3 Auto Save Mode: Protection Against Disasters           72
        13.4 Listing a File Directory                               75
        13.5 Cleaning a File Directory                              75î     iii                                    EMACS Manual for ITS Users



        13.6 DIRED, the Directory Editor Subsystem                  76
        13.7 Miscellaneous File Operations                          79
        13.8 The Directory Comparison Subsystem                     81


     14.  Using Multiple Buffersî     14.  Using Multiple Buffersî     14.  Using Multiple Buffers                                    83

        14.1 Creating and Selecting Buffers                         83
        14.2 Using Existing Buffers                                 85
        14.3 Killing Buffers                                        85


     15.  Controlling the Displayî     15.  Controlling the Displayî     15.  Controlling the Display                                   87


     16.  Two Window Modeî     16.  Two Window Modeî     16.  Two Window Mode                                           90

        16.1 Multiple Windows and Multiple Buffers                  92


     17.  Narrowingî     17.  Narrowingî     17.  Narrowing                                                 93


     18.  Commands for Manipulating Pagesî     18.  Commands for Manipulating Pagesî     18.  Commands for Manipulating Pages                           94

        18.1 Editing Only One Page at a Time                        96


     19.  Replacement Commandsî     19.  Replacement Commandsî     19.  Replacement Commands                                      98

        19.1 Query Replace                                          99
        19.2 Other Search-and-loop Functions                       100
        19.3 TECO Search Strings                                   101


     20.  Editing Programsî     20.  Editing Programsî     20.  Editing Programs                                         102

        20.1 Major Modes                                           102
        20.2 Compiling Your Program                                103
        20.3 Indentation Commands for Code                         104
        20.4 Automatic Display Of Matching Parentheses             105
        20.5 Manipulating Comments                                 107
        20.6 Lisp Mode and Muddle Mode                             110
        20.7 Lisp Grinding                                         115
        20.8 Editing Assembly-Language Programs                    118
        20.9 Major Modes for Other Languages                       120î     iv                                     EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     21.  The TAGS Package.î     21.  The TAGS Package.î     21.  The TAGS Package.                                        122

        21.1 How to Make a Tag Table for a Program                 122
        21.2 How to Tell EMACS You Want to Use TAGS                123
        21.3 Jumping to a Tag                                      124
        21.4 Other Operations on Tag Tables                        125
        21.5 What Constitutes a Tag                                128
        21.6 Adding or Removing Source Files                       129
        21.7 How a Tag Is Described in the Tag Table               130
        21.8 Tag Tables for INFO Structured Documentation Files    131


     22.  Simple Customizationî     22.  Simple Customizationî     22.  Simple Customization                                     133

        22.1 Minor Modes                                           133
        22.2 Libraries of Commands                                 135
        22.3 Variables                                             137
        22.4 The Syntax Table                                      139
        22.5 FS Flags                                              142
        22.6 Init Files and EVARS Files                            143
        22.7 Local Variables in Files                              150
        22.8 Keyboard Macros                                       152


     23.  The Minibufferî     23.  The Minibufferî     23.  The Minibuffer                                           156


     24.  Correcting Mistakes and EMACS Problemsî     24.  Correcting Mistakes and EMACS Problemsî     24.  Correcting Mistakes and EMACS Problems                   159

        24.1 Quitting and Aborting                                 159
        24.2 Dealing with Common Forms of EMACS Lossage            160
        24.3 Undoing Changes to the Buffer                         163
        24.4 Journal Files                                         164
        24.5 Reporting Bugs                                        168


     25.  Word Abbreviation Inputî     25.  Word Abbreviation Inputî     25.  Word Abbreviation Input                                  172

        25.1 Basic Usage                                           173
        25.2 Advanced Usage                                        177
        25.3 Teco Details for Extension Writers                    181


     26.  The PICTURE Subsystem, an Editor for Text Picturesî     26.  The PICTURE Subsystem, an Editor for Text Picturesî     26.  The PICTURE Subsystem, an Editor for Text Pictures       183


     27.  Sorting Functionsî     27.  Sorting Functionsî     27.  Sorting Functions                                        185î     v                                      EMACS Manual for ITS Users



     Appendix I. Particular Types of Terminalsî     Appendix I. Particular Types of Terminalsî     Appendix I. Particular Types of Terminals                     186

        I.1 Ideal Keyboards                                        186
        I.2 Keyboards with an "Edit" key                           187
        I.3 ASCII Keyboards                                        188
        I.4 Upper-case-only Terminals                              189
        I.5 The SLOWLY Package for Slow Terminals                  190


     Appendix II. Use of EMACS from Printing Terminalsî     Appendix II. Use of EMACS from Printing Terminalsî     Appendix II. Use of EMACS from Printing Terminals             194


     Glossaryî     Glossaryî     Glossary                                                      196


     Command Summaryî     Command Summaryî     Command Summary                                               208


     Catalog of Librariesî     Catalog of Librariesî     Catalog of Libraries                                          234


     Index of Variablesî     Index of Variablesî     Index of Variables                                            240


     Indexî     Indexî     Index                                                         253î